Open CNC Ladder Eiting Package-Operator Manual

7/25/2019 Open CNC Ladder Eiting Package-Operator Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/open-cnc-ladder-eiting-package-operator-manual 1/327

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Open CNC

Ladder Editing Package

Operator's Manual

GFZ-62884EN/01 September 1996



GFL-001

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

as Used in this Publication

Warning

Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,

temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or

may be associated with its use.

In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a

Warning notice is used.

Caution

Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note

Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and

operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts

have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover alldetails or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in

connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein

which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes

no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or

usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for

purpose shall apply.

©Copyright 1996 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.



B–62884EN/01 Table of contents

i

1. GENERAL 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1 OVERVIEW 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2 THE MAJOR FUNCTIONS 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.1 The Overview of Ladder Editing Package 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.2 Supported PMC Functions 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.3 Sequence Program Creation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3 ABOUT PMC PROGRAM 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3.1 PMC Programming Method 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3.2 About Symbol & Comment Data 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 PACKAGE CONFIGURATION 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3 INSTALLATION 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.1 Registering the Software in the Windows [Programs] Menu 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.2 Installing the Software to Invoke from the DOS Command Prompt 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4 DIRECTORY CONFIGURATION AFTER INSTALLATION 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5 CONFIG.SYS 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6 FILE CONFIGURATION 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6.1 File System 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6.2 The Constitution of Source Program 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. OPERATION 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 STARTING THE LADDER EDITING PACKAGE 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.1 Menu Structure 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3 COMMON SYSTEM OPERATIONS 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4 ON–LINE FUNCTIONS 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.1 Overview of the On–Line Functions 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4.2 File 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.3 Diagnose 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.4 Input/Output 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.5 Communication 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.6 Examples of Operation 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5 OFF-LINE FUNCTION 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.1 General 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.2 Editing 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.3 Printout 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.4 Compilation 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.5 Decompilation 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.6 Input/Output 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.7 Setting Program Options 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.8 Mnemonic Editing 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.9 Utility 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.10 Selecting On-Line Function from Off-Line Function 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 A : INITIAL MENU 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.1 Fatal Error 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.2 Error 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 B : TITLE EDITING 240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



B–62884EN/01Table of contents

ii

4.2.1 Error 240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 C : I/O MODULE EDITING 241. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3.1 Error 241. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3.2 Warning 241. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4 D : SYSTEM PARAMETER EDITING 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4.1 Error 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5 E : LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE EDITING 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5.1 Fatal Error 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5.2 Error (at Editing Ladder Diagram) 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5.3 Error (at Editing Step Sequence) 244. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5.4 Warning (at Editing Ladder Diagram) 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6 F : SYMBOL & COMMENT EDITING 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6.1 Error 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7 G : MESSAGE EDITING 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7.1 Error 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.8 H : PRINTOUT 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.8.1 Fatal Error 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.8.2 Error 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.8.3 Warning 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9 I : COMPILE 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9.1 Fatal Error 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9.2 Error 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9.3 Warning 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10 J : DECOMPILATION 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10.1 Fatal Error 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10.2 Error 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10.3 Warning 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.11 K : MNEMONIC CONVERSION 258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.11.1 Fatal Error 258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.11.2 Error 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.11.3 Warning 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12 L : INPUT/OUTPUT 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12.1 Error 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12.2 Warning 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13 N : ON–LINE MONITOR 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13.1 Error 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX

A. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.1 SYSTEM PARAMETERS 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.1.1 Editing 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.1.2 Examples of Mnemonic Files (Single–Format) 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.2 LINK 284. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B. AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C. CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE “%%% FLSET. CNF” 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



B–62884EN/01

iii

D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D.1 DIFFERENCES FROM FAPT LADDER 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D.2 CONVERSION FROM FAPT LADDER 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D.3 CONVERT THE PMC TYPE OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D.3.1 Converting by System Parameter Editing 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D.3.2 Conversion Using a Signal Address Converter 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D.3.3 Using Data in a Sequence Program for Another Program 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D.4 TRANSFER FROM P–G 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D.4.1 Function for Transferring Data between the P–G and PC 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E. STANDARD SYMBOL DATA 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES) 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G. CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H. DATA TRANSFER CABLES 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I. INQUIRY FORM 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



B–62884EN/01 1. GENERAL

1

1



1. GENERAL B–62884EN/01

2

Thank you for purchasing Ladder Editing Package.

Ladder Editing Package is a programming system for developingFANUC PMC sequence programs.This software is designed to operate on the FANUC OPEN CNC andsupports both the Japanese and English languages. For details of theoperating conditions, see Chapter 2.

Personalcomputer

Name Specification Remarks

FANUC OPEN CNC Ladder EditingPackage

A08B-9201-J510 Japanese andEnglish are bothsupported

The development of a sequence program on a personal computer,operating independently of the FANUC OPEN CNC, requires the use of the sequence program development software listed below. For details,refer to the relevant manuals.

Name Operator’s manual

FAPT LADDER FAPT LADDER Operator ’s Manual (B–66131E)

FAPT LADDER–II FAPT LADDER–II Operator’s Manual (B–66184EN)

This manual explains procedures required to install, activate, and operatethis software about that are specific to the system designed for use withpersonal computers.For PMC operations and how to create PMC sequence programs, refer tothe manuals listed below.

[FANUC PMC-MODEL PA1/PA3/RA1/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4 /RB5/RB6/RC/RC3/RC4/NB/NB2 Programming manual (LADDERlanguage) ] B-61863E

Inquiry formIf you have any questions after reading this operator’smanual and the manuals listed above, use the inquiry formattached at Appendix I to consult us the questions.

1.1OVERVIEW




3

The following abbreviations are used in this manual.

1) For PMC models

Abbreviations PMC Models

PMC-R Series· PMC-RA3· PMC-RB3

· PMC-RB4· PMC-RB5· PMC-RB6· PMC-RC3· PMC-RC4

FANUC PMC-MODEL RA3FANUC PMC-MODEL RB3

FANUC PMC-MODEL RB4FANUC PMC-MODEL RB5FANUC PMC-MODEL RB6FANUC PMC-MODEL RC3FANUC PMC-MODEL RC4

2) Others

Abbreviations Name

OPEN CNCMMC–IVHSSB

FANUC OPEN CNCFANUC MMC–IVHigh Speed Serial Bus

MS-DOS and PC-DOS are both referred to simply as DOS, unless itis necessary to distinguish between the two operating systems.




4

The Ladder Editing Package is a software package that enables the use of the following PMC functions and sequence program development

functions on the OPEN CNC.

<Ladder Editing Package functions>

1) Sequence program input, display, editing, and output

2) Sequence program monitoring/debugging

– Signal status monitoring

– PMC status monitoring

– Ladder monitoring/editing

– Alarm display

– Cross reference display

3) PMC parameter setting/display

4) Sequence program execution/termination5) Writing to flash ROM

6) Sequence program printout

1.2THE MAJORFUNCTIONS

1.2.1

The Overview ofLadder EditingPackage




5

Ladder editingpackage

Floppy disk

CNC / PMC

Input/editing

DI/ DO

Keyboard

Printer

Drawing

Hard disk

OPEN CNC

Machine

On–line functions

Sequence program monitoring/debugging

Sequence program execution/termination

Sequence program transfer

PMC parameter setting/display

Fig.1.2.1.1 Function Overview

A variety of OPEN CNC system configurations are described below.

1) System with a FANUC NC board, built into a commerciallyavailable personal computer

[Overview]

→ Personalcomputer

Machine

FANUC NC board

Incorporated

Fig.1.2.1.2(a)

1.2.1.1Function Overview

1.2.1.2OPEN CNC SystemConfigurations




6

[Program backup destination]

PMC program memory [hard disk] of the personal computer

2) System with a personal computer board (MMC–IV), built intothe CNC

[Overview]

Machine

CNC with MMC–IV

Fig.1.2.1.2(b)

[CRT/MDI operation]

When using this system with the CRT/MDI panel, assign thosekeys that are not available on the CRT/MDI panel as describedbelow. For details, refer to the “FANUC MMC–IV Operator’s

Manual (B–62494EN).”Key Correspondence

Full keyboard CRT/MDI

Ctrl

Tab

Alt

BackSpace

Esc

Custom

System

Alter

Can

HELP

NoteThe CRT/MDI keys cannot be used to start a system bymeans of Japanese input. To enter comments in Japanese,use the full keyboard.


PMC flash memory

3) System in which the CNC is connected to a commerciallyavailable personal computer via the high–speed serial bus




7

[Overview]

Personalcomputer

High–speedserial bus

Machine

CNC

Fig.1.2.1.2(c)


PMC flash memory

4) System in which the CNC is connected to a FANUC intelligentterminal via the high–speed serial bus

[Overview]

High–speedserial bus

Machine

CNCIntelligentterminal

Fig.1.2.1.2(d)

[CRT/MDI operation]

See Item 2) above.


PMC flash memory

1) Supported PMC models

The following PMC models are supported:

– PMC–RA3

– PMC–RB3

– PMC–RB4

– PMC–RB5

– PMC–RB6

– PMC–RC3

– PMC–RC4

2) Supported functions for each PMC model

Table 1.2.2 lists the supported functions for each PMC model. Fordetails of the functions, refer to the sections indicated in the“Reference section” column.

1.2.2Supported PMCFunctions




8

Table 1.2.2 Functions Supported for Each PMC Model

Function

PMC model

Referencesection

RA3 RB3 RB4RB4

(STEPSEQ)

RB5 RB6RB6

(STEPSEQ)

RC3 RC4RC4

(STEPSEQ)

Step sequenceprogram

1.33.5.2

On–line functions 3.4 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆

Off–line functions 3.5

Input/ p

PMC

device Handy File 3.5.6

Memory card ∆ ∆ ∆

Link function Section A.2 inAppendix A

: Usable : Not usable

∆ : May be usable (Whether the functions are supported varies with the series and editions of the PMC and CNC.For details, refer to the PMC programming manual.)

1.2.3Sequence ProgramCreation




9

Start control system development

Determine control targets (machine, CNC)

Determine control operation specifications(calculation of number of DI/DO points, control scale determination)

Determine interface specifications (DI/DO assignment)

Create sequence program (design, address map determination, coding)

In on–line mode, programming/monitoring can be performed during communication with the PMC. Inoff–line mode, programming is performed on the OPEN CNC without communication. Other PMC pro-gramming systems (for use with personal computers) are FAPT LADDER and FAPT LADDER–II. For

details, refer to the following manuals: – FAPT LADDER Operator’s Manual (B–66131E)

– FAPT LADDER–II Operator’s Manual (B–66184EN)

Ladder diagram monitoring/editing

Signal monitoring

Ladder diagram editing

YES

New?

NO

Debuggingcompleted?

Compile (link)Print?

Decompile

Sequence program printing

Sequence program input, editing, debugging, and printing

On–line functions Off–line functions

YES

End

Mnemonicediting

YES

End

YES

NO NO

NO

NODebuggingcompleted?

Fig.1.2.3 Sequence Program Creation




10

The ladder method is most of ten used for programming the sequencecontrol governed by a PMC. This method was derived from relay-panel

control circuits. Since it has been in use for years, many sequenceengineers are already familiar with it.The greater the number of functions implemented by the PMC, the largerand the more complicated the sequence program becomes. And it is hardto describe such program for ladder method.To overcome this problem, step sequence method programming has beenintroduced.

(1) What is the step sequence method ?

The step sequence is one of the method for programming a sequencecontrol governed by a programmable controller, this method featuresthe direct representation of the control flow on a flow chart. Each

block of processing is described as a subprogram, using the laddermethod. Therefore it provides an easy-to-understand visualized flowof the processes and is well-suited to the control of entire process.

See 1.2.2 Supported PMC Functions for the machines are able to use thestep sequence.

For the details of the step sequence method, refer to the following manual.

[3.5.2.2.(3) STEP SEQUENCE EDITING]

(2) The configuration of a sequence program

A sequence program consists of the following 5kinds of program unit ;

· The 1st level of ladder

· The 2nd level of ladder· The 3rd level of ladder

· Subprograms of ladder

· Subprograms of step sequence

1.3ABOUT PMCPROGRAM

1.3.1

PMC ProgrammingMethod




11

LEVEL 1 ( LADDER)

LEVEL 2 ( LADDER)

LEVEL 3 ( LADDER)

Sub Program P1 (Step Sequence)

Sub Program P2 (LADDER)

Sub Program P3 (LADDER)

Sub Program Pn (Step Sequence)

(3) Data flow

Subprogram P2

Subprogram P1

Ladder 3rd level

Ladder 2nd level


Source program

Ladder 1st levelMnemonic

conversion

Mnemonic program

A mnemonic program without

step sequence

↓

Compilation/Decompilation

↓

Object code

Memory card format file

CNC




12

You can assign names or add notes to I/O signals, internal relays, and canadd notes to a sequence program.They are generally called “symbol & comment data”.

(1) The definition of terms

The definition of terms are shown below to distinguish between somesymbol & comment data.

Terms Definition and uses Display

Symbol Name assigneduniquely to eachrelay/coil,to be used in place ofPMC address.

X0.0 INPUT

Relay comment Text assigned torelays/coils toexplain them.

X0.0 Y0.0

RELAY XCOMMENT

COIL YCOMMENT

Coil comment Text assigned to coilsto explain them.

Y0.0HERE IS COILCOMMENT

Net comment Text assignedbetween ladder netsto explain them.

(* HERE IS NET *)(* COMMENT *)

(2) Symbol & comment specification list

(a) For input signal and internal relay

Specification Symbol Relay comment Coil comment

Availablecharacters ASCII characters(lower-casealphabeticcharacters notallowed)

ASCII charactersJapanesekana/kanjicharacters

ASCII charactersJapanesekana/kanjicharacters

Maximum cha. 16 byte 16 byte 30 byte

Maximumnumber

20,000 entries(Note)

20,000(Note)

20,000(Note)

Duplicateddefinition

Not allowed Allowerd Allowerd

NoteFree area size of hard disk drive, EMS and XMS on personal

computer may restrict them.

1.3.2About Symbol &Comment Data




13

(b) For ladder sequence program

Specification Net comment

Available characters ASCII charactersJapanese kana/kanji charactersLine feed

Steps to occupy 2 step/Net comment

Maximum characters/line 64 characters/line4095 characters/Net comment (Note 1)

Maximum lines 100 lines/Net commennt (Note 1)

Maximum number About 20,000 Net comments (Note 2)

Notes1. The limitation which is reached first becomes the limitation for the

Net comment.2. Number of characters in each Net comment effects on maximum

number of Net comments. Free area size of hard disk drive, EMS

and XMS on personal computer may further restrict them.



2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OFPACKAGE B–62884EN/01

14

2



B–62884EN/01

2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OFPACKAGE

15

To use this software, configurations of hardware and software are requiredas follows.

Computer FUNUC OPEN CNC

CPU 386SX or higher

OS · Microsoft Windows 95 (Note 1)· DOS Version 5.0/V or later (to activate Japanese/

English system)· DOS Version 5.0 or later (to activate English system)

Device driver · Extended Drivers and Librarys.(For DOS : A02B–0207–K706 For Windows : A02B–0207–K726)

· Drivers and Librarys(For DOS : A02B–0207–K707 For Windows : A02B–0207–K727) (Note 2)

CNC function FANUC OPEN CNC Additional option· EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES

FUNCTION (A02B–0207–J800)· Ladder Editing Package Function

(A02B–0207–J820)

Memory · Conventional memory 520 Kbytes or more (Note 3)· EMS and/or XMS of 4 Mbytes or more (recommended)

(Note 4)

Hard disk 5 Mbytes or more space (Note 5)

Graphic adapter VGA or higher

Printer EPSON VP1000 and compatible printers (Note6)

Japanese languageinput system

Input system in conormity with MS-KANJI API

Notes1 When using this saftware under Windows95, Please install

the software by the installation procedure described in

[2.3.1 Registering the software in the Windows [Programs]menu. ]

2 A device driver tailored to the OPEN CNC systemconfiguration must be incorporated.

3 Even if the machine has 640 Kbytes memory, the freememory may be less than 520 Kbytes when an installeddriver, for example, uses a large memory space.The size of free space in memory can be checked with theDOS command CHKDSK.

4 The quantity of EMS and XMS memory effects on theperformance to handle Symbol data and Net comment.Please prepare enough EMS and XMS memory specicallyfor Symbol data or Net comment of large number.Moreover, at the system with EMS less than 256 Kbytes, themaximum number of steps which this software can handlemay be restricted.Please prepare 256 Kbytes or more EMS if possible.

5 In addition, an space for storing sequence data is required.6 [NEC PR201H]and[FANUC PRINTER]are also available by

changing system file.For details, refer to[3.5.3.6 Changing the Printer].

2.1OPERATINGENVIRONMENT




16

About size of Expansion memory to be used :

Expansion memory are used for ladder and symbol & comment data asan temporary area. Although, Ladder Editing Package runs with no EMS& XMS, enough size of EMS and/or XMS memory according to thesource program to handle will be necessary for better performance.

(1) Expansion memory

When reading ladder programs, Ladder Editing Package uses EMSif available. If EMS is not available, Ladder Editing Package usesconventional memory. When only conventional memory is used, upto 21840 program steps can be created. When 256KB EMS memoryis available, however, up to 32000 program steps can be created. Thesize of EMS is 256KB for all PMC models, regardless of the size of the program to be edited.

(2) Expanded memory for Symbol & Comment data

FAPT LADDER uses EMS and/or XMS memory for Symbol &Comment data if available.

When neither of them are available, Ladder Editing Package willmake temporary file on the hard diskdrive, and processing largenumber of Symbol & Comment data may be slower.

About 200 Kbytes of EMS & XMS memory are used for every 1,000Symbol data.

(3) Expanded memory for Net comment

Ladder Editing Package also uses EMS and/or XMS memory, ortemporary file as same as Symbol & Comment data. If neither EMSnor XMS is prepared, use hard disk.

About 200 to 300 Kbytes of EMS or XMS memory are used for every1,000 Net coment.



B–62884EN/01


17

The Ladder Editing Package is distributed on the five system disks listedbelow. These disks are of 3.5–inch, 2HD type (1.44MB). Check that noneof the system disks is missing.

(1) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.1)/A08B–9201–J510#ZZ07–1





2.2PACKAGECONFIGURATION




18

There are two different installaction procedures to install the software.One is to register the software in the Windows [Programs] menu.Theother is to invoke this software from the DOS command prompt.

The following describes the installation of this software from floppy disk drive A to hard disk drive C.

(1) Insert Vol. 1 into drive A.(2) Click the [Start] button, then click the [Run…] dialog box.

(3) Enter “A:¥SETUP” in the [Open] box of the [Run] dialog box.

Open :

Type the name of a program, folder, or document, and Windows will open

it for you.

Run [ ? ] []

A: ¥SETUP ↓

Ok Cancel Browse . . .

(4) The message below appears, and the setup program is started.

SETUP

Initializing Setup...

2.3INSTALLATION

2.3.1Registering the

Software in theWindows [Programs]Menu



B–62884EN/01


19

(5) Specify the hard disk drive to which the software is to be installed(Note).

Welcome to Ladder Editing Package.

Setup will place system files into the following drive.

If you want to install these files in a different disk drive,

select the install disk drive.

Ladder Editing Package setup

[ ] c:[C_DRIVE]

Continue Exit Setup

↓

Install to :

(6) Specify the OPEN CNC interface type. If the OPEN CNC has alreadybeen installed in the personal computer, the installer automaticallyidentifies the interface type, and the dialog box shown below appears.If the detected interface type matches that of the Ladder EditingPackage to be installed, click [Ok].

Interface Type 2 is detected.

Ladder Editing Package for Type 2 will be installed.


Ok Cancel

If the OPEN CNC has not yet been installed in the personal computer,the dialog box shown below appears. Select the interface type of theOPEN CNC to be installed.

Interface Type 1

Interface Type 2

Interface driver is not detected.

Whitch type Interface driver are you want to use ?


Ok Cancel

Ô Ô Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô Ô Ô

Interface Type




20

(7) Select the language of the messages to be installed. The size of thefiles to be installed and the amount of free space available on the harddisk to which the software will be installed are displayed. If there issufficient free space for the installation, click [Ok].

English only

Japanese only

English and Japanese

Select language of message to be installed.


7808K

Ô Ô Ô Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô Ô Ô Ô

Install Language

Required space:

Ô Ô Ô Ô Ô

Disk information

C:

128000KAvailable space:

Ok

Cancel

(8) Select a display color type according to the display unit to be used.After selecting a display color type, click [Test] to check the displayappearance. If the colors are displayed correctly, click [Ok].

COLOR

MONO 1

MONO 2

Select color type.


Ok Cancel

Ô Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô Ô

Color type

Test



B–62884EN/01


21

(9) The dialog box shown below appears during installation. Insert therequested floppy disk, then click [Ok].

Please insert the following disk (or type the new directory),

and then press <Enter>.


Disk 2(Ladder Editing Package Vol.2) Floppydiskto be in-serted

A : ¥

Ok Cancel

(10)Upon the completion of installation, the Ladder Editing Package isregistered in the [Programs] menu.

NoteThe configuration of the directory in which the LadderEditing Package has been installed cannot be modified.




22

The following describes the installation of the Ladder Editing Packagefrom floppy disk drive A to hard disk drive C.

(1) Insert Vol. 1 into drive A.

(2) Enter “A:¥INSTALL” at the DOS command prompt.

> A : ¥INSTALL

(3) The installer is started, and the title screen appears. Select [Continue].

(4) Enter the hard disk drive to which the software is to be installed(Note).

Install to :

Enter disk drive name to install the

Ladder Editing Package:

C

Ok Quit

Fig.2.3.2(a)

(5) Specify an OPEN CNC interface type. If the OPEN CNC is alreadyinstalled in the personal computer, the interface type is automaticallyidentified by the installer, and the dialog box shown below appears.

After checking that the interface type detected by the installer iscorrect, select [Ok].

Interface Type 1 is detected.

Ladder Editing Package for Type 1 will be installed.

Ok Quit

Fig.2.3.2(b)

If the OPEN CNC is not installed in the personal computer yet, thedialog box shown below appears. Select the interface typecorresponding to the OPEN CNC to be installed.

2.3.2Installing the Softwareto Invoke from the DOSCommand Prompt



B–62884EN/01


23

The Interface driver has not been detected.

Which Interface driver will be used?

Ok Quit

Interface Type 1

Interface Type 2

Fig.2.3.2(c)

(6) Select an installation message language.

Select language of message to be installed.

English and Japanese

Japanese only

English only

Fig.2.3.2(d)

(7) To set the display color, the dialog box shown below appears. Thedialog box color can be changed by selecting an appropriate display

color option with the and keys. Select a color option that

is appropriate for the display unit.

COLOR

MONO1

MONO2

Select color type.

Ok Quit

Fig.2.3.2(e)




24

(8) The selected options are displayed. After checking that the desiredoptions are selected, select [Yes]. The installation is started.

Install drive : C: ¥FANUC¥LEP

Interface : Type 1

Language : English only

Are you sure to start installation?

Yes No

(9) When the installation terminates normally, the message shown belowappears.

Installation is done.

Exit

Fig.2.3.2(f)

NoteThe configuration of the installation destination directorycannot be modified.



B–62884EN/01


25

The Ladder Editing Package is installed by the installer under thedirectory configuration indicated below. The user can freely select thehard disk drive to which installation is to be performed, but cannot modifythe directory name.

: Ladder Editing Package system

: Japanese message data for the Ladder EditingPackage system

: English message data for the Ladder EditingPackage system

: OPEN CNC system (separate system)

: Basic operation package (separate system)

(1) Message file directory

According to the message language selection made at installation, theinstaller creates the subdirectories listed below to enable the installation of the message files.

a. When the Japanese message option was selected

C:¥FANUC¥LEP

: Japanese message data for the LadderEditing Package

b. When the English message option was selected

C:¥FANUC¥LEP

: English message data for the LadderEditing Package

c. When the Japanese and English message option was selectedC:¥FANUC¥LEP

: Japanese message data for the LadderEditing Package

: English message data for the LadderEditing Package

(2) Work directoryAs a work directory, the following subdirectory is created automatically.A program used on–line is stored under this directory, and can be editedoff–line.

C:¥FANUC¥LEP

: Work directory

2.4DIRECTORYCONFIGURATIONAFTERINSTALLATION C:¥FANUC

LEP

JPN

ENG

CNC

BOP

JPN

ENG

JPN

ENG

PMC0000




26

To use the system, make the following modifications to theCONFIG.SYS file.

(1) When the system is used under Windows 95 (when Windows 95 isinstalled in C:¥WINDOWS)

DEVICE=¥WINDOWS¥ANSI.SYS

DEVICE=¥WINDOWS¥EMM386.EXE

When the system is used under Windows 95, the Japanese inputsystem is not specified in the CONFIG.SYS file. The specificationmethod depends on the Japanese input system being used. Whenusing the system from the MS–DOS prompt, both the Japanese inputsystem registered in Windows and that of the DOS version can beused. In MS–DOS mode, only the DOS–version Japanese inputsystem can be used. Additions or modifications to the settings of theWindows Japanese input system can be made by modifying theLanguage item of Keyboard Properties, after double–clicking theKeyboard icon on the Control Panel. The DOS version Japaneseinput system can be installed by using the ADDDRV command. Fordetails of the installation method, see DOSIME.BAT under theCOMMAND directory of Windows and DOSIME.SYS under theroot directory of the start–up disk.

(2) When the system is used under DOS (In the following example, DOSis already installed in C:¥DOS.)

DEVICE=C:¥DOS¥ANSI.SYS

DEVICE=C:¥DOS¥EMM386.EXE

DEVICE=C:¥DOS¥MSIME.SYS

DEVICE=C:¥DOS¥MSIMEK.SYS

(a) ANSI.SYS (required)

The display mode and attributes of the display unit are set. Thissetting cannot be omitted.

(b) EMM386.EXE

This device driver enables the use of expansion memory as EMS

memory. When using another EMS driver, refer to the relevantmanual for details of the setting required in CONFIG.SYS.

(c) MSIME.SYS/MSIMEK.SYS

This device driver enables the use of MS–KANJI API forJapanese–language input. When using another Japaneselanguage input system, refer to the relevant manual for details of the setting required in CONFIG.SYS.

2.5CONFIG.SYS



B–62884EN/01


27

Notes1 All of the above device drivers are provided as standard with

Windows 95/MS–DOS. The specification of switches andparameters may be required for the above settings. Fordetails, refer to the windows 95/the MS–DOS on–line helpor the relevant manual.

2 When using a memory card, refer to the manual providedwith the memory card for details of the setting required inCONFIG.SYS.

3 Some device drivers may adversely affect the LadderEditing Package. If a problem is anticipated, specify onlyANSI.SYS in CONFIG.SYS. Omit the specification of theother device drivers. When only ANSI.SYS is specified,Ladder Editing Package will support only English, but allowsany contention with other device drivers to be identifiedquickly. Recognized conflicts are listed in Appendix G.




28

The files constituting system are described below.

(1) Customizable filesSome functions can be customized by the user. These functionsinclude setting of the format for printing created ladder programs, andcommunication port setting based on the RS-232C standard.For these functions, the associated data is held in text-format files,which can be directly edited by the user. These files are listed below.

(a) Printing (For details, see Section 3.5.3.5.)· AMROFTRP.DAT· CROSSINF.DAT· *.INF

(b) Communications (For details, see Section 3.5.6.1.)· FLIO_AT.DAT

(c) Compile/decompile (For details, see Section 3.5.7.3.)

· OPTION.CNF(d) Entire system

· FLMNE.DAT (For details, see Section 3.5.8.7.)· FLVIEW.DAT (For details, see Section 3.5.9.)

(2) Other files

(a) README.TXT/READMEJ.TXTThese text files contain important information that becameavailable after the manual was printed.Use this information in combination with the manual. Note thatREADMEJ.TXT contains Japanese text, while README.TXTcontains English text.

(b) *.JPN/*.ENGA file having either of the above extensions contains most of themessages (menus, displayed instructions, and error indications)to be displayed or printed by the system. The location of such afile is described in Section 2.4.

(c) FLMNE.ERRThe results (including errors) of mnemonic conversion arewritten into this text file.

(d) *.EXEA file having this extension is an executable file. Such files arenot handled by the user.

(3) Files that are not installedThe files under subdirectory ¥APPENDIX on Volume 5 are notinstalled by the installer. These files are listed below.

(a) Printing (For details, see Section 3.5.3.6.)· AMROFTRP.ESC· AMROFTRP.PR

(b) Standard symbols (For details, see Appendix E.)· F16&18-M. SYM· F16&18-T. SYM· PM-D.SYM· PM-H.SYM· FS0M-CNV. SYM· FS0T-CNV. SYM· PM-C_CNV. SYM

2.6FILECONFIGURATION

2.6.1

File System



B–62884EN/01


29

(c) Message conversion tools (For details, see Appendix F.)· _CHGMES.EXE

A sequence program, which is object of editing and printing, is calledsource program and managed by storing in files below.

in case of named “C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE” as source program

C:¥

data¥

· SAMPLE.ERR· SAMPLE.MAP

execution result filemap file

(Note 1)(Note 1)

SAMPLE¥

· CONTROL Source program managing file· SYSPARAM System parameter data file

· TITLE Title data file· XSYMBOL.xxx Symbol & Comment data file (Note 2)· MESSAGE Message data file· IOMODULE I/O module data file· LEVEL1. #LA 1st level ladder data file· LEVEL2. #LA 2nd level ladder data file· LEVEL3. #LA 3rd level ladder data file (Note 3)· Pyyy. #LA Sub-program ladder data file (Note 4)· Pzzz. #SS Sub-program step sequence data file(Note 4)· NETCMT.xxx Net comment data file (Note 2)· MCARD Memory card format data file

Notes1. Contain source program compile/decompile results and map

information. These files are not included in a source program, but

are named in accordance with the name of the source program.

These files are stored under the directory one level above the

source program storage directory.

2. ”xxx” is number of multi file managing.

3. Only for using LEVEL-3 ladder.

4. ”yyy”, ”zzz” is number of sub-program.

2.6.2The Constitution of

Source Program



3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

30

3



B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

31

1 Starting the Ladder Editing Package from the DOS command line

(1) Move to the drive and directory where the system software of theLadder Editing Package is installed.

(2) Key in “FLADDER Enter .”

Example:Starting the Ladder Editing Package when the packageis installed under the ¥FANUC¥LEP directory of driveC.

A : ¥>C :

C : ¥>CD ¥FANUC¥LEP

C : ¥FANUC¥LEP>FLADDER

Enter

Enter

Enter

(3) The on–line functions are activated as soon as the Ladder EditingPackage is started.

End

DOS prompt

Start (command name FLADDER)

On–line functions Off–line functions

End

NoteIf “Interface Type 1” is selected at installation, the LadderEditing Package will not operate normally if the package isstarted from the Windows DOS prompt. If “Interface Type1” is selected at installation, first terminate Windows, thenstart the Ladder Editing Package from the DOS commandline.

2 Starting the Ladder Editing Package from Windows

(1) To start the system software of the Ladder Editing Package whenthe package is installed under Windows, double–click thecorresponding icon. Once the Ladder Editing Package has beenstarted, the on–line functions are activated.

3.1STARTING THELADDER EDITINGPACKAGE




32

OPEN CNC, DOS/Windows, Ladder Editing Package,extended driver/library

Install DOS/Windows

Incorporate device driver (Modificationof CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT)

Install extended driver/library disk or driver library disk installation,and incorporate driver

Install Ladder Editing Package

Start Ladder Editing Package

Operate Ladder Editing Package

End?

Termination of Ladder Editing Package

NO

YES

(Reference)

Fig.3.1 Flow of Operations Required to Start the Ladder Editing Package

3 Terminating the Ladder Editing Package

The Ladder Editing Package can be terminated in either of thefollowing two ways.

(1) Select [Exit] from the pull–down menu for [1.File] of the on–linefunctions.See Section 3.4 for an explanation of on–line function menuselection.

(2) Select [Exit] from the off–line function menu.See Section 3.5 for an explanation of off–line function menuselection.




33

The menu screens displayed by the system are structured as shown below.

Timer

PMC status

Load program

MS–DOS

Signal status

Signal Trace

1On–line function File

Off–line function (1) See Fig. 3.2.1(b)

2Diagnose

PMC alarm status

3 I/O

4Commu-nication

Communication

Exit

PMC parameter

RUN/STOP the program

Backup programStore program

Data tableData table control

Keep relay

Counter

Start

Ladder monitoring/On–line editing

Restore PMC parameter

Save PMC parameter

Signal trigger/Ladder debug

System information

Signal Analysis

Fig.3.2.1(a) Menu Structure (1)

3.2OVERVIEW OFOPERATION

3.2.1Menu Structure




34

Title

FA writer

Source program → mnemonic file

Step sequence

TitleStep sequence

(1)

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6PROGRAMOPTION SET–UP

F8

F9

F10

F1Off–line function EDIT

PRINT

COMPILE

DECOMPILE

I/O

F7MNEMONIC EDIT

UTILITY

ON–LINEFUNCTION

END

Ladder diagram

SymbolParameter

Bit address map Cross reference list

Message

I/O module

ROM format file

Backup

Memory card

Handy File

PMC

PMC writer

Linker

View result

FloadatDos

Execute user batch files

Mnemonic file → source program

I/O module

Message

Symbol & comment

Ladder diagram/

System parameter

Fig.3.2.1(b) Menu Structure (2)




35

The operations described below are common operations.

(1) Function keysWhen the menu items shown below are displayed in reverse video,the user can select the desired menu item by pressing thecorresponding function key.

1 EDIT 2 PRINT 3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP5 I/O 6 SET–UP 7 MNEEDT 8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10 END

[F1] [F2] [F3] [F4] [F5] [F6] [F7] [F8] [F9] [F10]

(2) Escape key

The escape key Esc has the same effect as selecting [END] with the

function key. The escape key terminates the current screen thenreturns the display to the previous screen in the menu hierarchy.

(3) Cursor keys

The cursor keys , , , and are used to move the

cursor to select input items.When two or more cursors can be used on a single screen, the second

or subsequent cursor can be moved by pressing the Shift key together

with the or key.

(4) Scroll keys

The scroll keys PageDown and Page

Up display the next page and the previous

page, respectively.

(5) [INS] keyThis key switches between the overwrite mode <O> and insert mode<I>.

(6) [TAB] key

When multipul keys are displayed, press Tab key and select one

button.

(7) Status lineA status line is displayed at the top of the screen.

Item name PMC Model

Current

directory name

Main menu PMC–RB3 <O> [C : ¥FLADDER ]

Edit mode (Overwrite/insert)

NoteThe indications on the key tops may slightly vary from thedescriptions of this manual, depending on the personalcomputer used.

(8) Pop–up menu

When the following pop–up menu appears, the desired process canbe selected using any of the three methods described below.

3.3COMMON SYSTEMOPERATIONS




36

The file already exists.

F1 UpdateF2 QuitF3 Append

1) Cursor movement

To select an item, press the cursor key or , such thatthe item to be selected is displayed in reverse video. Then,

pressing the Enter key selects that item.

2) Function key

A function key is indicated at the left of each item. To select anitem, press the corresponding function key.

3) Command name

An uppercase letter in (usually, the initial of) an item name is the

command name. In the above case, pressing the letter key U ,

Q , or A can select the Update, Quit, or Append command,

respectively.

(9) Pull–down menus

On some screens, the following menu bar is displayed along the topof the screen

Function number.

function name Icon for

PMC status indication

(See the section explan-

ing how to start the on–

line functions.)

I1. File 2. Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication

Pressing the Alt key displays the pull–down menu for I1. File

The pull–down menu for a function can also be displayed by pressing

the Alt key and the corresponding function number simultaneously.

Exit

I1. File 2. Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication

File save

Using the cursor keys, position the highlight to the desired item ona function’s pull–down menu. A menu item with an arrow mark ( )at its right edge has its own pull–down menu, which can be displayed

by pressing the key.

The target screen is displayed by pressing the Enter key after

positioning the highlight to a desired menu item.




37

The on–line functions are used to perform ladder and signal statusmonitoring, display, and modification on the OPEN CNC screen.

[Menu structure]

(1) [1.File] menuWith this menu, the user can write to and read from a file on hard disk or floppy disk, switch between functions, and terminate processing.

(2) [2.Diagnose] menuWith this menu, the user can display the PMC status and performediting for PMC status display.

(3) [3.I/O] menuWith this menu, the user can write programs to and read programsfrom the PMC.

(4) [4.Communication] menuWith this menu, the user can establish communications for PMCstatus display and PMC operation.

1) Starting the Ladder Editing Package

2) Loading programs from the PMC (automatic)

[When programs have already been loaded]

A comparison is automatically made between the PMC programsand those which have already been loaded.

<When a mismatch is found>

– Program load operation

– Program store operation

– Continuation or end

3)

File

– Relay comment

– Net comment

4) On–line functions

– Diagnosis

– I/O (Program load/store, writing toF–ROM)

– Communication (with the PMC)

– Off–line function selection

4)

Ladder Editing Package PMC

Sequence program(RAM)

Power ON

Sequence program(F–ROM)Sequence program

(RAM)3) Ladder monitoring

4)

3)

Fig.3.4.1.1 Overview of On–Line Functions

3.4ON–LINE FUNCTIONS

3.4.1Overview of the

On–Line Functions

3.4.1.1Outline




38

The use of the on–line functions is automatically enabled when the systemis started. Alternatively, the use of the on–line functions can be selectedin off–line mode. For an explanation of on–line function selection inoff–line mode, see Section 3.5.

(1) Moving to the ladder monitoring screenTo move from an on–line function to the ladder monitoring screen,follow the procedure given below. On the ladder monitoring screen,select the desired function from the pull–down menu or press thecorresponding function key.

[Moving to the ladder monitoring screen]

1) Starting the system/on–line function selection

2) Work program compilation/decompilation (started only when required)

↓

3) Communication with the PMC

(automatic)↓

4) Monitoring method selection (started only when required)– Program load operation– Program store operation

↓

5) Ladder monitoringSubprogram screen display (automatic)

↓

Subprogram selection

↓

Ladder monitor screen display

Each screen is explained below. For details, see the related section.

(a) Work program compilationIf a source program that was edited off–line has not yet beencompiled, the following message appears.

Source program has updated. Compile it ? (Y/N)

If an on–line function is to be used for an edited program, enterY. For details, see Appendix B.

(b) Work program decompilationIf a source program that was acquired with the off–line I/Ofunction has not yet been decompiled, the following message isdisplayed.

Memory card format file has been updated. Decompile it ? (Y/N)

If an on–line function is to be used for a program acquired withthe I/O function, enter Y. For details, see Appendix B.

3.4.1.2Starting the On–LineFunctions

Reference section

See Section3.4.3.1.

See Appendix B.

See Section 3.4.5.

See Section 3.4.4.1.See Section 3.4.4.2.




39

(c) Communication with the PMC

Selecting “ON–LINE FUNCTION” causes the online monitorscreen (“SET COMMUNICATION” dialog box) to appear asshown below. Communication with the PMC startsautomatically.

F8Search

F7Splist

F9Symbol

F10Setting

Communication

1. File 2. Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication

Try to connect with PMC ... 0000 0000Cancel

Status

Start

Fig.3.4.1.2 (a)

(d) Selecting a monitoring method

When communication with the PMC starts normally, theprogram is compared with that held on the PMC. If the programsdo not match, the dialog box shown below appears.Select a desired function.

[LOAD] : A program is loaded from PMC memoryand the program is overwritten.

[STORE] : The program is stored to the PMC. The

program replaces the program already onthe PMC.

[CONTINUE] : The ladder monitor screen appears, but theprogram already on the PMC is notreplaced. Note that ladder monitordisplay is not performed correctly.

[END] : The on–line function terminates.




40

Load from PMC program memory.

N : E–3160 Selected program is not same.

Load

Store

Disregard

Qiut Quit On –Line function.

Disregard difference.

Store to PMC program memory.

Fig.3.4.1.2 (b)

NoteIf the program does not match the program on the PMC thedialog box shown above appears. This occurs, for example,when a single program is modified by means of off–lineediting.When the on–line monitor function is started for a programthat is loaded or stored, the dialog box does not appear.Instead, the subprogram selection screen appearsimmediately.

(e) Loading from the PMCAfter communication with the PMC starts normally, the “SETCOMMUNICATION” dialog box closes automatically and the“LOAD FROM PMC” dialog box is opened in its place.

Load Program

Transfer data type

LADDER ALL

0%

Exec Abort Cancel

100%

Fig.3.4.1.2 (c)




41

(f) Displaying the “SUBPROGRAM” dialog box (Ladder monitorfunction)

Once a program is loaded from the PMC, the “SUBPROGRAM”dialog box for the ladder monitor function appears. Specify thesubprogram to be monitored in the dialog box as describedbelow:

NoteThe on–line monitoring function of a step sequenceprogram is not supported.

[Operation]

1) Position the cursor to the desired subprogram by pressing the

or key.

2) Press the Enter key.

3) The ladder diagram for the selected subprogram appears.

Sub–program list

Ok Cancel

LEVEL 1

LEVEL2

P00001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWIIT–R1

P00002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWIIT–L1

S P00010 (GRIP WORK PIECE) PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND

P00011 (PUT WORK PIECE) PUT DOWN A WORK

P00021 (CLOSE RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH–R2

P00022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH L2

Fig.3.4.1.2 (d)

(2) Displaying the PMC status (icon)

The on–line function indicates the current PMC statuses, using iconsat the right end of the status line.

(a) Display positions and types of icons

Displayed position

of icon

1) 2) 3)


Fig.3.4.1.2 (e)




42

1) PMC alarm status

The following icon indicates whether the PMC is in the alarmstate.

Yellow : Alarm exists on PMC

Gray : Alarm not exists on PMC

Fig.3.4.1.2 (f)

2) Ladder execution status

The following icon indicates whether a ladder program isrunning.

Program on

PMC is running.

Program on

PMC is stopped.

Fig.3.4.1.2 (g)

3) PMC communication status

The following icon indicates whether a communication link with the PMC is established.

Communication

is active.

Communication

is not active.

Fig.3.4.1.2 (h)




43

While communicating with PMC, PMC parameters can be saved to a file.To use this function while running a ladder program, turn the CNC to

EDIT mode. If not running, you can use this function at any time.(1) Menu position

Pull down [1.File] menu, and select [Save PMC parameter] on themenu.

Save PMC parameter


Off-Line Function

MS DOS

Exit

1. File

Fig.3.4.2.1 (a)

(2) Dialog box view

— Save PMC parameter

File name

Input a

saving

file name.

C:\DATA\PMC_PRM

Exec Cancel

0% 100%

Abort

Execute saving Abort saving Close dialog box

Fig.3.4.2.1 (b)

(3) Operation

At first, specify the saving file name. ‘PMC_PRM’ is initially

displayed as a default file name.It is possible to change the saving directory and the file name.

(a) Select [Exec]PMC parameter is saved and the dialog box closes.

(b) Select [abort] (during a file saving)Saving is stopped.

(c) Select [Cancel]PMC parameter is not saved and the dialog box closes.

3.4.2File

3.4.2.1Saving PMC Parameter




44

(4) Message

Message Meaning and countermeasure

File already exists.Overwrite?

Same file name exists.Select [Yes] to overwrite.Select [No] to cancel saving.

While communicating with PMC, PMC parameters can be restored froma file.To use this function while running a ladder program, turn the CNC toEMERGENCYSTOP and set PWE(CNC parameter) to “1” on the CNC.If not running, you can use this function at any time.

(1) Menu position

Pull down [1.File] menu, and select [Restore PMC parameter] on themenu.

Save PMC parameter


Off-Line Function

MS DOS

Exit

1. File

Fig.3.4.2.2 (a)

(2) Dialog box view

— Restore PMC parameter

File name

Input a

restoring

file name.

C:\DATA\PMC_PRM

Exec Cancel

0% 100%

Abort

Execute restoring Abort restoring Close dialog box

Fig.3.4.2.2 (b)

(3) Operation

At first, specify a restoring file name.“PMC_PRM” is initiallydisplayed as a default file name.It is possible to change the restoring directory and the file name.

3.4.2.2Restoring PMCParameter




45

(a) Select [Exec]

PMC parameter is restored and the dialog box closes.

(b) Select [Abort] (during a file saving)

Restoring is stopped.

(c) Select [Cancel]

PMC parameter is not restored and the dialog box closes.

The Off-Line function can be selected from the On-Line function. Fordetails, see “3.5 Off-Line Function”.

(1) Menu positionTo use “Off-Line Function”, pull down [1. File] menu, and select[Off-Line Function] on the menu.

Save PMC parameter


Off-Line Function

MS DOS

Exit

1. File

Fig.3.4.2.3

An MS–DOS command can be executed without terminating on–linemode.

(1) Menu position

To use MS–DOS, select [1.File] from the pull–down menu, then

select MS–DOS. (The MS–DOS prompt appears.)The user can return to on–line mode by executing the EXIT commandfrom the MS–DOS prompt.

Save PMC parameter


Off-Line Function

MS DOS

Exit

1. File

Fig.3.4.2.4

3.4.2.3Selecting Off–LineFunction from On–LineFunction

3.4.2.4MS–DOS




46

This function is used to finish On-Line Function.

(1) Menu positionPull down [1. File] menu, and select [Exit] on the menu.

Save PMC parameter


Off-Line Function

MS DOS

Exit

1. File

Fig.3.4.2.5(a)

(2) Dialog box view

Are you sure you want to exit ?

CancelOk

Fig.3.4.2.5(b)

(3) Operation

(a) Push [OK] button.

1) Online function ends.2) When there are any modifications which have not been

preserved by F7 [UPDATE] on the online editor, this “File

save” operation is canceled. And the following dialog boxappears.

Ladder diagram has been modified

Sure to quit ?

NoYes

Fig.3.4.2.5(c)

[Yes]: The modifications by on-line editor is canceled and On-LineFunction ends.

[No] : Cancel to [Exit].

3.4.2.5Exit




47

[2. Diagnose] menu contains the menu items as shown below.

for “Ladder Monitor” /“Online Editor” window

for “Signal status” window

for sub-menu of “PMC Parameter” windows

for “PMC alarm message” dialog box

for “PMC Status” window

for “RUN/STOP the program” dialog box

for “Signal Trace” dialog box

for “Signal Analysis” dialog box

for “System Information” dialog box

Ladder Monitor

Signal Status

PMC Parameter

PMC alarm status

PMC Status


Signal Trace

Signal Analysis

System Information

2. Diagnose

To select the ladder monitor screen, select [2. Diagnose] to display a pull-downmenu, then select [Ladder Monitor].

For [Ladder Monitor], both the ladder monitor function and on-line edit

function can be used.

(a) Configuration of the ladder monitor screenThe ladder monitor screen is shown below.On the ladder monitor screen, signal statuses are indicated as shownbelow.

1) Displaying signal statuses

STATUS : OFF

(Thin line)

STATUS : ON

(Thick line)

3.4.3Diagnose

3.4.3.1Ladder Monitor

3.4.3.1.1Ladder monitor




48

F8Search

F7SpList

F9Symbol

F10Seting

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!


[LEVEL1] NET 00001–00006

SUB 64

END

SUB 2

END2

SUB 1END1

Ô

Ô

D000 R0000.1

D000 R0000.0

Ô Ô Ô Ô Ô Ô Ô Ô Ô






Ladder MonitorSignal StatusPMC ParameterPMC alarm statusPMC StatusRUN/STOP the programSignal TraceSignal AnalysisSystem Information

S+F8S–Set

+Shift

Fig.3.4.3.1.1(a)

(b) Ladder monitor functionThe table below lists the operations performed by the ladder monitorfunction.

Operation group Function Key to be used Reference

Cursor movement Moving the cursor up ordown

Moving the cursor to the

beginning of the ladderprogram

Home

Moving the cursor to theend of the ladder program

End

Moving the cursor to theprevious page

Moving the cursor to thenext page

SpList Listing subprograms andselecting a subprogram

F7 : [SpList] (c)

Search Searching for data F8 : [Search] (d)

Entering the search data +Shift F8 (d)

Symbol Displaying the symbol orcomment defined at aspecified address

F9 : [Symbol] (e)

Setting Switching between laddermonitor and on-lineediting, switchingbetween symbol displayand comment display

F10 : [Setting] (f)




49

(c) Selecting a subprogram (F7 [SpList])

A ladder program is monitoried and edited in units of subprograms.This function is uesd to list existing subprograms and to select thesubporgram to be displayed.

NoteThe on–line monitoring function of a step sequence program is not

supported.The subprogram of a step sequence program is not selected.

1) Subprogram list display screen

Pressing F7 [SpList] causes a window to be displayed, as shownbelow. Select the program to be displayed by pressing a cursor

key or the PageUp , Page

Down keys then the Enter key.

Sub–program list

Ok Cancel

LEVEL 1

LEVEL2




P00011 (PUT WORK PIECE) PUT DOWN A WORK


P00022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH L2

Fig.3.4.3.1.1(b)

2) Display information

The following information appears on the subprogram screen.

LEVEL 1

LEVEL2




Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô

Ô Ô

Ô Ô

Ô Ô

Ô Ô

Step Sequence

(S mark)

Ladder (No mark)

Sub–program No. Symbol Coil comment

Fig.3.4.3.1.1(c)




50

(d) Searching for data (F8 [SEARCH])/Entering the search data ( Shift +

F8 )

1) Searching for data (F8 [SEARCH])

A search for a net starts when the F8 key is pressed after the

search data has been entered.

If the F8 key is pressed without specifying any search data, a

search is made for the data set specified in 2) below, ”Enteringsearch data” (see (b)).A search can be made for several types of data, as describedbelow:

Address/symbol

Searching for an address: “address” + F8

Example) “X0000.0”+ F8

Searching for a symbol: “symbol” + F8

Example) “SYMBOL1”+ F8

Functional instruction number/nameSearching for a number: “S”+“functional–

instruction–number”+ F8

Example) “S1”+ F8

Searching for a name: “functional–instruction–

name” + F8

Example) “END1”+ F8

Net number: “net–number”+ F8

Example) “10”+ F8

2) Entering search data ( Shift + F8 )

Data for which a search is to be made by means of operation 1),described above, can be registered. To repeatedly search foridentical data, use this function. While this function is active, thefollowing dialog box appears.

To position the cursor to another item, press the Tab key. To

change the setting, press the or key.




51

Search

OK Cancel

ADDR/SYMBOL

WRT–COIL

FUNCTION

NET–NO

Search Data : Data Kind

X0000. 0

Fig.3.4.3.1.1(d)

SEARCH DATA Enter the search data:address, symbol, net number, functional instruction

name, functional instruction number (number only,without S)

DATA TYPE Select the type of the search data.

(e) Displaying a symbol (F9 [SYMBOL])

This function displays the symbol or comment defined at a specified

address. When F9 is pressed, the following dialog box appears.

Symbol & Comment Display

OK Cancel

Address [ ] Relay Comment [ ]

Symbol [ ] Coil Comment [ ]

Fig.3.4.3.1.1(e)

ADDRESS : Enter the address of the symbol orcomment to be displayed.

SYMBOL : The symbol at the specified addressis appears.

RELAY COMMENT : The relay comment at the specifiedaddress appears.

COIL COMMENT : The coil comment at the specifiedaddress appears.




52

(f) Setting a function (F10 [SET])

This function includes the following:

LADDER MODE:

Switching between ladder monitor and on–line editing.For details of the on–line function, see (2), “On–lineediting” in this section.

SYMBOL & COMMENT DISPLAY:

Selecting the address display mode in ladder monitoringor on–line editingThree types of data can be displayed: address, symbol,and relay comment.

FUNCTION PARAMETER:

Selecting whether the parameters of functionalinstructions are to be displayed

When the F10 key is pressed, the dialog box shown below appears:

To move the cursor to another item, press the Tab key. To change

the setting, press the or key.

Display setting

OK

Cancel

Symbol

Address

Relay Comment

Symbol & Address Relay Comment & Address

Relay Comment & Symbol

Ladder Mode

Ladder Monitor Online Editor

Signal Trigger Debug Ladder


Function Paramareter

Display

Fig.3.4.3.1.1(f)




53

To select the “Online Editor” screen, select [Ladder monitor] from the [2.Diagnose] pull–down menu, then press F10 : [Setting]. The “Displaysetting” dialog box appears. In the dialog box, select [Online Editor].

Display setting

OK

Cancel

Symbol

Address

Relay Comment

Symbol & Address

Relay Comment & Address


Ladder Mode Ladder Monitor Online Editor




Display

Fig.3.4.3.1.2(a)

(a) Configuration of the on–line edit screen

The configuration of the on–line edit screen is as shown below:

3.4.3.1.2On–line editing




54

F2 F8Search

F1 F3 F4 F5 F6Functn

F7Update

F9Symbol

F10Seting

Online Editor

[LEVEL1] NET 00001–00006

SUB 64

END

SUB 2

END2

SUB 1

END1

X0000.0 Y0000.0

X0000.1 X0000.2 Y0000.1

X0001.0 Y0000.2

X0001.1 Y0000.2

(S)

(R)

X0000.0 ←(*1)

+

S+F2 S+F8S–SET

S+F1 S+F3 S+F7Undo

(S)

(R)

+

C+F2LinInsC+F1NetIns C+F3ElmIns C+F4Select C+F5Cut C+F6Copy C+F7 paste

Shift

Ctrl


Fig.3.4.3.1.2(b)

1) Key input line display(*1)

The most recently entered contact or coil is displayed. If thedisplay of an address and a contact or coil is selected, pressing

the Enter key causes a single contact or coil to be set in the ladder

diagram.

(b) On–line editing

On–line editing operations (1)

Operationgroup

Function Key to be used Reference

Input modemodification

Insert modeEnabling/Cancelling Insert

(C) 1)

Insert modeEnabling/Cancelling Delete

(C) 2)

Contact/coilinput

inputF1

(d) 1)




55

Operationgroup

ReferenceKey to be usedFunction

Contact/coilinput

input+ F1Shift

(d) 2)

inputF2

(d) 3)

input + F2Shift (d) 4)

input(S) F3

(d) 5)

input(R)

+ F3Shift(d) 6)

Selecting a contact/coil ,

+

Tab

Shift Tab

(d) 7)

Changing an address

only“address” + Enter

(d) 8)

Entering a contact/coilEnter

(d) 9)

Functionalinstruction input

Entering a functionalinstruction

functional– instruction–number

+ F6

(d) 10)

Line connection “ ” inputF4

(e) 1)

“ ” inputF5

(e) 2)

Line deletion “ ” deletion Delete mode + F4 (e) 1)

“ ” deletionDelete mode + F5

(e) 2)

Net, line,elementinsertion

Inserting a net+Ctrl F1

(f) 1)

Inserting a line + F2Ctrl

(f) 2)

Inserting a element+ F3Ctrl

(f) 3)

Cut and pastefunction Specifying a range + F4Ctrl (g) 1)

Cutting a net+ F5Ctrl

(g) 2)

Copying a net+ F6Ctrl

(g) 3)

Pasting a net+ F7Ctrl

(g) 4)




56

On–line editing operations (2)

Operationgroup

Function Key to be used Reference

Cursormovement

Moving the cursor up ordown

,(h) 1)

Moving the cursor to theleft or right

,(h) 2)

Moving the cursor to thebeginning of the ladderprogram

Home

(h) 3)

Moving the cursor to theend of the ladderprogram

End

(h) 4)

Moving the cursor to theprevious page

PageUp

(h) 5)

Moving the cursor to thenext page

PageDown

(h) 6)

Search Searching for data F8 : [Search] See (1),

“Entering the search data+ F8Shift

“Laddermonitor.”

Symbol Displaying the symbol orcomment defined at aspecified address

F9 : [Symbol] See (1),“Laddermonitor.”

Setting Switching betweenladder monitor andon–line editing, switchingbetween symbol displayand comment display,etc.

F10 :[Setting] See (1),“Laddermonitor.”

Others Updating the ladder

program

F7 : [UPDATE] (i) 1)

Restoring the ladderprogram to the stateexisting prior to editing

+Shift F7(i) 2)

(c) Changing the input mode

To change the input mode on the edit screen, use the following keys.The current input mode is displayed at the bottom right corner of thescreen. When nothing is displayed, it indicates that overwrite modeis selected (default).

1) Insert mode

Key : Insert

Function : When a contact or coil is entered in this mode,thecontact or coil is inserted at the cursor position.

Cancel : Press the Insert key in insert mode.

2) Delete mode

Key : Delete

Function : When the line connect function is used in thismode,data at the cursor position is deleted.




57

Cancel : Press the Delete key in delete mode.

(d) Input Contact/Coil

To input a contact or coil, register the input element in the key input

line, then press the Enter key.

The registered element is added to the ladder diagram. The following

keys are used for this operation:[Keys used for registration]

1) Set

Key : F1

Function : Set at the input line.

An addressed is input to the key input line by entering

an address and pressing the F1 key.

2) Set

Key : Shift + F1



an address and pressing the Shift and F1 keys.

3) Set

Key : F2




4) Set

Key : Shift + F2



an address and pressing the Shift and F2 keys.

5) Set (S)

Key : F3

Function : Set (S) at the input line.

An addressed (S) is input to the key input line by entering


6) Set (R)

Key : Shift + F3

Function : Set (R) at the input line.

An addressed (R) is input to the key input line by entering

an address and is pressing the Shift and F3 keys.




58

7) Select Contact/Coil

Key : Tab , Shift + Tab

Function : Select Contact/Coil at the input line.

Tab changes Contact/Coil in the input line to the

forward direction.Shift

+Tab

changes reverse.The contacts and coils are displayed in the orderindicated below:

Á ÁÁ Á

]

][ ][ /

][ [

]][ [(S) (R)

8) Change address only

Key : ‘address’+ Enter

Function : Change address on ladder diagram without changing

input line.The contact or coil at the cursor position is modified.

[Input Key]

9) Input Contact/Coil

Key : Enter

Function : Write Contact/Coil which is set at input line to ladderdiagram.

(e) Connect/delete line

1) Input ‘___’

Key : F4

Function : Input horizontal line. If in the delete mode, deleteContact/Coil or horizontal line.

2) Entering “|”

Key : F5

Function : A vertical line is entered to the right of the cursorposition. In delete mode, a vertical line is deleted.




59

(f) Inserting a net, line, or element

1) Inserting a net

Key : Ctrl + F1 [Netlns]

Function : Inserts a single blank net after the net at the cursorposition.

2) Inserting a line

Key : Ctrl + F2 [Lilns]

Function : Inserts a single blank line under the line to which thecursor is positioned.

3) Inserting an element

Key : Ctrl + F3 [Elmlns]

Function : Inserts a single blank element at the cursor position.

(g) Cut and paste function

1) Specifying a range

Key : Ctrl + F4 [Select]

Function : Specifies the range to be cut or copied. The range isspecified by means of the following procedure:

i) Position the cursor to the first net in the desiredrange.

ii) Press the Ctrl and F4 keys. (SEL is displayed

at the bottom right corner of the screen.)

iii)Position the cursor to the last net in the desiredrange.

Cutting and copying of a specified net range isexplained in 2) or 3) below.

Cancel : Press the Ctrl and F4 keys in range mode.

2) Cutting a net

Key : Ctrl + F5 [Cut]

Function : Cuts a net. When a net range is specified, thespecified net range is cut. The cut portion is saved inthe buffer for subsequent pasting.

3) Copying a net

Key : Ctrl + F6 [Copy]

Function : Copies a net into the buffer for subsequent pasting.When a net range is specified, the specified range iscopied.

4) Pasting a net

Key : Ctrl + F7 [Paste]

Function : Writes a net that was previously cut or copied andsaved into the buffer.




60

(h) Cursor

1) Move cursor Up/Down

Key : ,

Function : Up/Down cursor, When press at the top of the

screen or press at the bottom of the screen, thescreen scrolls.

2) Move cursor to Left/Right

Key : ,

Function : Move cursor to the left/light. When pressing at

the left end of the screen, the cursor moves to one line

above and right end. When pressing at the right

end of the screen, the cursor moves one line below andleft end.

At the top.bottom of the screen, the screen scrolls.

3) Move to the top of ladder

Key : Home

Function : Move cursor to the top of ladder.

4) Move cursor to the bottom of ladder

Key : End

Function : Move cursor to the bottom of ladder.

5) Previous page

Key : PageUp

Function : Go to the previous page.

6) Next page

Key : PageDown

Function : Go to the next page.

(i) Others

1) Update

Key : F7

Function : Update the modification to the ladder diagram onPMC.

NoteWhen the [UPDATE] function is used, the ladder programon the PMC is modified.Before executing this function, check whether modificationof the ladder program is permitted.




61

2) Undo

Key : Shift + F7

Function : Restore ladder diagram just before the last update

F7 .

NoteApplying the [Undo] function causes the effects of editingsince the last update to be lost.

(1) Outline of Signal Trigger Function

The ladder monitor display is stopped when the specified signalchanges. And the signal state of the ladder can be confirmed.

(2) Operations

(a) Selection of Signal Trigger Screen

Please select “Signal Trigger” of Ladder Mode by “Displayingsetting” dialog (F10 key) of the Ladder Monitor screen.

Display setting

OK

Cancel

Symbol

Address Relay Comment

Symbol & Address



Ladder Mode





Display

3.4.3.1.3Signal trigger function




62

F8Search

F7Splist

F9Symbol

F10seting

[LEVEL1] NET 00001–00006

X0000.0 X0000.1 X0000.2 X0000.3 X0000.4 X0000.5 X0000.6 Y0000.1

G0500.3 R0900.0

X0010.7 Y0065.7

X0012.5 Y0014.2

Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô

SUB 1

END1

SUB 2

END2

COMM

ENT–

TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000.0 : 0 : 65535/65535 * 1996/05/07 15:00:00

F2Trgsrc

F3Trgprm

Ô Ô

Stop

F1Exec

[Display of setting trigger]

” TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000.0: 0 :0000/12345 * 1995/12/20 13:20:59 ”

Stop time

COUNT:Trigger checking count

(default 1)

POINT:Trigger checking point (default 0)

0 – the top of the 1st level (Default)

1 – after END1 execution



ADR: Trigger setting address

ON:Rising edge detectionOFF:Falling edge detection

Signal Trigger


Fig.3.4.3.1.3 (a) Screen of Signal Trigger Function

(b) Setting of signal trigger parameter

“Trigger Parameter” dialog is displayed by pressing theF3“Trgprm”.




63

Trigger Parameter

OK

Level1

END1

END2

END3

Check–Point

Address X1000.0

Count 65535

ON

OFF

Trigger–Mode

InitCancel

[Trigger Parameter DIALOG]

Please set the following items by “Trigger Parameter” dialog.

1) Address: Trigger address (Symbol is possible.)

2) Check Point: Trigger check point

LEVEL1(Default) the top of the 1st level (Default)END1 after END1 execution

END2 after END2 executionEND3 after END3 execution

3) Count: Trigger count(1 to 65535)

4) Trigger Mode: Trigger condition

ON Rising edge detectionOFF Falling edge detection

When [Init] is selected, parameter and the display data areinitialized.

Please select [OK] when setting is completed.

Please select [Cancel] or press the Esc key when you cancelsetting.

(c) Starting or stopping signal trigger function

Please press F1“Exec” or “Stop” in Fig.3.4.3.1.3 (a).Screen of Signal Trigger Function.

(d) Search of the instruction when the trigger condition was satisfied

Please press F2“T.Srch”.The instruction when the trigger condition was satisfied isdisplayed in blue.




64

(1) Outline of function

Using this function, Step Operations and Stop Operations listedbelow are possible. Step Operations are to execute ladder byspecified step (single instruction, single net, and specified block).Stop Operations are to stop the execution of ladder when specifiedcondition becomes true.

(1) Step Operation to execute one instruction from current position.(2) Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current

position.

(3) Step Operation to execute from current position to specifiedcontact or coil instruction.

(4) Stop Operation to execute from the first step and stop theexecution at specified contact or coil instruction.

(5) Stop Operation to stop the execution of ladder by a trigger of signal condition. (Optionally, a trigger counter can be specified.)

(6) Stop Operation to stop the execution of ladder after executing onescan. (Optionally, a scan counter can be specified.)

WarningWhen executing or stopping a ladder program, special careis necessary. If this function is applied incorrectly, themachine may act unpredictably.Avoid using this function if personnel are present near themachine.

(2) Operations

(a) Selection of Ladder Debugging Screen

Please select “Ladder Debug” of Ladder Mode by Displayingsetting dialog (F10) of the Ladder Monitor screen.

Display setting

OK

Cancel

Symbol

Address

Relay Comment Symbol & Address



Ladder Mode





Display

3.4.3.1.4Ladder debuggingfunction




65

F8

Search

F7

Splist

F9

Symbol

F10

Seting

[LEVEL1] NET 00001–00006

X0000.0 X0000.1 X0000.2 X0000.3 X0000.4 X0000.5 X0000.6 Y0000.1

G0500.3 R0900.0

X0010.7 Y0065.7

X0012.5 Y0014.2

Ô Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô Ô

SUB 1

END1

SUB 2

END2

COMM

ENT–

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

F2

B.Srch

F3

Dbgprm

F1

Step

[Displaying of Step]

” ACC=1 STK=0000 0011 OF=0 SF=0 ZF=1 ”

ACC : result of operation

STK : contents of stack ( 1 byte )

OF : overflow ( 0=NO, 1=YES )

SF : sign ( 0=NO, 1=YES )

ZF : zero ( 0=NO, 1=YES )

F4

Sync.B

F1

Step

F2

B.Srch

F3

Dbgprm

F4

Sync.B

F7

Splist

F8

Search

F9

Symbol

F10

Seting

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

F1

Exec

F2

B.Srch

F3

Dbgprm

F4

Sync.B

F7

Splist

F8

Search

F9

Symbol

F10

Seting

(Stop)

F5

B.Strt

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

1) Step Operation to execute one instruction from current position.

2) Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current posi-tion.

3) Step operation to execute from current position to specified contactor coil instruction.

Ladder Debug


Fig.3.4.3.1.4 (a) Screen of Step Operation




66

F8SearchF7Splist F9Symbol F10Seting

[LEVEL1] NET 00001–00006

X0000.0 X0000.1 X0000.2 X0000.3 X0000.4 X0000.5 X0000.6 Y0000.1

G0500.3 R0900.0

X0010.7 Y0065.7

X0012.5 Y0014.2

Ô Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô Ô

SUB 1

END1

SUB 2

END2

COMM ENT–

TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000.0 : 0 : 00000/65535 * 1995/12/20 13:20:59

F3Dbgprm

Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô

(Stop)

F1Exec

[Display of setting trigger]

” TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000.0: 0 :0000/12345 * 1995/12/20 13:20:59 ”

Stop time

COUNT:Trigger checking count

(default 1)

POINT:Trigger checking point (default 1)

0 – the top of the 1st level (Default 0)


2 – after END2 execution3 – after END3 execution

ADR: Trigger setting address

ON:Rising edge detection

OFF:Falling edge detection

1) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder when a trigger condi-tion specified by signal becomes true.

F1

Exec

F3

Dbgprm

F7

Splist

F8

Search

F9

Symbol

F10

Seting

(Stop)

SCAN COUNTER : 00000/65535 1995/12/20 13:20:59

Stop time

[Display of setting scan]

” SCAN COUNT : 00000/00003 1995/12/20 13:20:59 ”

COUNT:Scan checking count

2) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder after executing a scan.

Ladder Debug


Fig.3.4.3.1.4 (b) Screen of Stop Function of Break with Condition




67

(b) Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter

Ladder Debug Parameter DIALOG is displayed by pressingF3“Dbgprm”.

Ladder Debug Parameter

OK Cancel

Ladder Debug Mode

Step Break Control

Step

Sub–program

Mode

Element

Net

Block

Break Control

Mode

Trigger Scan

Address X1000.0

Check–Point

Level1 END2 END1 END3

Count 65535

Trigger–Mode

ON OFF

Init

[Ladder Debug Parameter DIALOG]

Please set the following items by “Ladder Debug Parameter”dialog.

Step operations 1), 2), 3). . . .Stop function of break with condition 1), 4), 5), 6), 7), 8). .

1) Ladder Debug Mode

Ladder Debug Mode

Step Break Control

Step : Step operations (Default)Break Control : Stop function of break with condition




68

2) Step/Mode

Step

Mode

Element

Net

Block

Element : Step Operation to execute one instructionfrom current position. (Default)

Net : Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit)from current position.

Block : Step operation to execute from currentposition to specified contact or coilinstruction.

3) Step/Sub–Program

Step

Sub–Program

Ô

Ô

Ô Ô

Ô Ô

(No–Check) : The step operations in Sub–Program

is not displayed.

X (Check) : The step operations in Sub–Program

is displayed.

* When “b) Step/Mode” is “Element” or “Net”, it is possibleto set this item.

4) Break Control/Mode

Break Control

Mode

Trigger Scan

Ô Ô Ô Ô

Trigger : Stop operation to stop the execution of ladderwhen a trigger condition specified by signalbecomes true. (Optionally, a trigger counter canbe specified to stop after the trigger becomes truespecified times.)

Scan : Stop operation to stop the execution of ladderafter executing a scan. (Optionally, a scancounter can be specified to stop after executingspecified times of scans.)




69

5) Break Control/Address

Break Control

Address X1000.0

Ô Ô

Ô Ô

Ô Ô

Ô Ô

Address : Trigger setting address

* When “d) Break Control/Mode” is “Trigger”, it is possibleto set this item.

6) Break Control/Check point

Break Control

Check–Point

Level1

END2 END1 END3

Ô Ô Ô Ô

LEVEL1 : the top of the 1st levelEND1 : after END1 executionEND2 : after END2 executionEND3 : after END3 execution

* When “d) Break Control/Mode” is “Trigger”, it is possibleto set this item.

7) Break Control/Count

Break Control

Count 65535

Ô Ô Ô Ô

Default=1

Count : Trigger Count or Scan Count(1 to 65535)

8) Break Control/Trigger Mode

Break Control

Trigger–Mode

ON OFF

Ô Ô Ô Ô

ON : Rising edge detectionOFF : Falling edge detection

* When “Break Control/Mode” is “Trigger”, it is possibleto set this item.




70

When [Init] is selected, Parameter of Ladder DebuggingFunction is initialized.



(c) Execution of step operation

1) Step Operation to execute one instruction from current

position.Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter Dialog

Ladder Debug Mode : Step

Step–Mode : Element

Sub–Program : No Check or Check

* Setting other than the above–mentioned item are invalid.

When F1“Step” is pressed, the execution of step operation isstarted.

F1

Step

F2

B.Srch

F3

Dbgprm

F4

Sync.B

F7

Splist

F8

Search

F9

Symbol

F10

Seting

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

Step Operation to execute one instruction

2) Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from currentposition.

Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter Dialog

Ladder Debug Mode : StepStep–Mode : Net

Sub–Program : No Check or Check


When F1“Step” is pressed, the execution of step operation isstarted.

F1

Step

F2

B.Srch

F3

Dbgprm

F4

Sync.B

F7

Splist

F8

Search

F9

Symbol

F10

Seting

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current position.

3) Step operation to execute from current position to specifiedcontact or coil instruction.(Block operation)




71


Ladder Debug Mode : Step

Step–Mode : Block


If F5“B.Strt” is pressed after the cursor is moved, the cursorposition becomes a position where the block operationbegins.

The block operation begins from the instruction which isstopping now when the block operation begins withoutspecifying the beginning position. (If the step operation orthe block operation is never done after the Ladder DebugScreen is displayed, the top of LEVEL1 becomes a beginningposition.)

F1

Exec

F2

B.Srch

F3

Dbgprm

F4

Sync.B

F7

Splist

F8

Search

F9

Symbol

F10

Seting

(Stop)

F5

B.Strt

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

Cursor position becomes a beginning position of block operation.

When F1“Exec” is pressed, the execution of block operationis started from the beginning position to the cursor position.While executing block operation, block operation is stoppedby pressing F1“Stop”

F1

Exec(Stop)

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

Executing (/Stopping) block operation

F2

B.Srch

F3

Dbgprm

F4

Sync.B

F7

Splist

F8

Search

F9

Symbol

F10

Seting

F5

B.Strt

4) Search of the instruction at which the execution is currentlystopped

Please press F2“B.Srch”.The instruction at which the execution is currently stoppedis displayed in BLUE.

F1

Exec

F2

B.Srch

F3

Dbgprm

F4

Sync.B

F7

Splist

F8

Search

F9

Symbol

F10

Seting

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

Search of the instruction at which the execution is stopped

F5

B.Strt(Stop)

5) Transfer the current status of input signals to the synchronousbuffer




72

F4“Sync.B” is used to transfer the current status of inputsignals to the synchronous buffer so that succeedinginstructions could operate on refreshed inputs when theexecution is continued from current position.

NotesNormally, transferring to the synchronous buffer isautomatically performed at the beginning of the 2nd levelladder.

F1

Step

F2

B.Srch

F3

Dbgprm

F4

Sync.B

F7

Splist

F8

Search

F9

Symbol

F10

Seting

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

Press F4“Sync.B”

F1

Step

F2

B.Srch

F3

Dbgprm

F4

Sync.B

F7

Splist

F8

Search

F9

Symbol

F10

Seting

SYNCHRONOUS BUFFER TRANSFER COMPLETED

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

(d) Execution of stop function of break with condition

1) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder when a triggercondition specified by signal becomes true.


Ladder Debug Mode : Break Control

Break–Mode : Trigger

Address : Trigger address

Check–Point : Level1 or END1 to 3

Count : 1 to 65535

Trigger–Mode : ON or OFF


When F1“Exec” is pressed, the execution of stop operation(trigger) is started.While executing stop operation (trigger), stop operation(trigger) is stopped by pressing F1“Stop”

F1

Exec

F3

Dbgprm

F7

Splist

F8

Search

F9

Symbol

F10

Seting

(Stop)

TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000.0 : 0 : 00000/65535 * 1995/12/20 13:20:59

Starting (/Stopping) the execution of stop operation (trigger)

2) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder after executinga scan.




73


Ladder Debug Mode : Break Control

Break–Mode : Scan

Count : 1 to 65535


When F1“Exec” is pressed, the execution of stop operation(scan) is started.While executing stop operation (scan), stop operation (scan)is stopped by pressing F1”Stop”

F1

Exec

F3

Dbgprm

F7

Splist

F8

Search

F9

Symbol

F10

Seting

(Stop)

SCAN COUNTER : 00000/65535 1995/12/20 13:20:59

Starting(/Stopping) the execution of stop operation (scan)

“Signal Status” window displays the status of signals on PMC in realtime. You can examine the signal status of any PMC address, and you canalso change the signal status on this window.

(1) Menu positionTo activate “Signal Status” window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu,and select [signal Status] on the menu.

Ladder Monitor

Signal Status

PMC Parameter

PMC alarm status

PMC Status


Signal Trace

Signal Analysis

System Information

2. Diagnose

(2) Window viewWhen [SIGNAL STATUS] is selected, the window shown belowappears.

3.4.3.2Signal Status Window




74

(a) Window view without symbols :

R00000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 : 01

R00001 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 80

R00002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

R00003 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 : 1C

R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

R00005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

R00006 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 : AA

R00007 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 : 55

R00008 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

R00009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

Signal Status

Fig.3.4.3.2 (a)

(b) Window view with symbols :

WORK1

R00000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 : 01

R00001 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 80

R00002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00TOOL1

R00003 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 : 1C

R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

–ON– –OFF–

Cursor Bit Symbols

Signal Status

Ô

Ô

Hexadecimal expression

Ô

Ô

Ô

PMC Address

Byte symbol

Fig.3.4.3.2 (b)

F4

Symbol

F8

SearchF10

Wrt On

or or

F4

Adress

F10

WrtOff

Fig.3.4.3.2 (c)




75

(3) Operations

Operations on the signal status window is described.

Basic operation Function

Cursor keys Move cursor.

/ PageUp

PageDown

Move address area on window.

/ +Shift TabTabSkip to next/previous kind of address.

Enter Alternate signal status. key turns the signal

status ON which was OFF, and turns OFF which

was ON. key is effective only when the

write-protection is unlocked.

Enter

Enter

[Symbol]/[Adress] F4Display/Hide symbols.

‘address’+[Search] F8

Search address (‘address’ can be symbol).

[Wrt On]/[WrtOff] F10Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When theprotection is effective the cursor is yellow, andbecomes red when unlock.

WarningSignal status changes and PMC parameter changes shouldalways be made with extreme care. Signal status changesand PMC parameter changes can have serious andunforeseen results on a control system, and on the processto which it applies, if they are improperly used. It isrecommended that these functions not be used with people

near the equipment.

NoteAttempts to change some signal statuses may fail. At anaddress to which sequence programs, the CNC, MMC, I/OLink and other external I/O devices write repeatedly, thesignal status cannot be changed. (The CNC repeatedlywrites to F addresses, the MMC to M addresses, andexternal I/O devices to X addresses.

(4) Message


Sure to modify ? You t ried to change signal status a lthoughwrite-protected. If the attempt is intended, answer[Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to cancel change.




76

“PMC Parameter” sub-menu consists of the menu items for the windowsbelow.

1) Timer window

2) Counter window

3) Keep relay window

4) Data table control window

5) Data table window

To display the “Parameter” submenu, display the [2. Diagnose]pull-down menu, then select [PMC Parameter] from the menu.

The submenu can be displayed by pressing the or key with the

cursor positioned to [PMC Parameter].

Ladder Monitor

Signal Status

PMC Parameter

PMC alarm status

PMC Status


Signal Trace

Signal Analysis

System Information

Timer

Counter

Keep relay

Data table control

Data table

2. Diagnose

WarningWhen changing a signal status or PMC parameter, extreme

care is necessary. If the function for modifying the signalstatus or PMC parameter is applied incorrectly, the machinemay act unpredictably. Avoid using the function if personnelare present near the machine.

NoteIf you can not write PMC parameter, it might be protected.For the detail, please refer PMC programing manual.

(1) Timer window“Timer” window displays the contents of PMC Timer address. Youcan examine the contents of PMC “Timer” address, and you can alsochange the values for TMR instruction.

(a) Menu positionTo active “Timer” window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu, andselect [PMC Parameter] on the menu. Then sub-menu appearswhich contains item [Timer] which activates “Timer” window.

3.4.3.3PMC Parameter




77

Ladder Monitor

Signal Status

PMC Parameter

PMC alarm status

PMC StatusRUN/STOP the program

Signal Trace

Signal Analysis

System Information

Timer

CounterKeep relay

Data table control

Data table

2. Diagnose

(b) Window view

1) Window view without symbols:

11. T00020 0

12. T00022 0

13. T00024 0

14. T00026 0

15. T00028 0

16. T00030 0

17. T00032 0

18. T00034 0

19. T00036 0

20. T00038 0

Timer

1. T00000 600000

2. T00002 0

3. T00004 0

4. T00006 0

5. T00008 0

6. T00010 0

7. T00012 0

8. T00014 0

9. T00016 1000

10. T00018 0

Fig.3.4.3.3 (a)

2) Window view with symbols:

TEN_MINUTES

1. T00000 600000

2. T00002 0

3. T00004 0

4. T00006 0

5. T00008 0

6. T00010 0

7. T00012 0

8. T00014 0ONE_SECOND

9. T00016 1000

10. T00018 0

Timer

Cursor

Byte symbol

PMC Address

Fig.3.4.3.3 (b)




78

3) Function keys:

F4

Symbol

F8

Search

F10

Wrt On

or or

F4

Adress

F10

WrtOff

Fig.3.4.3.3 (c)

(c) Operations

The following table lists the operations supported by the[TIMER] window.



/ PageUp

PageDown


‘number’ + EnterChange timer value. Enter new timer value inmilli–seconds.You can enter new value only when thewrite–protection is unlocked.The valid timer values are :

0–3,145,680 ms for timer No. 1–80–523,280 ms for timer No. 9–150

[Symbol]/[Address] F4Display/Hide symbols.

‘address’ + [Search] F8Search address (‘address’ can be symbol).You cannot search any other address than PMCparameter address, T, C, K, and D, at the “Timer”window. When C, K or D address is specified tosearch, “Timer” window is closed and the specialwindow for the address is opened with the addressat top of window.

‘number’ + [Search] F8Search timer address by timer number.

[Wrt On]/[Wrt Off] F10Unlock write–protection/Re–protect. When theprotection is effective the cursor is yellow, andbecomes red when unlocked.

(d) Message


Sure to modify? You t ried to change t imer value a lthoughwrite–protected.If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes].Otherwise, answer [No] to cancel change.

(2) Counter window

“Counter” window displays the contents of PMC Counter address.You can examine the contents of PMC Counter address, and you canalso change the values for CTR instruction.




79

(a) Menu position

To activate “Counter” window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu,and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. Then sub–menuappears which contains item [Counter] which activates“Counter” window.

Ladder Monitor

Signal Status

PMC Parameter

PMC alarm status

PMC Status


Signal Trace

Signal Analysis

System Information

Timer

Counter

Keep relay

Data table control

Data table

2. Diagnose

(b) Window view

When [COUNTER] is selected, the following window uppears.

1) Window view without symbols :

No. Address Preset/Current

11. C00040 0 / 0

12. C00044 0 / 0

13. C00048 0 / 0

14. C00052 0 / 0

15. C00056 0 / 0

16. C00060 0 / 0

17. C00064 0 / 018. C00068 0 / 0

19. C00070 0 / 0

20. C00076 0 / 0

Counter


1. C00000 1000 / 347

2. C00004 256 / 129

3. C00008 0 / 0

4. C00012 0 / 0

5. C00016 0 / 0

6. C00020 0 / 0

7. C00024 0 / 08. C00028 36 / 0

9. C00032 0 / 0

10. C00036 0 / 0

Fig.3.4.3.3 (d)




80

2) Window view with symbols:

No. Address Preset/Current WORK COUNTER

1. C00000 1000 / 347

2. C00004 256 / 129

3. C00008 0 / 0

4. C00012 0 / 0

5. C00016 0 / 0


6. C00020 0 / 0

7. C00024 0 / 0

8. C00028 36 / 0

9. C00032 0 / 0

10. C00036 0 / 0

Counter

Cursor

Symbol

Counter number and Address

Current counter value

Preset counter value

Fig.3.4.3.3 (e)

3) Function keys :

F4

Symbol

F8

Search

F10

Wrt On

or or

F4

Adress

F10

WrtOff

Fig.3.4.3.3 (f)

(c) Operations

The table below lists the operations supported by the [COUNTER]window.



/ PageUp

PageDown


‘number’ + EnterChange timer value. You can enter new value onlywhen the write–protection is unlocked.The valid counter values are :

0–65,535 for binary counter0–9,999 for BCD counter

[Symbol]/[Address] F4Display/Hide symbols.




81


‘address’ + [Search] F8Search address (‘address’ can be symbol).You cannot search any other address than PMCparameter address, T, C, K, and D, at the “Counter”window. When T, K or D address is specified tosearch, “Counter” window is closed and thespecial window for the address is opened with theaddress at top of window.

‘number’ + [Search] F8Search counter address by timer number.


(d) Message


Sure to modify ? You t ried to change counter value althoughwrite-protected. If the attempt is intended, answer[Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to cancel change.

(3) Keep relay window

“Keep relay” window displays the status of PMC Keep relay address.You can examine the signal status of PMC Keep relay address, andyou can also change the status of Keep relays.

(a) Menu position

To activate “Keep relay” window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu,and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. Then sub–menuappears which contains item [Keep relay] which activates “Keeprelay” window.

Ladder Monitor

Signal Status

PMC Parameter

PMC alarm status

PMC Status


Signal Trace

Signal Analysis

System Information

Timer

Counter

Keep relay

Data table control

Data table

2. Diagnose




82

(b) Window view

When “Keep relay” is selected following window is displayed.

K00000 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

K00001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00007 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00008 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Keep relay

K00010 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00011 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00012 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00013 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00014 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00015 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00016 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00017 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00018 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

K00019 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Cursor

Address

Fig.3.4.3.3 (g)

1) Function Keys :

F8

Search

F10

Wrt On

or

F10

WrtOff

Fig.3.4.3.3 (h)

(c) Operations



/ PageUp

PageDown


Enter Alternate signal status. key turns the signal

status ON which was OFF, and turns OFF which

was ON. key is effective only when the write–

protection is unlocked.

Enter

Enter




83


‘address’ + [Search] F8Search address (‘address’ can be symbol).You cannot search any other address than PMCparameter address, T, C, K, and D, at the “Keeprelay” window. When T, C or D address is specifiedto search, “Keep relay” window is closed and thespecial window for the address is opened with theaddress at top of window.


(d) Message


Sure to modify ? You t ried to change signal status a lthoughwrite-protected. If the attempt is intended, answer[Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to cancel change.

(e) Data for PMC control software

Keep relay data can not use in sequence program because somekeep relay data are used by PMC control software.

In this manual, the addresses related to the operation of theOn-line function are described.For the detail, please refer PMC programming manual.(The addresses marked ‘*’ do not effect the operation of theOn-line function but used by PMC control software.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

K17 DTBLDSP * * MEMINP * * PRGRAM LADMASKor

K900

#7 DTBLDSP 1 : Can not display data table control datain PMC parameter.

#4 MEMINP 0 : Can not change signal status.

#1 PRGRAM 0 : Can not activate On-line Editing andthe functions in I/O menu.

#0 LADMASK 1 : Can not display Ladder monitor.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

K19 * * * * * * * FROM-WRT

or

K902

#0 FROM-WRT 1 : Displaying dialog box of programback-up when exiting On-line editing.

(4) Data table control window“Data table control” window displays the informations of Data

groups for PMC Data table address. You can examine the Data groupattributes, and you can also change the attributes on this window.

(a) Menu positionTo activate “Data table control” window, pull down [2. Diagnose]menu, and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. Then sub-menuappears which contains item [Data table control] which activates“Data table control” window.




84

Ladder Monitor

Signal Status

PMC Parameter

PMC alarm status

PMC StatusRUN/STOP the program

Signal Trace

Signal Analysis

System Information

Timer

CounterKeep relay

Data table control

Data table

2. Diagnose

(b) Window view

1) Window view with symbols :

No. Start address Number Type Format Protection

1. DATA–TAABLE–TOP 8000 byte Hex on

2. D00050 10 word Dec off

3. TOOL–TABLE 20 word Dec off

4. D00200 100 byte Dec off

5. BCD–CONV–TABLE 10 word BCD off

Data table control

Cursor

Start address/

symbol of the group

Data sizeWrite-protection

Data group number Number of element Data format

Fig.3.4.3.3 (i)

2) Function keys:

F4

Symbol

F8

Search

F10

Wrt On

or or

F4

Adress

F10

WrtOff

F1

New

F2

Delete

F3

G. Data

Fig.3.4.3.3 (j)




85

(c) OperationsThe table below lists the operations supported by the Data tablecontrol window. Table of the data table control display (1).



/ PageUp

PageDown


‘D-address’+ EnterChange “Start address” with the cursor on theitem. You can enter new address only when thewrite-protection is unlocked. You can omit theleading character ‘D’ of the address.

‘number’+ EnterChange “Number” with the cursor on the item. Youcan enter new number only when thewrite-protection is unlocked.

EnterChange “Type”, “Format” and “Protection” with thecursor on the item. When the cursor is on “Type” or“Format”, small dialog box is displayed to choosethe item. You can change them only when thewrite-protection is unlocked.

Table of the data table control display (2).


[New] F1Make new data group. [New] duplicates the datagroup on the cursor. A hundred data groups canbe created at most.

[Delete] F2Delete data group on the cursor. You cannotdelete all the data groups because one data groupmust exist at least.

[G.Data] F3Switch to “Data table” window. The data groupwhich the cursor was on is displayed.

[Symbol]/[Adress]F4

Display/Hide symbols.

‘address’+[Search] F8Search address (’address’ can be symbol).You cannot search any other address than PMCparameter address, T, C, K and D, at the “Datatable control” window. When T, C, K or D addressis specified to search, “Data table control” windowis closed and the special window for the address isopened with the address at top of window.

‘number’+[Search] F8Search data group by data group number.

[Wrt On]/[WrtOff] F10Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When theprotection is effective the cursor is yellow, and

becomes red when unlocked.

(d) Messages


Sure to modify ? You t ried to change signal status a lthoughwrite-protected.If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes].Otherwise, answer [No] to cancel change.




86

(5) Data table window“Data table” window displays the contents of PMC Data table addressaccording to Data groups defined by Data table control data. You canexamine the contents of Data table, and you can also change thevalues of Data table on this window.

(a) Menu positionTo activate “Data table” window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu,and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. Then sub-menu

appears which contains item [Data table] which activates “Datatable” window.

Ladder Monitor

Signal Status

PMC Parameter

PMC alarm status

PMC Status


Signal Trace

Signal AnalysisSystem Information

Timer

Counter

Keep relay

Data table control

Data table

2. Diagnose

(b) Window viewWhen [Data table] is selected, the following window appears.

1) Window view without symbols :

Data table

D00000 F6

D00001 FF

D00002 EC

D00003 FF

D00004 D8

D00005 FF

D00006 B0

D00007 FF

D00008 60

D00009 FF

D00010 C0

D00011 FE

D00012 80

D00013 FD

D00014 00

D00015 FB

D00016 00

D00017 F6

D00018 00

D00019 EC

D00020 00

D00021 D8

D00022 00

D00023 B0

D00024 00

D00025 00

D00026 00

D00027 00

D00028 00

D00029 00

Group 1 : D00000 - D07999, 8000 bytes, hexadecimal, protected

Fig.3.4.3.3 (k)

Data group information:

Group 1 : D0000–D07999, 8000 bytes, hexadecimal, protected

Data group number

Area of Data group Data format

Write-protectionNumber of element

and data size




87

2) Window view with symbols :

Data table

DAT–TABLE–TOP

D00000 F6

D00001 FF

D00002 EC

D00003 FF

D00004 D8

D00005 FF

D00006 B0

D00007 FF

D00008 60

D00009 FF

D00010 C0

D00011 FE

D00012 80

D00013 FD

D00014 00

Group 1:D00000 - D07999, 8000 bytes, hexadecimal, protected

Cursor

Address

Symbol

Data group information

Fig.3.4.3.3 (l)

3) Function keys:

F4

Symbol

F8

Search

F10

Wrt On

or or

F4

Adress

F10

WrtOff

F3

C. Data

Fig.3.4.3.3 (m)

(c) OperationsThe following table lists the operations supported by the [DATATABLE] window.Operations supported by [DATA TABLE] window



/ PageUp

PageDown


/ +Tab Shift TabSkip to next/previous data group.

‘number’+ EnterChange data value. You can enter new value onlywhen the write-protection is unlocked. The validdata values are :For details of the values that can be input, see thetable of input data values below.




88


EnterChanges the keep relay signal status. Pressing

the key toggles the signal status between off

and on. The key is enabled only in the write

enabled state.

Enter

Enter

[C.Data] F3Switch to ”Data table control” window.The displayed data group is displayed at top of thewindow.

[Symbol]/[Adress] F4Display/Hide symbols.

‘address’+[Search] F8Search address (‘address’ can be symbol).You cannot search any other address than PMCparameter address, T, C, K and D, at the “Datatable” window. When T, C or K address is specifiedto search, “Data table” window is closed and thespecial window for the address is opened with theaddress at top of window.

‘number’+[Search] F8 Search data group by data group number.

[Wrt On]/[WrtOff] F10Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When theprotection is effective the cursor is yellow, andbecomes red when unlocked.

Data table

byte word double-word (dword)

Decimal -128 to 127 -32,768 to 32,767 -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

BCD 0 to 99 0 to 9,999 0 to 99,999,999

Hexadecimal 00 to FF 0000 to FFFF 00000000 to FFFFFFFF

(d) MessagesMessage Meaning and countermeasure

Sure to modify ? You tried to change data table value althoughwrite-protected.If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes].Otherwise, answer [No] to cancel change.




89

The “PMC ALARM MESSAGE” dialog box displays a PMC alarmmessage.

(1) Menu positionTo activate “PMC alarm message” dialog box, pull down [2.Diagnose] menu, and select [PMC alarm status] on the menu.

Ladder Monitor

Signal Status

PMC Parameter

PMC alarm status

PMC Status


Signal Trace

Signal Analysis

System Information

2. Diagnose

(2) Window view

When [PMC alarm status] is selected, the following dialog boxappears.

ALARM NOTHING

PMC alarm message

OK

Fig.3.4.3.4 (a)

(3) Operation

Press Enter , Space or . key to close “PMC alarm message” dialog

box.(4) Messages

The alarm messages same as PMC’s are displayed in this window.See the manual of PMC for detail of the messages.For details of messages, refer to the following manual:

“FANUC PMC MODEL PA1/PA3/RA1/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/ RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6/RC/RC3/RC4/ NB/NB2 Ladder

Language Programming Manual” (B–61863E)

3.4.3.4PMC Alarm Status




90

“PMC Status” window displays the status of program on PMC.

(1) Menu positionTo activate “PMC Status” window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu,and select [PMC Status] on the menu.

Ladder Monitor

Signal Status

PMC Parameter

PMC alarm status

PMC Status


Signal Trace

Signal Analysis

System Information

2. Diagnose

(2) Window viewWhen “PMC Status” is selected, following window is displayed

Series/Edition of PMC

Series/Edition of ladder Editing Card

Connected PMC type

Current scan time

Maximum scan time

Minimum scan time

Month/Date/Year

Hour:Minute:Second

CUR 0ms

MAX 0ms

MIN 0ms

Status

Series/Edition

****/**

****/**

PMC TYPE

PMC-***

SCAN TIME

Date/Time

00/00/00

00:00:00

Fig.3.4.3.5 (a)

3.4.3.5PMC Status Window




91

The program execution status can be changed from “RUNNING” to“STOP” or from “STOP” to “RUNNING”.

(1) Position of menu

To display the [RUN/STOP the program] dialog box, display the [2.Diagnose] pull–down menu, then select [RUN/STOP the program]from the menu.

Ladder Monitor

Signal Status

PMC Parameter

PMC alarm status

PMC Status


Signal Trace

Signal Analysis

System Information

2. Diagnose

(2) Displaying the dialog box

When [RUN/STOP the program] is selected, the dialog box shownbelow appears.

(a) Program running state

While a program is being executed, the following dialog boxappears.

STOP the program

Yes No

Fig.3.4.3.6 (a)

[YES] : Stop the program.

[NO] : Closes the dialog box without stopping the program.

(b) Program stop state

While a program is in the stop state, the following dialog boxappears.

3.4.3.6Executing or Stopping aProgram




92

RUN the program ?

Yes No

Fig.3.4.3.6 (b)

[YES] : Executes the ladder program.

[NO] : Closes the dialog box without executing the ladderprogram.

Warning

When executing or stopping a program, special care isnecessary. If a program is applied incorrectly, the machinemay act unpredictably.Avoid using the function if personnel are present near themachine.

(1) Outline of Signal Trace Function

This function checks the signal history which cannot be checked inthe status display. Using one–byte or two byte addressing, the

function records a state when the signal changes. In two–byteaddressing, discontinuous address can be set.

(2) Operations

(a) Selection of Signal Trace Screen

Please select “Signal Trace” from the menu of “2.Diagnose”.

Ladder Monitor

Signal Status

PMC Parameter

PMC alarm statusPMC Status


Signal Trace

Signal Analysis

System Information

2. Diagnose

3.4.3.7Signal Trace Function




93

F1EXEC

Signal Trace

X0000(01111111)

No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Value

0000 FDH

0001 2DH

0002 60H0003 00H

0004 00H

0005 00H

0006 00H0007 00H

Signal Trace Start Time –:–:– Signal Trace End Time –:–:–

Ô Ô

STOP

F3PARAM

The latest data, OFF , ON

The display of trace data can be scrolled by , , , and keyPageDown

PageUp

Fig.3.4.3.7 Screen of signal trace function

(b) Setting of signal trace parameter

“Signal Trace Parameter” dialog is displayed by pressing theF3“Param” key.

Signal Trace Parameter

OK Cancel

MODE

1 BYTE 2 BYTES (Consecutive Address)

2 BYTES (Two Address not Consecutive)

ADDRESS 1

MAX DISPLAY

PMC ADDRESS

PHY ADDRESS

X0000

MASK 1111 1111

7654 3210

ADDRESS 2

PMC ADDRESS

PHY ADDRESS

FFE480

MASK 1111 1111

7654 3210

[Signal Trace Parameter DIALOG]

Please set the following items by “Signal Trace Parameter”dialog.




94

1) MODE Sets a mode used for reading signals. . . . . . . . .

2) ADDRESS 1,2 Sets address type, trace address and. . .mask data

Address type

– PMC address (symbol is alsoacceptable)

– Physical address

Trace address

Sets address at which a signal istraced by specifiedaddress type.

Mask data

Sets a masked bit or bits (signals canbe read with unnecessary bitsmasked)

NotesWhen the trace address type is specified as a physicaladdress, if an illegal memory address is specified to execute

the trace, a system error may occur. About the legal rangeof a physical address which can be specified, a knowledgeof programming PMC by C language is needed.Refer to “PROGRAMMING MANUAL(C LANGUAGE)/ B–61863E–1” and operate carefully not to specify an illegalmemory address.

3) MAX DISPLAY The screen display size can be. . .changed.

(No check) –

Half screen display (8 lines)X (Check) –

All screen display (20 lines)


Please select [Cancel] or press Esc key when you cancelsetting.

(c) Starting or stopping signal trace function

Please press F1“EXEC” or “STOP” in Fig. 3.4.3.7 Screen Of Signal Trace Function.

(d) Automatic tracing function at power on

When the trace parameters have been specified and bit 5 of keep

relay K17 or K900 has been set to 1, the trace automatically startsat power on.




95

(1) Outline of Signal Analysis Function

The changes in a PMC ladder signal can be traced on the specifiedtrigger conditions. Displaying the results of tracing signals on a timeaxis enables checking the relationship between the signals.

Maximum number of signals traced at the same time : 16

Maximum sampling period : 10 sec

Sampling interval : 8 msec

(2) Operations

(a) Selection of Signal Analysis Screen

Ladder Monitor

Signal Status

PMC Parameter

PMC alarm status

PMC Status


Signal Trace

Signal Analysis

System Information

2. Diagnose

F1Exec

Signal analysis

Sampling Time : 10 (sec) Condition : Trigger–ON

Trigger Address : *ESP Trigger Mode : ABOUT

Start Time 1996/01/30 10:11:12 Stop Time 1996/01/30 10:11:22

Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô

STOP

F3Sgnprm

R0901.0

R0901.3

R0901.2

R0901.1

512 1024(msec)

F2T.Srch

F6Exchg

F10SgnSet

Fig.3.4.3.8 Screen of Signal Analysis Function

(b) Setting of Analysis Parameter

Analysis Parameter dialog is displayed by pressing F3“Sgnprm”.

3.4.3.8Signal Analysis Function




96

Analysis Parameter

Sampling Time 10 (sec) Trigger Address *ESP

Condition

Start

Trigger–ON

Trigger–OFF

Trigger–Mode

AFTER

ABOUT

BEFORE

ONLY

Signal–Address

1: X0000.0

2: X0000.1

3: X0000.2

4: X0000.3

5: R0900.0

6: R0900.1

7: R0900.2

8: R0900.3

OK Cancel Init

[Analysis Parameter DIALOG]

Signal–Address

9: X0000.4

10: X0000.5

11: X0000.6

12: X0000.7

13: R0900.4

14: R0900.5

15: R0900.6

16: R0900.7

(Next Page)

Please set the following items by “Analysis Parameter” dialog.

1) Sampling Time Specify the maximum trace time in a. . .range of 1 to 10 sec.

2) Trigger Address Specify a trigger address from which the. .tracing starts on the PMC address.A symbol name can be used.




97

3) Condition Specify the conditions at which the. . . . . . .tracing starts.

0 : When F1“Exec” key is pressed.1 : When F1“Exec” key is pressed

and the trigger address signal rises.2 : When F1“Exec” key is pressed

and the trigger address signal falls.

Notes

1 Condition 1 and 2 are effective when a trigger address isspecified.

4) Trigger Mode Sampled data for up to 10 seconds is. .stored in the trace buffer.A signal is stored in the buffer within 8 ms.

0 : AFTER

In this mode, signal status areobtained in the period specified in

the SAMPLING TIME from thetime when the trigger conditionsare satisfied.

1 : ABOUT

In this mode, signal status areobtained in the period specified inthe SAMPLING TIME with thetime at the middle when the triggerconditions are satisfied.

2 : BEFORE

In this mode, signal status areobtained in the period specified inthe SAMPLING TIME before the

trigger conditions are satisfied.3 : ONLY

In this mode, the signal states areobtained only when the triggerconditions are satisfied.

Notes

2 Trigger mode 1 is effective when condition 1 is set.Trigger mode 2 is effective when condition 2 is set.

5) Signal Address Specify up to 16 addresses at which the. . .

tracing is performed with PMCaddresses or symbol names.



When [Init] is selected, parameter and trace data of SignalAnalysis Function is initialized.

(c) Setting of Signal Analysis Screen

Analysis setting dialog is displayed by pressing F10“SgnSet”.




98

Analysis setting

OK Cancel

Scale

8 msec

16 msec 32 msec

Address/Symbol

Symbol

Address

Display–Mode

Max Display

Scroll–Mode

Scale(msec/Times)

[Analysis setting DIALOG ]

Please set the following items by “Analysis setting” DIALOG.

1) Scale Changing the time division.. . . . . . . . . . .When displaying the signal waveform,the time division can be changed.

8 –––– 8 msec/divisions16 –––– 16msec/ ”32 –––– 32msec/ ”

2) Address/Symbol Displaying symbols for trigger and. . trace addresses When symbols aredefined for trigger and trace addresses,the symbols and addresses aredisplayed.

3) Display Mode The screen display size can be changed.. .Max Display :

(No check) –

Half screen display (four points)

X (Check) –

All screen display(eight points)

4) Scroll Mode The unit of a right and left scroll can be. . .changed.

(No check) ––

Scrolls in each graduation

X (Check) ––

Scrolls in each page





99


(d) Starting or stopping of data sampling

Please press F1“Exec” or “Stop” in Fig.10.1.Screen of SignalAnalysis Function.

(e) Displaying traced data by specifying period

Enter a period in ms in which traced data is to be displayed.

Pressing F2“T.SRCH” key displays the trace data.(Example) Entering 800, then pressing F2“T.SRCH” keydisplays the waveform from 512 ms to 1024 ms.

(f) Exchanging positions at which traced data is displayed.

Pressing the F6“Exchg” key moves the cursor to the first tracedaddress.Move the cursor to an address to be displayed at different position

with or key and press SELECT key. Move the cursor

to an address to be displayed at the position of the specifiedaddress and press TO key.Pressing EXEC key exchanges the positions of the traced dataitems.

After TO key is pressed in the above procedure, Only EXEC keyis effective.Pressing CANCEL key restores the exchange trace data tooriginal positions.

F6

Exchg

F7Cancel

F6Select

F7

Cancel

F6

To

F7

Cancel

F6

Exec

[Changing of Function key]

(g) Reading signals automatically at power on

Since parameter and sampling data is stored in nonvolatilememory, data is retained when the power is turned off.When the parameters for sampling have been specified and bit 6of keep relay K17 or K900 have been set to 1, the data samplingautomatically starts at power on.




100

The system software information such as specifications, version, and etccan be referred.

(1) Menu position

To display “System Information” dialog box, pull down [2.Diagnose] menu, and select [System Information] on the menu

Ladder Monitor

Signal Status

PMC Parameter

PMC alarm status

PMC Status


Signal Trace

Signal Analysis

System Information

2. Diagnose

(2) Displaying dialog box

When [System Information] is selected, the following dialog boxappears.

Press Enter , Space or . key to close “System Information” dialog

box.


A08B–9201–J510Version 01.0

Copyright(C) 1996. FANUC LTD

System Information

Fig.3.4.3.9 (a)

Notes1 The on–line monitor driver occupies the line while it is

operating.In this state, other input/output functions cannot use theline.If other input/output functions use the line, it is necessary todisplay the abovementioned parameter and stop theon–line monitor driver.

2 While the on–line monitor driver is operating, the followingfunctions cannot be used. [PMCLAD], [I/O], [EDIT], and [SYSPRM] functions on

CRT/MDI. [EDIT], [SYSTEM PARAM], and [I/O] functions on

DPL/MDI.

3.4.3.9Display SystemInformation




101

The [3. I/O] menu provides the following options:

Load program

Store programBackup program

3. I/O

1. For the [Load program] dialog box

2. For the [Store program] dialog box3. For the [Backup program] dialog box

Notes1 In case of operating NC, the screen display of NC (Position,

etc.) might slow when using input/output functions (Loadfrom PMC, Store to PMC, etc.).There is no problem in the operation of NC. It isrecommended to using input/output functions while NC isnot operating.

2 When screen made by C language executor is displayed,the communication speed decreases. It is recommendedto use input/output functions after moving to other screens(Position, etc.).

A program held on the PMC can be transferred to the personal computer.

“LOAD OF PROGRAM” is used to transfer a ladder program from thePMC to the personal computer when, for example, using the program withthe on–line function.

(1) Menu positionTo display the “Load program” dialog box, display the [3. I/O]pull–down menu, then select [Load PROGRAM] from the menu.

Load program

Store program

Backup program

3. I/O


Selecting [Load of program] causes the following dialog box toappear.

3.4.4Input/Output

3.4.4.1Loading of Program




102

Load

program

size

indicator

Load program

Transfer data type

LADDER ALL

0%

Exec Abort Cancel

Abort loading

Execute loading Close dialog box

100%

Fig.3.4.4.1 (a)

(3) Operation

Select a desired button by pressing the Tab key, then press the Enter

key.

Once the program has been loaded normally, the dialog box closesautomatically.

A program held by the personal computer is transferred to the PMC.

Use “Store program” to transfer a ladder program from the personalcomputer to the PMC to enable, for example, the use of the program withthe on–line function.

(1) Menu position

To display the “Store program” dialog box, display the [3. I/O]pull–down menu, then select [Store program] from the menu.

Load program

Store program

Backup program

3. I/O


Selecting [Store program] causes the following dialog box to appear.

3.4.4.2Storing to the Program




103

Loading

program

size

indicator

Store program

Transfer data type

LADDER ALL

0%

Exec Abort Cancel

Abort storing

Execute storing Close dialog box

100%

Fig.3.4.4.2 (a)

(3) Operation

Select a desired button by pressing the Tab key, then press the Enter

key.

Once the program has been stored normally, the dialog box closesautomatically.

Notes While “Online Editor” is in progress, a program cannot be

stored to the PMC. To enable storing to the PMC, move to“Ladder Monitor”.

If the CNC is turned off after an edited program is stored to

the PMC but before the program is backed up, the resultsof editing will be lost. When storing a program to the CNC,therefore, backup the program (see Section 3.4.4.3).

A program stored in the PMC or which has been edited with the on–linefunction need to be backed up so that the program is not lost when thepower to the CNC is turned off.

CautionA program being edited or which is currently stored will belost if the power to the CNC is turned off before the programhas been backed up. Always back up such a programbefore turning off the power to the CNC.

(1) Menu positionTo display the program backup dialog box, first display thepull–down menu for [3.I/O], then select “Backup program”

3.4.4.3Program Backup




104

Load program

Store program

Backup program

3. I/O

(2) Displaying the dialog boxWhen [Backup program] is selected, a dialog box is displayedaccording to the backup destination. See Section 1.2.1.2 forinformation about the backup destination for each CNC systemconfiguration.

(a) CNC system on which a program is backed up to PMC flashmemory

Backup program

Set CNC to “Emergency Stop” status and select EXEC to backup

program to F-ROM.

Exec Cancel

Executes backup. Closes the dialogbox.

Fig.3.4.4.3 (a)

(b) CNC system on which a program is backed up to PMC programmemory on the personal computer

Backup program

Sure to backup the program into the Open–CNC system ?

Exec Cancel

Executes backup. Closes the dialogbox.

Fig.3.4.4.3 (b)

(3) Operation

1) Click the [Exec] button. The message [Now backup] appears,and backup is started. Provided backup is completedsuccessfully, the message “Backup complete” appears.




105

2) Close the dialog box by clicking the [Cancel] button or pressing

the Esc key.

CautionIn the case of a CNC system in which programs are backedup to PMC flash memory, place the CNC in the emergency

stop state before starting backup.

This function establishes or disconnects a communication link betweenopen CNC and PMC. The on–line function can be used only while acommunication link is established.

The communication link is established automatically as soon as thecomputer is executed.

(1) Menu position

To display the “Communication” dialog box, display the [4.

Communication] pull–down menu, then select [Communication]from the menu.

Communication

4. Communication


(a) Displaying the “Communication” dialog box

Selecting [Communication] causes the following dialog box toappear:

Communication

status

Cancel

Start

Closecommunica-

tion dialog

box

Start or stop

communica-

tion

Fig.3.4.5 (a)

3.4.5Communication




106

This section provides the following examples of using the on–linefunction:

(1) Starting the on–line functionsWhen the system is started, the on–line functions, andcommunication are automatically started.

F8Search

F7Splist

F9Symbol

F10Seting


Communication

Status

Cancel

Start

Try to connect with PMC . . . 0000 0000

Communication

Fig.3.4.6.1 (a)

(2) Program loadingIf a match with a program on the PMC is confirmed, the subprogram screenappears. If no match is found, the dialog box shown below appears. From

the dialog box, select [Load] to load a program from the PMC.

N : E–3160 selected program is not same.

Load

Store

Disregard

Quit

Load from PMC program memory.

Store to PMC program memory.

Disregard difference.

Quit On–Line function.

Fig.3.4.6.1 (b)

3.4.6Examples of Operation

3.4.6.1

Monitoring a Ladder




107

(3) Selecting a subprogram

(a) After a program is loaded from the PMC, the “Sub–program list”dialog box appears as shown below:

Sub–program list

LEVEL 1

LEVEL 2

P00001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR ) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH–R1

P00002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR ) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH–L1

S P00010 (GRIP WORK PEICE ) PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND

P00011 (PUT WORK PIECE ) PUT DOWN A WORK


P00022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR ) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH–L2

CancelOK

Fig.3.4.6.1 (c)

(b) By pressing the or key, position the cursor to the

subprogram to be displayed.

(c) Press the Enter key.

(d) The ladder diagram for the specified subprogram is displayed.

(4) Monitoring action of ladder diagram

The “Ladder Monitor” window is displayed as following.

(a) Displaying the “Ladder Monitor” window

F8Search

F7SpList

F9Symbol

F10Seting

Ladder Monitor

1. File

[LEVEL1] NET 00001-00006

Ô

Ô

Ô

Ô Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô Ô

Ô Ô Ô Ô

SUB 1

END

D000 R0000.1

D000R0000.0

2. Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication

Fig.3.4.6.1 (d)

(b) Monitoring contact and coil statusContacts and coils are displayed to indicate their status: ON (1)




108

or OFF (0). They are displayed with thick or thin line accordingto their status as follows.

ON (1)

Thick

Thin

Thick

Thick

Thick

Thick

OFF (0)

Thin

Thick

Thin

Thin

Thin

Thin

(S)

(R)

(c) Moving in the ladderThe area displayed on the window can be moved by

cursor-up/down key and PageUp / Page

Down . Function key F8

[Search] is useful to jump directly to your destination.(d) Searching for a net

To move to a desired position, enter the number of the net to bedisplayed, its address, or functional instruction number (Sxxx).Then, press function key F8 [SEARCH].

(e) Opening the “Display setting” dialog boxPressing function key F10 [SET] causes the “Display setting”dialog box to appear.

Display setting


Ladder Mode

Symbol

Address

Relay Comment

Symbol & Address




Display

Function Parameter

Cancel

OK

Fig.3.4.6.1 (e)

(f) Displaying functional instruction parametersPosition the cursor to “Function Parameter” and check

“Display”. Then, press the Enter key to close the “Display




109

setting” dialog box. The functional instruction parametersappear as shown below:

-OFF-

RST

TCTRL-1

ACT

SUB 36

ADDB

0002

TCNT-1[ 12]

0000000001

NXT-TCNT

[ 13]

Contents of address

NXT-TCNT

Contents of address

TCNT-1

Fig.3.4.6.1 (f)

(g) Changing the symbol/comment display modeOpen the “Display setting” dialog box again. Position the cursorto “Address” in the “Symbol & Comment Display” field. Press

the Enter key to close the “Display setting” dialog box. The

contact, coil, and functional instruction parameters appear,together with PMC addresses, as shown below:

R9091.0 RST

R0103.2 ACT

SUB 36

ADDB

0002

R0112

[ 12]

0000000001

R0114

[ 13]

Fig.3.4.6.1 (g)

(5) Checking the PMC status(a) Displaying the “Status” window

Select [2. Diagnose] from the menu bar. Then, select “PMCstatus”. The “Status” window appears as shown below:




110

Series/Edition

4066/10

Status

PMC TYPE

PMC-RB4

SCAN TIME

CUR 0ms

MAX 0ms

MIN 0ms

Date/Time

00/00/00

00:00:00

Fig.3.4.6.1 (h)

(b) Checking the alarm stateWhen the PMC enters the alarm state, the color of the PMC alarmicon changes from gray to yellow. Should this occur, select [2.Diagnose] and open the “PMC alarm message” dialog box. Then,check the details of the alarm state. (For details of icons, see (2),”Displaying the PMC status (icon)” in Section 3.4.1.2.)

ER32 NO I/O DEVICE

PMC alarm message

Ok

Fig.3.4.6.1 (i)

(c) Checking whether a program is runningWhile a ladder program is running, the icon shown in Fig. 3.4.6.1(j) is visible. When no ladder program is running, the iconindicated in Fig. 3.4.6.1. (k) is visible. (For details of icons, see(2), ”Displaying the PMC status (icon)” in Section 3.4.1.2.)




111

Program on

PMC is running.

Program on

PMC is stopped.

Fig. 3.4.6.1 (j) Fig. 3.4.6.1 (k)

To change the ladder program execution status, select [2.Diagnose] then use the “RUN/STOP the ladder” dialog box.

(d) Displaying the communication statusWhile communication with the PMC is being performed, the iconshown in Fig. 3.4.6.1 (l) is visible. When communication withthe PMC has not been established, the icon indicated in Fig.3.4.6.1 (m) is visible. (For details of icons, see (2), ”Displayingthe PMC status (icon)” in Section 3.4.1.2.)

Communication

is active.

Communication

is stopped.

Fig. 3.4.6.1 (l) Fig. 3.4.6.1 (m)

When changing the status of the communication being performedwith the PMC, use the [4. Communication] dialog box.

(6) Monitoring signals

(a) Opening ”Signal Status” windowPull down the [2. Diagnose] menu, select [Signal Status] from themenu, the ”Signal Status” window is displayed,

Signal Status

G00000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

G00001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

G00002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

G00003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

G00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

G00005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

G00006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00G00007 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

G00008 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

G00009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

Fig.3.4.6.1 (n)

and the functions of function keys change as following.




112

F4

Symbol

F8

Search

F10

Wrt On

or or

F4

Adress

F10

WrtOff

Fig.3.4.6.1 (o)

(b) Searching Address

Enter ”R0.0” and press function key F8 [Search], the address

R00000 is displayed at top of the window, and the cursor movesonto signal of R00000.0.

R00000 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 : 42

R00001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

R00002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

R00003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

R00009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

Signal Status

Fig.3.4.6.1 (p)

(c) Displaying symbolFunction key F4 [Symbol] displays symbols of addresses on

the window, just above the corresponding signal. Symbolsdefined for byte address are also displayed just above theiraddresses on the window. When the symbols are displayed, the

function key F4 changes to [Adress] which hides the symbols.

R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

–OFF– –ON–

byte symbol bit symbols

Signal Status

CONST

R00000 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 : 42

R00001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

Fig.3.4.6.1 (q)




113

(d) Unlocking write-protection

Press function key F10 [Wrt On] to unlock write protection of

the contents of addresses displayed on the window. The color of

cursor changes to red from yellow. And the function key F10

changes to [WrtOff].

WarningSignal status changes should always be made with extremecare. Signal status changes can have serious andunforeseen results on a control system, and on the processto which it applies, if they are improperly used. It isrecommended that these functions not be used with peoplenear the equipment.

(e) Changing status

Move the cursor in the window by the cursor keys, PageUp and

Page

Down to the signal you want to change, then press Enter key to

make the signal status change. Enter key turns a signal status ON

which was OFF, and turns a signal status OFF which was ON.

CONST

R00000 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 : 42

R00001 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 : 02

R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

–OFF– –ON–

Signal Status

Fig.3.4.6.1 (r)

NoteSome signals may not change their status even if youchange them, because the Ladder diagram writes thesignals frequently, or the signals are frequently updated byNC, MMC, or the external I/O devices such as I/O-Link: NC

writes signals on F-address, MMC on M-address, and theexternal I/O devices on X-address.

(f) Enabling write-protection again

Press function key F10 [WrtOff] to re-protect the contents of

addresses on the window from unforeseen changes. The color of

cursor returns to yellow from red. And the function key F10

returns to [Wrt On].




114

(g) Hiding ”Signal Status” windowPull down the [2. Diagnose] menu, select [Ladder Monitor] fromthe menu, then the ”Signal Status” window disappears.

Note

Non-volatile PMC address T, C, K and D which is called”PMC parameter” has special window to display and modify

them (see 3.4.3.3 for detail).

(7) Backing up a programBack up the results of editing performed with the on–line function toprevent the results from being lost when the power to the CNC isturned off. The results of editing will be lost if the power to the CNCis turned off without performing backup.

(a) Displaying the program backup dialog boxOpen [3.I/O] on the pull down menu, then select ”Backupprogram”. The dialog box shown below appears. (The messagedisplayed in the dialog box varies with the CNC system.)

Set CNC to “Emergency Stop” status and select EXEC to

backup program to FROM.

Backup program

Exec Cancel

Fig.3.4.6.1 (s)

(b) Performing backup

Click the [Exec] button. The message ”Now backup...” appears,and backup is started. Provided backup is completedsuccessfully, the message ”Backup complete” appears.

(c) Closing the dialog boxClose the dialog box by clicking the [Cancel] button or pressing

the Esc key.

(8) Ending the on-line function

(a) Ending the on-line functionSelect [1. FILE] from the menu bar. Then, select [Exit].A message dialog box appears as shown below. Select [OK] toend the on-line function.

Are you sure you want to exit ?

OK Cancel

Fig.3.4.6.1 (t)




115

When Off–Line Function is selected from the on–line function menu, thefollowing off–line menu screen appears.

Press the function key corresponding to the desired function. Thecorresponding screen will appear.

OFF–LINE MENU RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

[C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE ]

F1 KEY : EDIT

F2 KEY: PRINT

F3 KEY: COMPILEF4 KEY: DECOMPILE

F5 KEY: I/O

F6 KEY : PROGRAM OPTION SET–UP

F7 KEY : MNEMONIC EDIT

F8 KEY: UTILITY

F9 KEY : ON–LINE FUNCTION

F10KEY: END

1 EDIT 2 PRINT 3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP5 I/O 6 SET–UP 7 MNEEDT8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10 END

Fig.3.5.1 Off-line Menu Screen

The source file of a sequence program is edited.

(1) Start

[Operation]1) Select [EDIT] from the main menu indicated below.

OFF–LINE MENU RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]


F1 KEY : EDIT

F2 KEY: PRINT

F3 KEY: COMPILEF4 KEY: DECOMPILE

F5 KEY: I/O

F6 KEY : PROGRAM OPTION SET–UPF7 KEY : MNEMONIC EDIT

F8 KEY: UTILITY

F9 KEY : ON–LINE FUNCTIONF10KEY: END


Fig.3.5.2 (a) Off-line Menu

3.5OFF-LINE FUNCTION

3.5.1General

3.5.2Editing




116

2) The following editing menu screen appears:

EDIT RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

F1 KEY: TITLE

F2 KEY : LADDER DIAGRAM

F3 KEY : SYMBOL & COMMENTF4 KEY: MESSAGE

F5 KEY: I/O MODULE

F6 KEY : SYSTEM PARAMETER F10KEY: END

1 TITLE 2 LADSEFC 3 SYMBOL4 MESSAG5 MODULE6 SYSPRM7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.2(b) Editing Menu

3) Select data to be edited with the corresponding function key.

4) The editing screen for the selected data appears. For example, thescreen below is displayed when [TITLE] is selected.

EDIT (TITLE) RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

1) MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME :

2) MACHINE TOOL NAME : FANUC PMC–MODEL RC4 & F16MB

3) PMC & NC NAME :4) PMC PROGRAM NO :

5) EDITION NO :

6) PROGRAM DRAWING NO :7) DATA OF PROGRAMMING :

8) PROGRAM DESIGNED BY :

9) ROM WRITTEN BY :

10) REMARKS :

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.2(c) Editing Title

(2) Termination

[Operation]

1) Select [END] or press the Esc key on the editing screen.

2) The following message appears:

F1F2F3

Save (update) & quitQuitEdit

3) Press the desired function key.




117

(i) When UPDATE is selected, the editing operation isterminated after the results of editing are written to a file.

(ii) When QUIT is selected, the editing operation is terminatedwithout writing the results of editing to a file.

(iii) When EDIT is selected, the editing is continued.

4) When UPDATE or QUIT is selected, the display returns to the

editing menu screen.(i) To continue editing, select the appropriate function key.

(ii) To terminate editing, select [END]. The display returns to themain menu.

Title data represents the titles of sequence programs generated by amachine tool builder.

(1) Start

[Operation]

1) Select [TITLE] on the editing menu screen.2) The following title editing screen appears:

EDIT (TITLE) RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

1) MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME :

2) MACHINE TOOL NAME : FANUC PMC–MODEL RC4 & F16MA

3) PMC & NC NAME :

4) PMC PROGRAM NO :

5) EDITION NO :6) PROGRAM DRAWING NO :

7) DATA OF PROGRAMMING :

8) PROGRAM DESIGNED BY :

9) ROM WRITTEN BY :

10) REMARKS :

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.2.1

(2) Input

[Operation]

1) Select an input item (displayed in reverse video) with the

and keys.

2) Enter data.The maximum number of characters usable for each title dataitem is listed below.

MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME : 32 charactersMACHINE TOOL NAME : 32 charactersCNC & NC NAME : 32 charactersPMC PROGRAM NO : 4 charactersEDITION NO : 2 characters

3.5.2.1Title Data Editing




118

PROGRAM DRAWING NO : 32 charactersDATE OF PROGRAMMING : 16 charactersPROGRAM DESIGNED BY : 32 charactersROM WRITTEN BY : 32 charactersREMARKS : 32 characters

(3) Termination

[Operation]

1) Select [END] on press the Esc key to return to the editing menu

screen.

2) The following message appears.

F1F2F3


3) Press the desired function key. The system returns to the editingmenu.

(1) A program configuration screenThis screen lists subprograms, and supports the selection and editingof a target subprogram.

EDIT (LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) PMC–RC4 (STEP SEQ) [C:¥FLADDER ]

PROGRAM: (STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3

P1 P2 P4 P5 P6 P7

P8 P9 P14 P15 P16 P17

P21 P22 P24 P25 P26 P27

P101 P202 ]P304 ]P405 ]P406 ]P407

S–prog’P1

1 ADRESS 2 3 4 5 6 DELETE 7 8 9 NEW 10 ZOOM

(a) Screen display (Pxxx represents a subprogram number)

Screen display Meaning Display by [ZOOM] or Enter

LEVEL1 the 1st ladder level ladder diagram

LEVEL2 the 2nd ladder level ladder diagram

LEVEL3 the 3rd ladder level (Note 1) ladder diagram

Pxxx a subprogram ladder diagram

] Pxxx a subprogram step sequence diagram

∆] Pxxx (Note 2) a subprogram in edit ing step sequence diagram

Pxxx a duplicate subprogram ladder or step seqencediagram

3.5.2.2Ladder Diagram/StepSequence Editing




119

Notes1 The 3rd ladder level can be omitted.2 If the [ZOOM] key was used to nest a program to a certain

depth, and if the subprogram configuration screen isdisplayed upon a single press of the [MAIN] key, the editingof the subprograms for which the [ZOOM] key was pressedis suspended. Such subprograms are marked with ∆].

Following keys are useful in this screen.

Function key

[ADRESS] : Switching address/symbol display[DELETE] : Deleting a subprogram[NEW ] : Creating a new subprogram[ZOOM ] : Modifying a subprogram

Other keys

PageUp : Displaying previous screen

PageDown : Displaying next screen

Meaning of display

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RC4(STEP SEQ) [C:¥FLADDER]

EDIT : Editing screen

(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) : The list screen of subprogram

PMC-RC4 (STEP SEQ) : Setting a model

[A:¥FLADDER¥ : Current directory

PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

PROGRAM: Remarks which is one of the title data

LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3

LEVEL1 : The 1st level of ladder

LEVEL2 : The 2nd level of ladder

LEVEL3 : The 3rd level of ladder

P0001

]P0002

P0004

P0005

P0006

P0007

: a subprogram of the ladder

] : a subprogram of the step sequence

(b) Creating a new subprogram

–Press the [NEW] key.

New program name ?




120

–Enter the number of the subprogram to be created (P200, forexample).

Program Type ?

F1 LadderF2 Step sequence

(c) Modifying a subprogram–Key in the number of the subprogram to be modified (P200, for

example), then press the [ZOOM] or Enter key. Alternatively,

position the cursor to P200 then press the [ZOOM] or Enter key.

–If a subprogram number marked with ∆] (P21, for example) isselected, the following message is displayed:

Editing this subprogram is not completed.

Continue to select it ? (Yes/No) [Y]

To continue the editing session using the results obtained fromsuspended previous editing session, press the Enter key. To

cancel the results of the previous editing session and edit the

subprogram from its original state, enter N .

(2) Editing a ladder diagram

(a) StartDisplay the program list screen. Position the cursor to the

program indicated by , then press the [ZOOM] or Enter key.

The ladder diagram editing screen, shown below, appears.

X000.0

R000.0 ACT

EDIT (LADDER) ORIGinal RC4 <0>[C:¥FLADOER¥]

[C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE¥P1.#LA]PMC–RC4 NET 00001–00003 STEP 00010/32000 EMS

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

SUB71

SPP0001

P0001

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Y000.0

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

SUB 8

MOVEŸ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

1100

0111

D000

D010

AD=X0.0 CCO=TEST DATA NO.1

CO=SAMPLE 00001 RC0=RELAY SAMPLE

000014/000014

000012

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

1 2 3 4 5 function 6 7 8 9 10 comand

Fig.3.5.2.2 (a) Ladder Diagram Editing Screen

(i) When the [View] command is used, a different line is shown.(For the [View] command, see (j) ”Combining a sequenceprogram”




121

(ii) The line shows the name of the file which is being edited,number of the net which is displayed on the screen, and thenumber of program steps/maximum number of steps that canbe edited.

(iii)The line shows a sub-program number (P address) or labelnumber (L address).

(iv) The lines show a symbol and comment added to the data atthe address selected by the cursor.

1) AD=X000.0 : Address on which the cursor isplaced

2) SY=SAMPLE:00001

Symbol dataTotal number of symbols

3) RCO=RELAYSAMPLE :00012

Relay comment dataTotal character numbers of relaycomment

4) CCO=TEST DATA No.1 :0030/00030

Coil comment dataTotal character number of coil

comment output to object file/Totalcharacter number of coil comment.

(b) Function key indications and selectionThe ladder diagram editing functions correspond to the functionkeys as indicated below.

1)

1 2 3 4 5 function 6 7 8 or 9 or 10 comand

[comand] ↓ 2)

2) [COMAND]

1 insnet 2 Delnet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10 Zoom

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓

5) 6) 7) 8) 8) 9) 10)

3) Under condition 1), holding down [SHIFT] lets you select the following items.

1 2 3 4 5 netcmt 6 page 7 8 9 10(S) (R)

4) Under condition 2), holding down [SHIFT] lets you select the following items.

1 2 3 4 5 G–srch 6 7 8 9 10 List

5) [Delnet]

1 exec 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 7 exclud 8 9 10

6) [Insert]

1 Insnet 2 Inslin 3 Inselm 4 5 6 7 8 9 10




122

7) [Search]

1 top 2 bottom 3 srch 4 w–srch 5 n–srch 6 s–srch 7 c–down 8 c–up 9 10

8) [Copy] / [Move]

1 until 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 7 8 9 10

↓ *

1 to 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 to–[1] 7 to–org 8 9 10

* [to-org] is displayed in the [File] command mode only.

9) [File]Opens a window in which the name of an input program can be specified. Select desired processing froma POP-UP menu.

10)[syEdit]

1 exec 2 cancel 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

NotesWhile the function keys of 1) are displayed in ladder diagram editing, a command of 2) can be

executed. For example, entering and [COMAND] on the 1) screen has the same effect

as selecting F4 [Adress] on the 2) screen. To select a command of 2) in this way, enter the

upper-case letter (not necessarily initial letter) in the corresponding command name shown on

the 2) screen.

A

(c) Ladder program inputFor ladder program input, select [LADDER] from the editingmenu. The function key programmer menu is displayed. Whenno sequence program has been entered, the screen displays onlythe right and left vertical rails of a ladder diagram.

At this stage, program input can be started.

Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to any location in theladder diagram.

Examples of basic instruction program input and functioninstruction program input are shown below.




123

(i) Example of basic instruction program input

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

X0.1 D30.2 F14.2

X2.4

Y52.7

[Operation]

1) Move the cursor to the start position, then press[ ].The [ ] symbol appears on the screen. Themessage ”HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL” appearsat the lower-right corner of the screen. This messagewarns the user that horizontal ladder diagram linecreation is not completed. Enter an address and bit data.

2) Enter X0.1 on the keyboard and press the Enter key. The

address is set at the contact, and the cursor moves right.

3) As in 1) and 2), enter contact A of D30.2.

4) Enter contact B of F14.2.Press [ ] and enter address F14.2, then press the

Enter key. The address is set on contact B and the cursor

moves right.

5) Without moving the cursor, press [ ].

A horizontal line segment extending to the right is drawnautomatically and a relay coil symbol appears near theright vertical rail.

6) Enter address Y52.7, then press the Enter key.

The cursor automatically moves to the input startposition on the next line.

7) Next, enter an OR condition.Press [ ] and enter address X2.4, then press the

Enter key.

The address is set at contact B and the cursor moves right.

8) Press [ ] to enter a horizontal line.

To enter a horizontal line, enter a number and press thehorizontal line key [ ]. The line segment will beentered as many times as the number entered. Note,however, that such a line never exceeds the right verticalrail.

9) A vertical line extending upward is required for OR.Press [ ] to enter a vertical line extending upward.

(ii) Example of function instruction program inputFor function instruction input, press the function key




124

[functn]. Next, enter a SUB number, then press the Enter key.

A function instruction can also be entered by entering thefunction instruction name or SUB number and pressing the[functn] key.If the user does not remember a certain instruction name orSUB number, a function instruction table that lists functioninstructions and corresponding SUB numbers can be

displayed on the screen.The table can be displayed just by pressing the [functn] keywithout entering any data. Then the function instructiontable is automatically displayed.Press the [functn] key to return to the ladder diagram screenfrom the function instruction table.

Control condition

MOVE

(SUB 8)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

When entering a function instruction with this function,

enter the parameters of the function instruction vertically

as shown below.

.

ACT

Output address

Input data addressLow–order 4–bit logical

multiplication data

High–order 4–bit logical multiplication data

MOVE

SUB 8

← (1)

← (2)

← (3)

← (4)

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

[Operation]

1) Enter a control condition.Press [ ]. Next, enter an address and bit data, then

press the Enter key. The cursor moves right.

2) Enter a function instruction.Press the [functn] key. Next, enter SUB number 8, then

press the Enter key. The function instruction diagram

shown above appears.

3) Enter the parameters of the function instruction.

First, enter the high–order 4–bit logical multiplicationdata of the first parameter, then press the Enter key. The

cursor automatically moves downwards. Enter theremaining three parameters one by one.

(iii)Restrictions and notes on ladder editing

[Restrictions]

1) Restrictions related to the ladder 1 net (corresponding tothe portion between the RD and WRT instructions)




125

a) When the ladder 1 net exceeds 256 steps (as countedas steps in the corresponding mnemonic program),the following message appears:“A limit of 256 steps per net was exceeded.”If there are more than 256 steps, no net is displayed.

2) Restrictions related to a ladder diagram display perscreenIf an attempt is made to display more than 70 ladder net

lines per screen, the error described below occurs.a) Symptom

(a–1) When there are more than 70 lines per net, thefollowing message appears.“The NET being created is too large.”If 70 lines are exceeded, the following messageappears, and no net is displayed.“A limit of 70 lines per net was exceeded.”

(a–2) When there are more than 70 lines totaled over twoor more nets, the following message appears.“The NET being created is too large.”If 70 lines are exceeded when totaled over two ormore nets, the following message appears for a netthat is the current net when 70 lines are exceeded,and the display of the current net is discontinued.“The NET is larger than the editing buffer.”In this case, specify the net to be displayed, usingthe ladder diagram search function (such as netnumber search).

b) How to obtain the number of lines per screenEven if part of a net is displayed on a screen, all linesof the net are included in the total for that screen. Inaddition, a space line between nets is counted as avalid line.The number of lines in each net to be displayed isdetermined as follows:

(b–1) Basic instructionsOne line is comprised of one basic instruction.

← 1 line

← 2 lines

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

(b–2) Function instructions

The number of lines in a function instruction is:The number of control conditions or parameters,whichever is greater, plus 1Examples of calculation follow.

– When the number of control conditions < numberof parameters




126

SUB 36

ADDB

1004

R000

R010

R020

RST

ACTŸ

Number of control conditions = 2

Number of parameters = 4

Number of lines = number of

parameters + 1 = 5 lines

– When the number of control conditions > numberof parameters

SUB 11

PARI

R100O.E

RST

Ÿ

Ÿ

Number of control conditions = 3

Number of parameters = 1

Number of lines = number of

control conditions + 1 = 5 lines

ACT

(b–3) Data table section of function instructionsThe data table section of the COD, CODB, orDISP instruction is calculated as follows:

– When the data table is one or two bytes

Number of lines =number of data tables/6 (+ 1 if there is aremainder)

SUB 49

DISP

0011

0003

D300

ACT

Ÿ

Ÿ

000

003

006

009

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

Number of lines in the data table

section = 11/6

= 1 with remainder 5

= 2 lines

– When the data table is four bytes

Number of lines =number of data tables/4 (+ 1 if there is aremainder)




127

SUB 27

CODB

0005

0007

D300

D320

RST

Ÿ

000

002

004

00000000

00000000

00000000

ACT

00000000

00000000Number of lines in the data table

section = 5/4

= 1 with remainder 1

= 2 lines

(b-4) Example of calculating the number of lines perscreenFor the ladder shown below, the number of lines inthe screen display section is obtained as follows:

- The valid nets on the displayscreen are nets A and B.

- Number of lines in net AFunction instruction section +data table section = 6 lines

(3+1) (11/6)

- The number of lines in net B is 2.

Net A SUB 49

DISP

0011

0003

D300

000 0000 0000 0000

003 0000 0000 0000

006 0000 0000 0000

009 0000 0000

ACT

Net C

Screen display section

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Net B

c) Examples of symptomsExample of symptom (a-1)

- The ladder diagram can be edited only when the”total number of message data steps” parameter of the DISP instruction (SUB 49) is less than or equalto 396. This is because when the total number of steps is 396, the net consists of 70 lines.

8 lines




128

If a net that consists of a total of 396 steps or moreis created during mnemonic editing, the followingmessage appears, and the display of the net isdiscontinued.“The data table is too large.”

Example of symptom (a-2)

- If an attempt is made to enter the net of a functioninstruction on the same screen as that of a basicinstruction, the following message is displayed,and the attempt is rejected.“The NET being created is too large.”For example, if the basic instruction net has 68lines, the MOVE instruction (SUB 8) cannot beentered, (because the total number of lines exceeds70). The results of calculation are describedbelow.

68-line net

Number of MOVE

instruction lines =

number of parameters

(4) + 1 = 5

68 + 5 = 73 lines

Display

screen

SUB 8

MOVE

RST

Ÿ

ŸŸ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

<Measure>If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled, the

MOVE instruction can be entered.- A basic instruction net cannot be entered together

with another basic-instruction net, if the totalnumber of lines is greater than 70.

For example, if a 68-line basic-instruction net isfollowed by another basic-instruction net, theelement of the third line of the latter net cannot beentered.

68-line netDisplay

screen

No more lines

can be entered.

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ ŸŸ Ÿ

Ÿ ŸŸ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

<Measure>If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled, thelatter basic instruction can be entered.




129

- When the CODB instruction (SUB 27) and DISPinstruction (SUB 49) are edited on the samescreen, if an attempt is made to enter 396 as thetotal number of message data steps for the DISPinstruction (SUB 49), the following messageappears, and the attempt is rejected.“The NET being created is too large.”

This symptom also occurs in a combination of two

DISP instructions and a combination of CODB andCOD instructions.

For example, if the number of tables for the CODBinstruction is 200, the total number of steps for theDISP instruction can be only 66 at maximum. Thecalculation results are shown below.

Display

screen

Function instruction sections

=3 parameters + 1

Number of remaining lines

=70 - 55 - 4

= 11 lines

Data tables

=11*6 = 66

4 bytes

200 data tables

Function instruction section

=4 parameters + 1

Data table section

=200/4 = 50

SUB 27

CODB

0004

0200

000 00000000 00000000

002 00000000 00000000

&

SUB 49

DISP

196 00000000 00000000

198 00000000 00000000

RST

ACTNumber of CODB

instruction lines = 55

ACT Calculation of DISP

instruction data items that

can be entered

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

<Measure>Moving the DISP instruction to the top of the displayscreen makes it possible to set the total number of steps to 396.

3) Restriction on the maximum number of stepsThe maximum number of ladder steps that can be edited is asfollows:

Without EMS : 21840 stepsWith EMS : 32000 steps

Note, however, that the maximum allowable number of steps

can decrease, depending on how memory is used.If a ladder being edited exceeds the maximum allowablenumber of steps, editing is disabled and the followingmessage is displayed:

MNEMONIC BUFFER OVER




130

Notes1 An attempt to scroll a program on the screen with a scroll key

or other keys fails if the ladder program is incomplete (forexample, without addresses) or invalid.A correct ladder program must be created before the screencan be scrolled.

2 Up to eight contacts and one coil can be entered in one lineon the screen.However, this restriction does not apply to a sequenceprogram created in mnemonic format. When a sequenceprogram created in mnemonic format exceeds this limit, it isdisplayed over several lines with a continuation symbol.This continuation symbol cannot be deleted with[ ]. Use [Delnet] (net deletion) to delete thissymbol. (See Item (6) in this section.)

(d) Replacing sections of a sequence programLines in an already created sequence program can be replaced in

the same way as described in Item (c) above.Move the cursor to a program section to be changed, then enternew data.

(e) Sequence program additionPress the [comand] soft key of the function key programmermenu and use the function keys indicated below.

To terminate the programmer menu, press the Esc key.

1 insnet 2 Delnet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10

[Insert] ↓

1 insnet 2 inslin 3 inselm 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

As described below, there are four types of sequence programaddition in a ladder diagram.

(i) Example: when a relay contact is added on a line

Addition on a line

Ÿ Ÿ

To be added

Ÿ Ÿ

Move the cursor to the position to add item(s), then enteritem(s) in the way described in Item (c) above.

When a vertical line affects addition




131

ŸŸ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

To be added

Cursor

[Operation]

1) Move the cursor to the position shown above.

2) Press [ ] to delete the vertical line to the leftextending upward. This disappears.

3) Press [ ] to create a vertical line extending upwardto the right of the cursor, then press [ ]. Ahorizontal line and vertical line are created.

4) Move the cursor to the point on the line where a contactis to be added.

5) Press [ ] to add a contact.

(ii) When a line is added vertically

To be added

ŸŸ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

To add a line vertically, an area is required for the addition.To create such an area, the lower part of the ladder diagrammust be shifted down by one line. To do this, move the cursorto any point in the ladder diagram enclosed in dashed lines,then press the [insnet] key.Each time the [insnet] key is pressed, the lower part of theladder diagram is shifted one line down to create an area foraddition. Make an addition in this area.After line addition, any remaining area (as in the case wheretwo lines are added in an area large enough for three lines) canbe left as it is.

[Operation]1) Move the cursor to any point in the ladder diagram

enclosed in dashed lines.

2) Press [insnet].The lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted down byone line.

3) When the [insnet] key is pressed without entering anumeric value, one line is inserted.

4) When the [insnet] key is pressed after entering a numericvalue, the number of lines specified is inserted.




132

5) Move the cursor to the desired position and press

[ ]. Then set address data and press the Enter key.

The cursor moves right.

6) Press the [ ] soft key to create an OR circuit.

(iii)Line insertion in a single-net sequence programBlank lines are inserted one by one.

[Operation]

1) Enter the number of lines to be inserted, then press the[inslin] key. The entered number of lines is inserted.(When the [inslin] key is pressed without entering anumber, just one line is added.)

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Cursor

If the [inslin] key is pressed when the cursor is positionedas shown in the left-hand figure, a blank line is insertedas shown in the right-hand figure.

(iv) Element insertion in a single-net sequence programElements are added one by one.

[Operation]

1) Enter the number of elements to be inserted, then pressthe [inselm] key. The entered number of elements isinserted.

If the character A is prefixed to the number of

elements to be inserted and the [inselm] key is pressed,elements are inserted after the cursor.(If the [inselm] key is pressed without entering thenumber of elements to be inserted, just one element isinserted.)

Cursor

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

If the [inselm] key is pressed when the cursor is placedas shown in the left-hand figure, an element is inserted

as shown in the following figure. The element is insertedbefore the cursor.

Cursor

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ




133

If the character A is entered and the [inselm] key is

pressed when the cursor is placed as shown in theleft-hand figure, an element is inserted as shown in theright-hand figure. The element is inserted after thecursor.

(f) Deletion in a sequence program

(i) A program can be partially deleted by positioning the cursorat the location to be deleted and pressing one of the belowthree soft keys

[ ] : Deletes a horizontal line, relay contact, relaycoil, etc.

[ ] : Deletes a vertical line extending upward tothe left of the cursor.

[ ] : Deletes a vertical line extending upward tothe right of the cursor.

(ii) Use the [Delnet] key to delete a program net (section from anRD instruction to a WRT instruction).

(iii)Multiple nets can be deleted one by one.

1 Insnet 2 Delnet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10

[Delnet] ↓

1 exec 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 7 exclud 8 9 10

[Operation]

1) DeletionMove the cursor to the net to be deleted, then press the[Delnet] key. The net to be deleted is displayed in red.

2) Deleting multiple netsMove the cursor by using keys such as the cursor downkey, [c-down] key, or [search] key, then display the netsto be deleted in red. If the [c-down] key is pressed aftera numeric value is entered, the cursor moves as manytimes as the entered numeric value.

3) Execution : Press the [exec] key.Cancellation: Press the [cancel] key.Deletion except: Press the [exclud] key. Exclude nets

except specified nets in 2).

4) When the nets to be deleted are known beforehand, movethe cursor to the first net to delete, enter the number of nets to delete, then press the [Delnet] key. With thisoperation, steps 1) and 2) can be omitted.

(g) Searching in a sequence programA sequence program can be searched using the following softkeys:


[Search] ↓

1 top 2 bottom 3 srch 4 w–srch 5 n–srch 6 s–crch 7 c–down 8 c–up 9 10




134

(i) [top]When this key is pressed, the start of the sequence programis displayed on the screen and the cursor is moved to the startof the program.

(ii) [bottom]When this key is pressed, the end of the sequence program isdisplayed on the screen and the cursor is moved to the end of

the program.(iii)[srch]

Search operation using this key searches the program for aspecified address from the current location for the cursor onthe screen to the end of the program. When an address isfound, it is displayed on the screen. An address to search forcan be specified in one of two ways.

1) Address specification using the cursorMove the cursor to the relay contact of the address tosearch for, then press the [srch] key. This operationsearches the program for the specified address from thecurrent location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.

If the specified address is found, the section of theprogram containg the address is displayed on the screen.The cursor is automatically positioned at the foundaddress.If the search operation fails to find the specified address,the cursor does not move.

To terminate searching, press the Esc key.

When the same addressas this address is to be

searched for, move the

cursor to this position,

then press the [srch] key.

D35.3

X14. 0

F54.1

X0. 4

X0. 5

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ

G17.2 X4.2

X2.0 F54.1 Y52.3 G11.6

Y49.1

D32.0

G43.1

D21.2

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

When the same address

is found, the cursor

moves to this location.

2) Address specification by address input

Enter the address to find with the keyboard, then pressthe [srch] key.This operation searches the program for the specifiedaddress from the current location of the cursor on thescreen to the end of the program.When the specified address is found, the section of theprogram containing the address is displayed on thescreen. The cursor is automatically positioned at thefound address.If the search operation fails to find the specified address,an error indication appears.




135

(iv) [w-srch] (WRT coil search)This key is used to search the program for a relay coil witha specified address from the current location of the cursor onthe screen to the end of the program. When a relay coil isfound, it is displayed on the screen. If multiple relay coils arefound, the coil which is the closest to the cursor is displayed.The address of a relay coil to search for can be specified inone of two ways.

1) Address specification using the cursorMove the cursor to the relay coil with the address tosearch for, then press the [w-srch] key.This operation searches the program for relay coils withthe specified address from the current location of thecursor on the screen to the end of the program.When a relay coil with the specified address is found, thesection of the program containing it is displayed on thescreen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil.If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with thespecified address, an error indication appears.

2) Address specification by address inputEnter the address of relay coils to search for with the

keyboard, then press the [w-srch] key.This operation searches the program for relay coils withthe specified address from the current location of thecursor on the screen to the end of the program.When a relay coil with the specified address is found, thesection of the program containing it is displayed on thescreen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil.If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with thespecified address, an error indication appears.

(v) [n-srch] (net-number search)This key displays those ladders that have a specified netnumber, starting from the top of the screen. If the [n-srch] keyis pressed without entering a number, the display is advanced

by one net.(vi) [s-srch] (function-instruction search)

This key searches for function instructions. Searching isperformed by entering a function instruction name ornumber, then pressing the [s-srch] key. If the [s-srch] key ispressed while the cursor is on a function instruction, functioninstructions with the same number as that functioninstruction are searched for.

(vii) Search operation using the cursor keys ( , )

Enter an address or symbol, then press a cursor key. Theaddress is searched for.

Enter a NET No., then press a cursor key. The NET No. issearched for.

Enter a function instruction name, or enter S followed bya function instruction number, then press a cursor key. Thefunction instruction is searched for.Example: Enter S1, then press a cursor key. The function

instruction END1 is searched for,

(viii) Searching in all main/sub-programs(G-SRCH)Global searching in all main/sub-programs is enabled.




136

The range of searchAll programs, which include a currently displayedsubprogram, are searched for.The subprogram is searched for in the ascending order of P address.

a) From the current cursor position to bottom of currentlyopening subprogram.

b) From next numbered subprogram to last numbered one.

c) From LEVEL1 to subprogram of which P address issmall next to a).

d) From top to cursor position in subprogram of a).

G-SRCH mode continues unless pushing the Esc key

or the [cancel] key.

one of

subprograms

(Searching in the order of 1) to 8))

Whole

program← cursor← displaying on

the screen

1st net of LEVEL15)

Final net of the maximum numbered

subprogram

6)

7)

8)

2)

3)

4)

1)

Searching resultWhen the object of search is found, the cursor will moveto the position.In case of finding in another program, the program whichis currently displayed will be closed.Then, the program which contains the object, will beopened to display the object position with the cursor.At this time, whether to save or quit modifications isinquired, in case there are modifications in the program tobe closed.

When two or more objects exist, the result of search are

displayed in order of 1) one by one. Operation

The global search is operated with the following functionkey.

1)


[comand] ↓




137

2) [comand]

1 insnet 2 Deinet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10

3) Select the [G-srch] with pushing the [SHIFT] (the followingwill be displayed) in state of 2)

1 2 3 4 5 G–srch 6 7 8 9 10 List

[G–srch] ↓

4)

1 2 3 srch 4 w–srch 5 6 s–srch 7 8 9 cancel 10

(Shortcut command is “ G + [COMMAND]”)

a) Starting of “G-SRCH” modeIt switches to the mode of ”G-SRCH” by the operationof 1) → 3).After that, all programs are searched unless quitting

“G-SRCH” mode.b) Execution of search

Refer to “(c) [search]”/“(d) [w-srch]”/“(e) [s-srch]” in“(7)Searching in a sequence program”, for how tospecify the target of global search.

c) End of “G-SRCH” mode

”G-SRCH” mode is ended by pushing Esc or [cancel]

key. The end method is different individually.

- =EscOnly “G-SRCH” mode is ended. Theprogram on the opening now is the stateas it is.

- [cancel]= It returns to the program which wasopened at beginning the “G-SRCH”mode. The program on the opening nowcloses.Whether will save or quit modificationsis inquired, in case there aremodifications in the program which iscurrently displayed.

(h) Copying sections of a sequence programA multiple-net sequence program can be copied net by net.Specify the net to be copied. The net can be copied in the samefile that is being edited or into another file. The selected net

remains as it was.




138

[Copy]

Range to be

copied[until]

[to– fil]

File which is being edited

Ž Ž Ž Ž Ž Ž

Ž Ž Ž Ž Ž Ž

Ž Ž Ž Ž Ž Ž

Ž Ž Ž Ž Ž Ž

Ž Ž Ž Ž Ž Ž

Ž Ž Ž Ž Ž Ž

Ž Ž Ž Ž Ž

Ž Ž Ž Ž Ž

Ž Ž Ž Ž Ž

Specified file

Fig.3.5.2.2 (b)

1 insnet 2 Deinet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10

[Copy] ↓


1 to 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 to–fil 7 to–org 8 9 10

[Operation]

1) Copying a netPlace the cursor on the net to be copied and press the [Copy]

key. The selected net is displayed in yellow.2) Copying two or more nets

To select the nets to be copied, first move the cursor to thefirst net of the range to be copied, then move the cursor to thenet at the other end of the range to be copied by pressing thecursor up, cursor down, [c–up], [c–down], or [search] key.The selected nets are displayed in yellow.Alternatively, enter a numeric value and press the [c–up] or[c–down] key. The cursor moves according to the specifiedvalue.

3) Setting the net or nets to be copiedPress the [until] key.

4) Specifying the copy destination using the [to] key (Copying

the net or nets in the same file)Move the cursor to the copy destination in the same file andpress the [to] key. The selected net or nets are copiedimmediately above the copy destination specified by thecursor. To copy the selected net or nets two or more times,enter the number of times they are to be copied beforepressing the [to] key.

5) Specifying the copy destination using the [to–fil] key(Copying the net or nets into another file)

1) Press the [to–fil] key. The following message isdisplayed.




139

If no program is specified, LATMP is created.

(LATMP file: Temporary work file used in editing)

2) Enter the name of the file into which the net(s) is to be

copied and press the Enter key.

3) Select desired processing from the following POP–UP

menu:

F1 Exec

F2 Cancel

4) If the selected destination file is present, the followingPOP–UP menu is displayed. Select desired processingfrom the menu.

The file already exists.

F1 Update

F2 Quit

F3 Append

Updates the selected file. The new copy

replaces the previous data of the file.

Cancels output to the selected file.

Appends the copy to the selected file.

6) If the nets to be copied are known beforehand, place thecursor on the first net to be copied, enter the number of netsto be copied, then press the [Copy] key. Steps 1), 2), and 3)can be skipped.

NoteIncorrect nets cannot be copied.

(i) Moving sections of a sequence program

A multiple–net sequence program can be moved net by net.Specify the net or nets to be copied. The selected net or nets canbe moved to another place in the same file that is being edited oroutput to another file. The selected net or nets are deleted.The only difference between copying and moving is that theselected net or nets are deleted in moving.


[Move] ↓


↓


[Operation]

Substituting [Move] for [Copy], follow steps 1) to 6) forcopying.

NoteIncorrect nets cannot be moved.




140

(j) Combining a sequence program

A source program can be combined to another source programthat is being edited.The source program to be combined can be displayed and editedseparately, then combined to the original source program that isbeing edited.

Section to be

edited

File being

edited

(original file)

File to be

combined

(view file)

Edited file

to be

combined

[TO]

CombineSource

fileFile to be

combined Input

[TO]

Combine

[VIEW]

Original screen View screen

Ž Ž Ž Ž

Ž Ž Ž Ž

Edit

Fig.3.5.2.2 (C) Combining a Sequence Program

Programs of model which is different from the specified modelcan be specified to the files of connection [TO] or enter [VIEW].(If a disagreement is found, a warning message is displayed.)In this case, no errors will be detected even if the file to becombined contains an address range or function instructionformat that does not agree with the specified model. (The errorwill be detected in compilation.) When ignoring the warningmessage, be extremely careful to continue the operation.

i) Function keys


1 2 3 4 5 function 6 7 8 9 10 comand

EDIT (LADDER) View RC4 <0>[C:¥FLADOER¥]

[C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE¥P1.#LA]PMC–RC4 NET 00001–00003 STEP 00010/32000 EMS

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

SUB71

SPP0001

P0001

Ÿ Ÿ

Y000.0X000.0

AD=X0.0 CCO=TEST DATA NO.1

CO=SAMPLE 00001 RC0=RELAY SAMPLE

000014/000014

000012

ORIGINAL=Initial display at opening the fileVIEW=Display opened by [File] command

Model of PMC edited in VIEW screen

Fig.3.5.2.2 (d) Screen Displayed when a File is Opened by the [File]Command




141

ii) Operation flowchart for combining a sequence program

Start ladder diagram

editing (original screen)

Specify an insertion point (The data is

inserted immediately above the cursor.)

1. Check the displayed

data of the file to be

combined

2. Edit the data of the file

to be combined and

combine it

Edit the Ladder program

on the view screen

(Normal editing)

Shows the ladder diagram

of the file to be combined

(View screen)

Press the [File] key

Specify a view file

Returns to the

ladder diagram

screen (The view

screen is continued.)

Saves the data in

a provisional

work file

Saves the Ladder

program shown on the

view screen

Cancels the

edited data

(Quit) (Temp) (Edit)*1

Press the key to terminate editing

<POP –UP menu>

(Save)

(View)

Cancels file input

(Cancel)

Combines the file with the

Ladder program on the

original screen

(To)

1. The file is

immediately

combined. The data

of the file is not

displayed.

*1: The name of the temporary work file is LATMP.

<POP–UP menu>

Esc

Fig.3.5.2.2 (e) Operation Flowchart for Combining a Sequence Program




142

iii) Examples

Example 1. Combining a sequence program file

[Operation]

1) Place the cursor on the insertion point on the originalscreen.

2) Select [File].

3) Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the

Enter key.

4) From the following menu, select F1 (To).

F1 To

F2 View

F3 Cancel

5) The file is inserted immediately above the net specifiedin step 1). (Original screen)

Example 2. Combining a modified sequence program

[Operation]


2) Select [File].

3) Enter the name of the file to be combining and press the

Enter key.

4) From the following menu, select F2 (View).

F1 To

F2 View

F3 Cancel

5) Edit the Ladder program on the view screen. To

terminate editing, press the Esc key. (Ladder editing

can be performed and terminated in the conventionalway.)

6) From the following menu, select F1 (Save).

F1 To

F2 View

F3 Rename & Save

F4 Edit

F5 Create Latemp file

7) Return to the screen of step 4) and check the name of the

file output in step 6). Then, select F1 (To).8) The file is inserted immediately above the net specifiedin step 1). (Original screen)

Example 3. Combining a specified section of a sequenceprogram

[Operation]


2) Select [File].




143

3) Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the

Enter key.

4) From the pop–up menu, select F2 (View).

5) Select [Copy] or [Move] on the view screen and specifya desired range with [until].

6) From the following function menu, select [to–org].

(Specify insertion into the original screen.)


7) From the following menu, select F1 (Exec).

F1 Exec

F2 Cancel

8) The data is inserted immediately above the net specifiedin step 1). (Original screen)

(k) Editing a symbol and comment from the ladder diagram editingscreen

On the ladder diagram editing screen, a symbol and commentadded at the specified address can be edited.


[syEdit] ↓


[Operation]

1) Specifying an addressTo edit a symbol and comment in a ladder diagram, place thecursor on the corresponding address and press the [syEdit]key.

2) Editing the symbol and commentThe cursor moves to the symbol editing section in the bottom

right part of the screen. Edit the symbol and press the Enter

key. The cursor moves to the comment field.

3) Terminating editing

[exec] key : Terminates editing after modifying the data.[cancel] key : Terminates editing without modifying the

data.

(l) Abbreviated input with the [comand] key

Each function key can be directly selected with the [comand] key.Enter one of the character strings below, then press the [comand]function key. Those portions that are enclosed in brackets can beomitted.

I (nsert) D(elnet) (sy)E (dit)

S (earch) C (opy)

M (ove) F (ile)

The function keys in the menu above can be used for programcreation and search operations.




144

NoteThe keys [ or ] and [ or ] are used to createor delete a vertical line extending upward to the left or rightof the cursor in a ladder diagram. The solid vertical line isfor creation and the dashed vertical line is for deletion. Themenu item applying to a function key depends on the ladder

diagram and cursor position.

(m) ZOOMSubprograms called by the currently selected program’s issuingof a CALL/CALLU instruction can easily be referenced andedited.

(i) Start up of zoom

1) Moved the cursor to the parameter of the CALL/CALLU

instruction and push the Enter key.

SUB65

CALL

P001Ÿ

R001.0 ACT

2) The program now on opening hides from the editingscreen. Then the subprogram which is specified by theparameter in mentioning above appears on the screen.

(ii) Start up under editingWhen ZOOM is attempted while editing the program, thepreservation of modifications will be inquired. Select either.

Close the current program.

F1 Save & zoom

F2 Cancel

(iii)End of ZOOM

When the end operation with the Esc key is attempted in the

program editing screen by ZOOM, it will return to the statewhen ZOOM is started. Moreover, it is possible to return tothe program configuration screen all at once.

End menu of editing screen (pop-up screen)

F1 Save(update) & quit

F2 Quit

F3 Rename,save & quit

F4 Edit

F5 Main




145

1) F1:Save(update) & quitIt returns to the program screen where ZOOM wasstarted, after the content of current program screen ispreserved.

2) F2:QuitIt returns to the program screen where ZOOM wasstarted, after the content of current program screen iscancelled.

3) F3:Rename, save & quitIt returns to the program screen where ZOOM wasstarted, after the content of current program screen ispreserved into specified subprogram name.

(n) List of subprograms in useThe list of subprograms called from currently displayed programis displayed.

(i) OperationThe command ”List” is operated with the following functionkey.

1)


[comand] ↓

2) [comand]


3) Select the [List] with pushing the [SHIFT] (the followingwill be displayed) in state of 2)

(Shortcut command is “ + [COMMAND]”)

1 2 3 4 5 G–srch 6 7 8 9 10 List

L

(o) To edit Net commentIt is able to write the comments between ladder nets. Thesecomments are called “Net comment”, and each of them occupiestwo steps in sequence program.

(i) To enter Net comment

1) Move the cursor to the position you want to write a netcomment.

And then press “ Shift +[netcmt]”.

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ

R100.1.0 R1000.2

R120.3

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

R100.1.0 R1000.2

Y2000.4

Y23.4

2) Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, and thearea for comment enclosed by ‘(*’ and ‘*)’ is inserted.




146

Then the cursor changes into character-size cursor, andtype comment sentence onto the area.The area for Net comment expands and shrinks by twolines (four lines at four lines display mode) automaticallyaccording to the comment sentences. Every Netcomment can expands up to a hundred lines.

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

R100.1.0 R1000.2

R120.3

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

R100.1.0 R1000.2

Y2000.4

Y23.4

Ÿ

(* Net comment is written in here. *)

(* All characters you can enter are available. *)

character cursor

↓

Ÿ

(ii) To determine or cancel the editing Net comment

1) To determine the editing Net comment, press [ end ] or

Esc

. Then the editing comment is fixed, and the Netcomment editing mode is finished.

2) To cancel the editing Net comment, press [cancel]. Thenew Net comment will be cancelled and erased.

NoteThe number of characters in a Net comment is limited to4095 bytes: counting one ASCII character as one byte, oneJapanese kana as one byte, one kanji character as twobytes.‘Line feed’ is also available on Net comment. Line feed ishelpful to save memory for Net comment.

(iii)To modify Net comment

1) Place the cursor on the Net comment which you want tomodify and press

“ Shift +[netcmt]” or Enter . The Net comment editing

mode becomes active, and the Net comment will beready to modify its contents.

2) At Net comment editing mode, to insert a blank line intoNet comment, press [inslin].



[inslin] will shift lines at the cursor and after down by oneline, and make a blank line at the cursor position.


(* *)


(* *)




147

3) At Net comment editing mode, to delete by line, press[dellin].


(* Net comment will expand or shrink automatically. *)


(* *)

[dellin] will delete whole one line at the cursor and shiftlines after the cursor up by one line.



4) To exit from Net comment editing mode, press [ end ]

or Esc .

5) To cancel the modifications you have just made, press[cancel]. [cancel] will abandon the modifications and theNet comment will be restored as it was before themodifications.

(iv) To delete Net commentThere are two ways to delete Net comment.

1) Use [Delnet] as same as deleting normal ladder nets.”[command] → [Delnet] → specify area to delete →[exec]”

2) Entering Net comment editing mode by

” Shift +[netcmt]” or Enter with the cursor on the Net

comment which you want to delete, and then press[delete].

(v) Lost Net commentA Net comment consists of the information of position insequence program which is called “Net comment pointer”,and ”Net comment string data” which is comment sentencesthemselves. These two elements are usually combined oneto one to make a Net comment, but the partner might be lostby illegal file operations or something, such as copying theladder file “*.#LA” or modifying the Net comment data file“NETCMT.000” by user. When a Net comment pointer losesits Net comment string data, the Net comment is called “LostNet comment”.Lost Net comment is displayed as blank Net commentenclosed by “(*” and “*)” which is displayed in purple ordimly on monochrome display. Lost Net comment can be

normalized by editing operation. Lost Net comment can beedited as a normal Net comment, such as deletion, copyingand so on.

(p) To edit New pageIt is able to specify the position to feed page at printing ladderdiagram. This specification of the position is called “New page”,and each of them occupies two steps in sequence program.




148

(i) To enter New page

1) Move the cursor to the position you want to feed page.

And then press “ Shift +[ page ]”.

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

R100.1.0 R1000.2

R120.3

Ÿ Ÿ

R100.1.0 R1000.2

Y2000.4

Y23.4

Ÿ

2) Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, and themark of New page is inserted.

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ

R100.1.0 R1000.2

R120.3

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

R100.1.0 R1000.2

Y2000.4

Y23.4

Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

<New page>

Ÿ

Ÿ

(ii) Other operation to edit New pageNew page can be handled as same as other ordinary laddernets. The operations such as copying [ Copy ], moving [Move ], and deleting [Delnet] ladder nets are also effectiveon New page.

(q) Terminating editing of a sequence program

[Operation]1) Press the Esc key on the following editing screen.


2) The following editing end menu(pop-up menu) appears.

F1 Save(update) & quit

F2 Quit

F3 Rename,save & quit

F4 Edit

F5 Main

a) F1:Save(update) & quitAfter current content of the editing is preserved, theediting screen will be ended.

b) F2:QuitAfter current content of the editing is cancelled, theediting screen will be ended.




149

c) F3:Rename,save & quitAfter current content of the editing is preserved intospecified subprogram name, the editing screen will beended.

d) F4:Edit

The Esc key operation is canceled and it returns to the

editing screen of former.

e) F5:MainWith the operation “a)”,“b)” or “c)”, it returns to theprogram screen where ZOOM was started. But with thisoperation, it returns to a program configuration screen atall once from the nested state.

3) Either the above-mentioned is selected and it returns to theprogram configuration screen, the main menu or the programscreen where ZOOM was started.

4) When error net existsWhen the error net exists, “ ERROR NET NO.” is displayedand the end menu is not displayed. Cope this case by thefollowing.

a) After the error net is corrected or deleted and the state of the error is released, the end operation will be done.

b) When pressed Esc key in the state of 1) after “CAN” is

typed (meaning of CANCEL), the menu of 2) will bedisplayed.

- When Save is ordered, it will be preserved afterremoving the error net.

- When Quit is ordered, it will be able to return to thestate before editing by cancelling the content of theediting.

(3) Step sequence diagramPosition the cursor to a program marked with ], then press the

[ZOOM] or Enter key. The step sequence editing screen is displayed

as shown below:




150

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RC4(STEP SEQ) [A:¥FL¥DATA¥SFC01]


← L1

[ ]S1

Ÿ

]S2

Ÿ

Ÿ

S3

P2

P3

Ÿ

Ÿ

S4

Ÿ Ÿ

S10

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S11

P10

P11

Ÿ Ÿ

S15

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S13

P13

P14

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S14

P15

Ÿ

S20

Ÿ

Ÿ

S21

P20

P21

Ÿ

S24

Ÿ

Ÿ

S23

P22

L2Ÿ

Ÿ

←

P23

L2

Ÿ Ÿ

S30

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S31

P30

P31

L4Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

←

Ÿ Ÿ

S23

1–1

↓ (Note )

1–1 2–1 3–1

1–2 3–22–2

NoteThe current position of the cursor on the screen is indicated.The entire screen consists of 32 elements across the screenand 64 elements from top to bottom. The cursor ispositioned to any element on the screen.

On the step sequence screen, different soft keys are displayed,depending on the position of the cursor.

When the cursor is on the step line, following softkey menu isdisplayed.

]S2 S10 S20 S30

← L4

1 2 [] 3 ] 4 5 →JMP 6 ←LBL 7 ⊥ 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

[ ] : Step subprogram [ ←LBL ] : Label for jump

[ [] ] : Initial step subprogram [ ⊥ ] : End of block step

[ ] ] : Block step subprogram [ FUNC ] : Various functions

[ | ] : Line for link [ CHK ] : Grammatical checking

[ →JMP ] : Jump to label [ ZOOM ] : Zooming into a subprogram

When the cursor is on the transition line, following softkey menu isdisplayed.




151

[ + ] : Transition[ ↓ — ] : Divergence of selective sequence

[ ↓= = ] : Divergence of simultaneous sequence

[ | ] : Line for link

[ ↑ — ] : Convergence of selective sequence

[ ↑= = ] : Convergence of simultaneous sequence

[ FUNC ] : Various functions

[ CHK ] : Grammatical checking

[ ZOOM ] : Zooming into a subprogram

P2 P20

← L2

P10 – P13 P30

1 2 ↓ — 3 ↓ = = 4 5 ↑ — 6 ↑ = = 7 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

(i) Entering a stepPosition the cursor to the desired input position, then press the[] key.Then, enter a step number and subprogram number.

Pressing the [

] key causes a step to be created, as shown below.A free step number is automatically assigned.

S1

STEP : S1

ACTION :

1–1


The specified subprogram number (P10 in this example) isdisplayed below S1.

S1

STEP : S1

ACTION : P10

1–1

P10

To change the step number, press the Enter key to position the

character cursor ” ” on STEP and use the BackSpace key to change

the number.




152

S1

STEP : S10

ACTION : P10

1–1

(ii) Entering a transitionPosition the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [+]key.Enter a subprogram number

Press the [+] key.

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

[ ]S1

ACTION :

1–2

1 2 ↓ — 3 ↓ = = 4 5 ↑ — 6 ↑ = = 7 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

P100

Enter a subprogram number.

Ÿ Ÿ

[ ]S1

ACTION : P100

1–2

P100

(iii)Divergence of selective sequencePosition the cursor to the desired input position and press the[↓ —] key.

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

[ ]S1

1 2 ↓ — 3 ↓ = = 4 5 ↑ — 6 ↑ = = 7 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

P

Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the[↓ —] key.




153

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

[ ]S1

(iv) Convergence of selective sequencePosition the cursor to the desired input position and press the[↑ —] key.

[ ]S1Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S2 Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S3

ACTION : P1002–4

1 2 ↓ — 3 ↓ = = 4 5 ↑ — 6 ↑ = = 7 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

(v) Divergence of simultaneous sequencePosition the cursor to the desired input position (transition line)

and press the [↓==] key.

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

[ ]S1

P100

= = = =

1–2

1 2 ↓ — 3 ↓ = = 4 5 ↑ — 6 ↑ = = 7 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

(vi) Convergence of simultaneous sequencePosition the cursor to the desired input position and press the[↑==] key.




154

[ ]S1Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S2 Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S3

2–4

= = = = = = = = =

= = = = = = = = =

1 2 ↓ — 3 ↓ = = 4 5 ↑ — 6 ↑ = = 7 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

(vii) Specifying a label for jump destinationPosition the cursor to the desired input position (step line), thenpress the [← LBL] key. Then, enter a label name.Press the [← LBL] key.

[ ]S1

LABEL : L10

1–1

P10

←

P100


Enter a label name.

[ ]S1

STEP : S1

ACTION : P10

1–1

← L10

P100

(viii)Specifying a label jump

Position the cursor to the desired input position (step line), thenpress the [→ JMP] key. Then, enter a label name.Press the [→ JMP] key.




155

[ ]S1Ÿ Ÿ

LABEL :2–3

← L10

P100

[ ]S2Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

P100

P100

→


Enter a label name.

[ ]S1Ÿ Ÿ

LABEL : L10 2–3

← L10

P100

[ ]S2Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

P100

P100

→ L10

(ix) Deleting an elementPosition the cursor to the element to be deleted, then press the

Delete key.

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

[ ]S1

P100

In the example shown above, two figures (elements) of a selectivebranch and transition are selected. Specify the element to bedeleted with the narrow cursor, displayed in reverse video. To

position the cursor displayed in reverse video, press the Delete key.

To restore the state shown above, press the Esc key.




156

[ ]S1

P100

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

If the Enter key is pressed in the state shown above, the selective

branch is deleted and the following screen is displayed:

[ ]S1

P100

Ÿ Ÿ

To specify another figure, press the Delete key again.

[ ]S1

P100

Ÿ Ÿ

(x) Inserting an element

Position the cursor to the desired insertion position, then press theInsert key. To create an empty row, press the Insert key.

To create an empty column, press the Shift and Insert keys.

[ ]S1Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

]S2

1–3

= = = = = = = = =

P2

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S3

P1

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S10

P10

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S11

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S20

P20

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S21

STEP : S2

ACTION : P200




157

Press the Insert key.

[ ]S1Ÿ Ÿ

1–3

= = = = = = = = = = = = =

Ÿ Ÿ

]S2

P1

Ÿ Ÿ

S10Ÿ Ÿ

S20

Press the Shift and Insert key.

[ ]S1Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ

Ÿ

]S2

1–3

= = = = = = = = = = = =

P2

Ÿ

S3

P1

Ÿ

Ÿ

S10

P10

Ÿ

S11

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S20

P20

Ÿ Ÿ

S21

STEP : S2

ACTION : P102

(xi) Search

]S2

= = = = = = = = = = =

P1

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

]S2

P1

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S10

P11

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S10

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S20

P21

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S20




158

If the [F8] (FUNC) key is pressed in the state shown above, apop-up menu is displayed as shown below:

= = = = = = = = = = =

Ÿ

]S3

P1

Ÿ

S11Ÿ

S21

F1 Search

F2 CopyF3 Move

F4 mAin

F5 List

Press the [F1] (Search) key. A pop-up menu is displayed, asshown below:

= = = = = = = = = = =

Ÿ Ÿ

]S3

P1

F1 Se

F2 Co

F3 Mo

F4 mA

F5 Li

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ






F1 Step

F2 Action

F3 Label

F4 sYmbol

F5 Position

F6 Top

F7 Bottom

Then, press the [F1] (Step) key. Another pop-up menu isdisplayed, as shown below:

= = = = = = = = = = =

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

]S3

P1

F1 Se

F2 Co

F3 Mo

F4 mA

F5 Li








F1 Step

F2 Ac

F3 La

F4 sY

F5 Position

F6 Top

F7 Bottom

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ



search string:¥A ¥a

Enter the step number to be searched for (S20, for example), then

press the Enter key. The system starts searching through the part

subsequent to the cursor.




159

= = = = = = = = = = =

Ÿ Ÿ

]S3

P1

F1 Se

F2 Co

F3 Mo

F4 mA

F5 Li







F1 Step

F2 Ac

F3 La

F4 sY

F5 Position

F6 Top

F7 Bottom



search string:S20

(xii) Copying or moving an elementPress the [F8] (FUNC) key.

]S2

= = = = = = = = = = =

P1

P1

Ÿ Ÿ

S10

P11

Ÿ Ÿ

S20

P21

When the [F8] (FUNC) key is pressed, a pop-up menu isdisplayed as shown below:

= = = = = = = = = = =

P1

F1 Search

F2 Copy

F3 Move

F4 mAin

F5 List

Press the [F2] (Copy) key. The system prompts the operator toenter a start point.

]S2

= = = = = = = = = = =

P1

P1

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S10

P11

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S20

P21

ACTION :

Specify Start position 1–2




160

Position the cursor to the desired start point (position 2-3 in the

example shown below), then press the Enter key. The system

prompts the operator to enter the end point.

Ÿ Ÿ

]S2

= = = = = = = = = = =

P1

P1

S10

P11

Ÿ Ÿ

S20

P21

ACTION :

Specify End position 2–3

Position the cursor to the desired end point (position 3-4 in the

example shown below), then press the Enter key. The system

prompts the operator to specify a copy destination.

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

]S2

= = = = = = = = = = =

P1

P1

S10

P11

S20

P21

ACTION :

Specify End position3–4

Position the cursor to the desired copy destination (position 4-3

in the example shown below), then press the Enter key. The

specified part is copied.

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

]S2

= = = = = = = = = = =

P1

P1

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S10

P11

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S20

P21 P11

Ÿ

Ÿ

P21

4–3

STEP : S10

ACRTION : P100

When a part is copied,– The S address is not copied. Assign a free number.– The P address is copied. If required, change the address.




161

(xiii) Returning from the ZOOM destination to the programconfiguration screen (MAIN).

To return to the program configuration screen, displayed whenediting was started, follow the procedure below. The systemassumes that the editing of the step sequence subprogram, fromwhich the [ZOOM] key was pressed, is suspended.The edited subprogram is not saved in the source program file.

Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.

]S2

= = = = = = = = = = =

P1

P1

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S10

P11

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S20

P21

After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key

= = = = = = = = = = =

P1

F1 Search

F2 Copy

F3 Move

F4 mAin

F5 List

After pressing the [F4] (MAIN) key

EDIT (LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) PMC–RC4(STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER ]


LEVEL LEVEL2 LEVEL3

P0001 P0002 P0004 P0005 P0006 P0007

P0008 P0009 P0014 P0015 P0016 P0017

]P0021 P0022 P0024 P0025 P0026 ]P0027

P0101 P0202 ]P0304 ]P0405 ]P0406 ]P0407

If the subprogram whose previous editing session was suspended(marked with ∆]) is selected again for editing, the followingmessage is displayed:

Editing this subprogram is not completed.

Continue to select it ? (Yes/No) [Y]

To continue the previous editing session, press the [Enter] key.Otherwise, enter N. (The result of the previous editing sessionis cancelled.)




162

(xiv) LIST

The list of subprograms referenced by the stepsequencesubprogram that is currently being edited is displayed.

Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.

]S2

= = = = = = = = = = =

P1

P1

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S10

P11

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S20

P21

After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key

= = = = = = = = = = =

P1

F1 Search

F2 Copy

F3 Move

F4 mAin

F5 List

After pressing the [F5] (LIST) key

EDIT (LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) PMC–RC4(STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER ]


]P200

P0008 P0009 P0014 P0015 P0016 P0017

P0021 P0022 P0024 P0025 P0026 ]P0027

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MAIN 9 CHANGE 10 ZOOM

Following keys are useful in this screen.

Function key[ MAIN ] : Displaying the subprogram configuration

screen[CHANGE] : Creating a new subprogram[ ZOOM ] : Modifying a subprogram

Other keysPageUp : Displaying previous screen

PageDown : Displaying next screen




163

Screen display

] P200

The subprogram which is being edited is displayed. If the[ZOOM] key is pressed to nest the program to a certain depth, the

subprogram numbers are arranged from the left in the order inwhich they are nested. The subprogram for which the [ZOOM]key was pressed first is displayed at the left end.

P0008 P0009 P0014 P0015 P0016 P0017

Subprograms referenced by the subprogram that is currentlybeing edited are listed with the following mark:

: Ladder subprogram

] : Step sequence subprogram

(xv) Checking the syntax

Press the [CHK] key.

]S2

= = = = = = = = = = =

P1

P1

Ÿ Ÿ

S10

P11

Ÿ Ÿ

S20

P21

If the step sequence is satisfactory, the following message isdisplayed:

]S2

= = = = = = = = = = =

P1

P1

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S10

P11

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S20

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ



Check completed

If the step sequence is invalid, the following message isdisplayed:

]S2

= = = = = = = = = = =

P1

P1

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S10

P11

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S20




Chart Sequence error




164

(xvi) Modifying a subprogram (ZOOM)

Press the [ZOOM] key.

]S2

= = = = = = = = = = =

P1

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

]S2

P1

Ÿ Ÿ

S10

P11

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S10

Ÿ Ÿ

S20

P21

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

S20

When the [ZOOM] key is pressed, the figure pointed by cursordecides the type of subprogram which is to be edited.

Figure Meaning of the figure Subprogram to be edited

Step sequence subprogram Ladder subprogram

[] Initial step sequence subprogram Ladder subprogram

] Block step sequence subprogram step sequence subprogram

+ Transition Ladder subprogram

(xvii) End of modifying

Press the ESC key.

= = = = = = = = = = =

P1

F1 Save (update) & quit

F2 QuitF3 Edit

F4 Rename, save & quit

F5 Optimize

Menus

Menu Editing Result of editing Display

Save End Updated Optimized

Quit End Discarded –

Edit Continue Continued Not optimized

Rename End Updated Optimized

Optimize Continue Optimized and continued Optimized




165

Moving the cursor

, , ,Moves the cursor to another field to be edited.

+ ,Shift

Moves the cursor to another position within the field

to be edited.

Entering a comment in JapaneseWhen a front-end processor for Japanese word input is used, a commentcan be entered in Japanese. When a comment containing kanacharacters or m-type alphanumeric characters is compiled (an object fileis created), all the kana characters and m-type alphanumeric charactersare replaced with spaces.

(1) Start

[Operation]

1) Select [SYMBOL] (symbol and comment) from the editingmenu.

2) The following symbol and comment editing screen appears:

EDIT (SYMBOL & COMMENT) RB4 (STEP SEQ) <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥ ]

1 2 SEARCH3 AREA 4 ADD 5 6 DELETE 7 8 COPY 9 PASTE 10 END

SYMBOL 000000/000001COIL_COMMENT 00000000/00000014

NO. ADDRESS SYMBOL RELAY COMMENT COIL COMMENT

000001 X00000.0SYMBOL–A RELAY COMMENT–A COIL COMMENT–A

Fig.3.5.2.3 Symbol and comment editing screen

(2) Entering a new symbol and commentA new symbol and comment can be added at an address to which nosymbol or comment is assigned.

[Operation]

1) Select [ADD] on the symbol and comment editing screen.

2) An input window opens on the screen.

[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

Address field Symbol field Relay comment field Coil comment field

3.5.2.3Symbol & CommentEditing




166

3) Enter an address in the address entry field.

4) The cursor is positioned to the symbol entry field.

5) Enter symbol data.

6) The cursor is positioned to the relay comment entry field.

7) Enter relay comment data.

8) The cursor is positioned to the coil comment entry field.

9) Enter coil comment data.

10)The entered data is stored, clearing the previous address, symboldata, and comment data from the window.

When no symbols and comments are entered, the system isautomatically set to receive new data.

(3) Editing a symbol and commentA symbol and comment assigned to an address can be edited.

[Operation]

1) If the system is set to receive new data, select [QUIT] to exit fromthat state.

2) Move the cursor by pressing the , , , or key

and edit the data.

To move the cursor within a field, while pressing the Shift key press

the or key.

(4) Moving a commentA comment assigned to an address can be moved to another address.

[Operation]

1) Place the cursor on the comment to be moved.

2) Select [DELETE].3) The following message appears on the screen.

Comment data copied to paste buffer

4) Place the cursor at the place the comment is to be moved.

5) Select [PASTE].

(5) Copying a commentA comment assigned to an address can be copied into another address.

[Operation]

1) Place the cursor on the comment to be copied.

2) Select [COPY].3) The following message appears on the screen.

Comment data copied to paste buffer

4) Place the cursor at the place the comment is to be copied.

5) Select [PASTE].

(6) Searching for a symbol or address




167

[Operation]

1) Select [SEARCH] on the symbol and comment editing screen.

2) The following input window appears on the screen.

SEARCH :

3) Enter the symbol or address to be searched for and the datanumber.

4) The system searches for the symbol or address and the datanumber in that order. The cursor is moved to the searched data.

(7) Deleting a symbol and/or comment

(a) Deleting both a symbol and a comment

[Operation]

1) Place the cursor on the NO field.

2) Select [DELETE]. Both the symbol and the comment aredeleted.

(b) Deleting either a symbol or a comment

[Operation]

1) Place the cursor on the SYMBOL or COMMENT field.2) Select [DELETE]. Only the selected symbol or comment is

deleted.

(c) Deleting two or more symbols and comments simultaneously

[Operation]

1) Place the cursor at the top of the range to be deleted.

2) Select [AREA]. The entire line is displayed in reverse video,and the following message appears on the screen.

Selecting the area ...

3) Move the cursor to the end of the range to be deleted.

4) Select [DELETE]. All the data displayed in reverse video isdeleted.

(8) Terminating the symbol and comment editing

[Operation]

1) On the edit screen, select [END] or press the Esc key.

2) The following message appears on the screen:

F1F2F3


3) Specify a desired option and return to the edit menu.




168

(9) Editing screen

SYMBOL 000001/000003 COIL_COMMENT 0000030/00000090

NO. ADDRESS SYMBOL RELAY COMMENT COIL COMMENT

00001 X00000.0 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA–AAAAAAAAA–AAAAAAAAA

00002 X00000.1 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBB–BBBBBBBBB–BBBBBBBBB

00003*X00000.2 CCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCC–CCCCCCCCC–CCCCCCCCC

‘*’ means a symbol data which can be displayed on CRT/MDI.

Symbol entry number

Output Number to object file / TotalCoil comment size (byte)

Output Number to object file / Total

EDIT ( SYMBOL & COMMENT ) PMC-RB4 <O>[A:¥FL¥DATA¥RB4 ]

(Note)Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

1 2 SERCH 3 AREA 4 ADD 5 6 DELETE 7 8 COPY 9 PASTE 10 END

NoteIt is the indicator. Symbol/comment are displayed withturning at this point in ladder diagram editing screen.

(10)Searching by a part of stringsSearch function is active for specifiedfield, LINE NO./ADDRESS/SYMBOL/RELAY or COILCOMMENT.Especially you can find relay/coil comment, which is too long, byspecifing a part of data strings.

1) Press [SEARCH] and the pop-up menu apears to specify stringsfor search.Furthermore, the display of function-key changes as theundermentioned.

1 NO. 2 ADRS 3 SYMBOL 4 RELAY 5 COIL 6 7 8 9 10

2) Input strings and specify the data kind for searching byfunction-key.A part of strings is available only in case of [RELAY]/[COIL].

3) If search is success, cursol moves to the found place.




169

An arbitrary message can be displayed on the screen, using the DISPBinstruction (SUB 41), which is one of the function instructions. Such amessage is created as described below.

(1) Types and quantity of characters that can be used The types of characters usable in message data vary from one CNC/PMC modelto another. Refer to the PMC programming Manual.

The half-size kana and alphanumeric characters can be entered usingthe kana and alphanumeric keys on the keyboard. Similarly tosymbols and comments, Japanese-language text can be edited usingthe Japanese-language input FEP (front-end processor). The numberof characters is limited as follows:

1) When only full-size Japanese-language characters are used: 62 characters

2) When only half-size kana characters are used: 127 characters

3) When only alphanumeric characters are used: 256 characters

(2) Edit procedure

The edit method that can be used varies between the CNC/PMCmodel in which Japanese language (excluding half-size characters)can be used and other models. This section describes the procedurecommon to all models (only alphanumeric characters are entered),using the PMC-RC4 as an example.

(a) Startup

[Operation]

1) Select [MESSAG] from the edit menu.

2) The following message data edit screen appears.

EDIT (MESSAGE) PMC–RC4 [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

1 2 TOP 3 BOTTOM 4 C–MODE 5 DISP 6 7 8 9 10 END

NO ADDRESS MESSAGE

001 A00. 0 1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

002 A00. 1

003 A00. 2

004 A00. 3

Fig.3.5.2.4 (a) Message Data Edit Screen

(b) Input

[Operation]

1) Place the cursor on the message address where message data isto be entered.

2) Key in the desired message data.

3.5.2.4Message Editing




170

(c) Modification

[Operation]

1) Place the cursor on the message address where message data isto be entered.

2) The character cursor moves on to the message and blinks there.

3) Place the cursor at the location where modification is required,using the cursor keys.

4) Key in the desired characters to modify the message data.


(d) Search [TOP] [BOTTOM]

[Operation]

1) On the message screen, select [TOP] or [BOTTOM].

2) The cursor moves to the start or end message address.

(e) END

[Operation]

1) On the edit screen, press [END] or Esc .


F1F2F3


3) Select one of the above items, and return to the edit menu.

The address of each module in the I/O unit is set and deleted as describedbelow.

(1) Startup

[Operation]1) Select [MODULE] (I/O module) from the edit menu.

2) The following I/O module edit screen appears.

EDIT (I/O MODULE) PMC–RC <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

1 SEACH 2 INPUT 3 HELP 4 5 6 DELETE 7 DELALL 8 9 10 END

ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME

X0000 0 0 01 ID16C Y0000

X0001 0 0 01 ID16C Y0001

X0002 Y0002

X0003 Y0003

X0004 Y0004

X0005 Y0005

X0006 Y0006

X0007 Y0007

X0008 Y0008

X0009 Y0009X0010 Y0010

X0011 Y0011

X0012 Y0012

X0013 Y0013

X0014 Y0014

X0015 Y0015

Fig. 3.5.2.5 (a) I/O Module Edit Screen

3.5.2.5I/O Module Editing




171

(2) Setting

[Operation]

1) Place the cursor on the start address when a module is to be set.

2) Key in the module address in the following format:

GROUP.BASE.SLOT.NAME

Notes1 The module name that can be specified may vary

depending on the model of the PMC or I/O unit. Selecting[HELP] can display the module names that can be displayedin the NAME field.

2 The I/O unit MODEL-B is allocated as follows:“GROUP” : Specify a group number in the configuration.“BASE” : Must be fixed at ‘0’.“SLOT” : Specify the unit number of the I/O Unit-B.

Alternatively, set to ’0’ if power ON/OFF

information ‘##’ is to be allocated.

(3) Deletion [DELETE] [DELALL] [DEL.CH]

(i) To delete one module:

[Operation]

1) Place the cursor at the address where the module is to bedeleted.

2) Select [DELETE].

(ii) To delete all modules:

[Operation]

1) Select [DELALL].

(iii)To delete the modules of one channel (for models in which morethan one channel can be set):

[Operation]

1) Select a channel for deletion.

2) Select [DEL.CH].

(4) Search [SEARCH]

[Operation]

1) Press [SEARCH] after an address is specified.

2) Place the cursor at the specified address.

(5) END [END][Operation]

1) On the edit screen, press [END] or Esc .


F1F2F3


3) Select one of the above items, and return to the edit menu.




172

(1) Start

[Operation]

1) Select [SYSPRM] (SYSTEM PARAMETER) from the editingmenu.

2) The system parameter editing screen appears.

The screen shown below is the system parameter editing screenfor PMC-RB. For each PMC model, see Item (4) below.

(2) Input

[Operation]

1) Select an input item (displayed in reverse video) with the

and keys.

2) Enter data.

For information about input items, see Item (4) below.

(3) Termination

[Operation]

1) Select [END] or press Esc on the editing screen.


F1F2F3


3) Select a function key from the above. The screen display returnsto the editing menu.

(4) System parameter editing screen and input items for PMC model

[Example of Editing screen]

EDIT (SYSTEM PARAMETER) RC4 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

1) COUNTER DATA TYPE : 0 (0:BINARY, 1:BCD)

2) LADDER EXEC : 100% (1–150%)

3) (UNUSED)

4) LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO : 50% (0–99%)

5) LANGUAGE ORIGIN : 000000H

6) OPERATOR PANEL : 0 (0:NO, 1:YES)

7) KEY ADDRESS :

8) LED ADDRESS :

9) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS :

10) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS :

PMC TYPE = RC4

Fig.3.5.2.6 (a)

Note

For other editing screens, see APPENDIX A FUNCTIONSSPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS

3.5.2.6System ParameterEditing




173

[Input item]

1) COUNTER DATA TYPEThis parameter specifies whether the format of a counter valueused with the CTR function instruction is to be binary or BCD.

Initial value 0 : BINARY Setting 0 : BINARY / 1 : BCD

2) LADDER EXEC (ladder execution time)This parameter specifies an incremental processing time for thefirst and second ladder levels. This setting reduces ladder scantime, thus achieving high-speed ladder execution.

Initial value 100 Setting range 1 to 150

The table below indicates ladder execution time status during anexecution period of 8 ms.

Setting First and second level processing time

100%150%

5ms7.5ms

Notehowever, that increased ladder execution time on the firstand second levels reduces the following processing times: PMC screen display time Language program processing time Ladder processing time on the third level

3) LANGUAGE EXEC RATIOAs the language program and PMC screen display have the samepriority, this parameter specifies the percentage of the followingprocessing times:

PMC screen display time Language program processing time

Processing time of third-level Ladder program

While the PMC screen is displayed, a language program can beexecuted cyclically.

Initial value 50 Setting range 0 to 99

4) LANGUAGE ORIGINThis parameter specifies the start address of the link controlstatement data of a language program.

Initial value 000000 Setting range Address in thelanguage program storage area

When there is no language program, specify 000000H.

5) OPERATOR PANEL (connecting an F0 machine operator’spanel)This parameter specifies whether a machine operator’s panel isused with the FS0. When YES is specified in this parameter,specify the DI/DO addresses where the operator’s panel isactually connected, an address for key images transferred fromthe operator’s panel, and an addresses for LED images transferredto the operator’s panel.




174

Initial value 0 : NO Setting 0 : NO / 1 : YES

(i) KEY DI ADDRESSSpecify the start address (PMC address) of the external DIwhere the operator’s panel is actually connected.

Setting range X0 to X127, X1000 to X1019

(ii) KEY DO ADDRESSSpecify the start address (PMC address) of the external DOwhere the operator’s panel is actually connected.

Setting range Y0 to Y127, Y1000 to Y1014

(iii)KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESSSpecify the start address (PMC address) of key imagesreferenced by user programs.Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.

(iv) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESSSpecify the start address (PMC address) of LED imagesreferenced by user programs.Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.

A sequence program can be printed out.

(1) Compatible printersThis software is usable with the printers listed below.

EPSON VP1000 (default setting)NEC PR201HFANUC PRINTER

NoteTo use a NEC PR201H and FANUC PRINTER, a programmodification is required. For details, see Section 3.5.3.6.

(2) General flow of operation for printout.

Offline menu

Specify output item

[PRINT]

Specify option

Setup menu

Start printing

[SETUP]

[PRINT]

F2

F2

F1

Fig.3.5.3.1 Operation Flow of Printout

3.5.3Printout

3.5.3.1Overview




175

Printing is performed according to the following procedure.

PRINT RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

1 PRINT 2 SETUP 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BREAK 10 END

C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

TITLE : [NO/YES]

SYSTEM PARAMETER : [NO/YES]

SYMBOL & COMMENT : [NO/YES]

: [OPTION]

LADDER DIAGRAM : [NO/YES]

: [OPTION]

STEP SEQUENCE DIAGRAM : [NO/YES]

: [OPTION]

I/O MODULE : [NO/YES]

MESSAGE : [NO/YES]

: [OPTION]

CROSS REFERENCE LIST : [NO/YES]

: [OPTION]

BIT ADDRESS MAP : [NO/YES]

: [OPTION]

Fig.3.5.3.2 Drawing Output Menu

[Operation]

1) Set the desired print format by pressing F2 [SETUP]. (SeeSection 3.5.3.4.)

2) Set the desired output items. (See Section 3.5.3.3.)

3) Start printing by pressing F1 [PRINT].

4) Press F9 [BREAK] to suspend printing.

5) Press F10 [END] or the Esc key to terminate the print menu

display.

Notes1 Perform steps 1) and 2) only when the settings must bechanged.

2 Some print formats that cannot be set in step 1) may be setby editing the setting file. For details, see Section 3.5.3.5.

3.5.3.2Starting and EndingPrinting




176

Items to be output to a drawing are specified as described below. Morethan one item can be specified at a time. Some set items may not bedisplayed, depending on the model of the PMC.

(1) Specifying output of each data item

Specify whether a data item is to be output, by pressing the key

or key after positioning the cursor with the key or

key on the drawing output menu screen.

(2) Option specificationWhen specifying a data item for which options are available, position

the cursor to the desired option, then press the Enter key. The option

specification screen will appear. To set the option, enter the desired

value, then press the Enter key.

(3) Detail of each data time

(a) Title printing

The data of the title is printed.(b) Parameter printing

The data of the system parameters is printed.

(c) Symbol printingThe symbol comment data is printed.

PRINT RB4 (STEP SEQ) <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

[ SYMBOL PRINT ]

START LINE NUMBER : 1

END LINE NUMBER : 0

APPOINT COMMENT : [RELAY/COIL/ALL]

F10 (ESC) : END

Fig. 3.5.3.3(a) Symbol Print Option Menu

i) Option (symbol printing)

· When printing symbol/comment data, specify an outputrange. When 0 is specified as the print end line number, alldata up to the last line is printed.

· Comment specification[RELAY] : Prints relay comment data.[COIL] : Prints coil comment data.[ALL] : Prints both relay comment data and coil

comment data.

(d) Ladder diagram printingA ladder diagram is printed.

3.5.3.3Output Item Setting




177


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

[ LADDER PRINT ]

PRINT UNIT : [ALL / MODULE]

MODULE NAME :

NET RANGE

START NET NUMBER : 1END NET NUMBER : 0

NEW PAGE

SUBPROGRAM : [NO/YES]

CROSS REFERENCE : [NO/YES]

RELAY INFORMATION : [SYMBOL/RELAY COMENT]

F10 (ESC) : END

Fig. 3.5.3.3(b) Ladder Print Option Menu

i) Option (ladder diagram printing)

· The output unit, net range, page break, and cross-referenceof a ladder diagram to be printed are specified.

· If a diagram is output as a list file, the unit of printout mustbe specified as a module.

· If “0” is set as the output end net when a range of nets isspecified, printing continues up to the last net.

· If a page break is specified, a page break is made in theladder diagram at every new file or subprogram.

· If a cross-reference is specified, the ladder diagram isaccompanied with a cross-reference. (Fig. 3.5.3.3 (h))

· Relay information[SYMBOL] : Prints symbol data.[RELAY COMMENT] : Prints relay comment data.

(e) Printing of step sequence figureStep sequence figure is printed

i) Option (Step sequence figure printing)


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

[ STEP SEQUENCE PRINT ]

PRINT UNIT : [ALL / MODULE]

MODULE NAME :

SUB–PROGRAM : [NO/YES]

F10 (ESC) : END

Fig.3.5.3.3 (c) Step Sequence Print Option Menu




178

· PRINT UNITSpecify whether a step sequence figure will be printed fora single subprogram or all subprograms. When printing afigure for a single subprogram, specify the subprogramname for MODULE NAME.

· SUB-PROGRAM NUMBERSpecify whether subprogram number Pxxx will be printedfor each step.

(f) I/O module printingThe I/O module data is printed.

(g) Message printingThe message data is printed.

PRINT RB4 (STEP SEQ) <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

[ MESSAGE PRINT ]

ADDRESS RANGE :

START ADDRESS :A000.0

END ADDRESS :A124.7

F10 (ESC) : END

Fig.3.5.3.3 (d) Message Print Option Menu

i) Option (message printing)

· The range of messages to be printed is specified.(h) Cross-reference list printing

A cross-reference list is printed.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

[ CROSS REFERENCE LIST PRINT ]

CHECK DUPLICATE WRITE : [NO/YES]

APPOINT ADDRESS : ALL

APPOINT COMMENT : [RELAY/COIL]

[ PRINT FORMAT ] STEP No./NET No.

X0.0

: S00001/N00001

Y0.0

: S00001/N00002

F1 : DISPLAY CROSS REFERENCE F10 (ESC) : END

( ) (/)

Fig.3.5.3.3 (e) Cross Reference List Print Option Menu




179

i) Option

· CHECK DUPLICATE WRITECheck multiple writing to a coil and multiple use of samenumber functional instruction (ex. timer, counter).

· APPOINT ADDRESSSpecify the range of printing address. It can be specifiedas below.

3.5.3.3 Cross-Reference List Address Specification

Address specificationmode

Example ofkeying in

Address to be output

ALL ALL All addresses

Initial letter of an address Y All addresses having a specifiedinitial letter

Bit address R1.0 Specified bit addresses only

Byte address X10 Specified byte addresses(including bit addresses)

Address range F10.0-F12.7 All addresses in a specified range

X2.3-END(Note 1) All addresses after a specifiedaddress

Note1When an address specification is made, addresses areoutput in the sequence: X, Y, F, G, R, A, C, K, D, T, variableaddress, P. In this example, therefore, Y and all subsequentaddresses are output.

APPOINT COMMENTSpecify the kind of comment data

‘RELAY’ Print Relay comment.

‘COIL’ Print Coil comment.

(i) Bit address mapThe bit address map is printed.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

[ BIT ADDRESS MAP PRINT ]

PUTPUT ADDRESS : [ALL/USED]

APPOINT ADDRESS : [ALL]

F10 (ESC) : END

Fig.3.5.3.3 (f) Bit Address Map Print Option Menu




180

i) Option (Bit address map)

· Output address‘ALL’ All available addresses are printed.

(Including ‘Not used’ addresses.)

‘USED’ The addresses which are used in a sequenceprogram are printed.

· Address specifications

Specify the range of outputting addresses. For details, referFig. 3.5.3.3 in ‘(h) Cross Reference’.

[¥DATA¥SAMPLE¥P2]

N00586

A 3453

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

SUB71

SP

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

P2

N00587

B 3455

(* FORMAT–C ladder data

(* source name = rb4_step

(* SUB PROGRAM NO. 2

(*

*)

*)

*)

*)

N00588

C 3457

X0.0

Relay

X0.0

X01.0

Relay

X1.0

Y01.0

Relay

Y0.0

*** LADDER DIAGRAM *** PAGE1Net No.

### P2 ###

Coil comment Y0.0

00008 00032 00038 00291

00315 00321 00594 00618

00624 00764 00770

N00589

D 3480Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

SUB65

CALL

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

P4

X0.0 ACT

Relay

X0.0

N00590

E 3463 Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

SUB66

CALLUŸ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

P2000

N00591F 3485

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

SUB68

JMP8

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

L9999

X0.0 ACT

Relay

X0.0

N00592

G 3468

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

SUB69

LBL

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

L9999 ### L9999 ###

Fig.3.5.3.3 (g) Example of Printout of a Ladder Diagram with Cross Reference Data




181

[¥FLADDER¥SAMPLE]

*** Cross reference *** PAGE2

STEP No./NET No.

Address Symbol Comment

Y0.1 U11–O U11 ON

: S00055/N00024

Y0.2 U12–O U12 ON MULTIPLE COIL USED

: S00057/N00025 S00249/N00104

Y0.3

: S00041/N00017

CTR NO.1 MULTIPLE USED

S00247/N00104 S00268/N00107

CTR NO.2

S00261/N00106CTR NO3.

S00254/N00105

Fig.3.5.3.3 (h) Example of Printout with a Multiple Coil Write Check Indication




182

(1) Printout example by ”F2[SETUP]” (print menu)

Initial step

Transition

Label

Divergence of selectivesequence

Divergence ofsimultaneoussequence

Convergence ofsimultaneoussequence

Step

Convergence of selectivesequence

Block step

Jump

<graphical mode printout> <ASCII mode printout>

Initial step

Transition

Label

Divergence of selectivesequence

Divergence ofsimultaneoussequence

Convergence ofsimultaneoussequence

Step

Convergence of selectivesequence

Block step

Jump

[ ] S1

P1

P100

<-L1

S210

P101

P150 P160

S211 S215 S217

P151 P161 P165

P152 P162

S212 S216

P153 P163

P154 P164

] S1000

P2000

P102

> L1

:

I* S1

: P1

:

+ P100

:

<- L1

* S210

: P101

:

+ P150 + P160

: :

: : :

* S211 * S215 * S217

: P151 : P161 : P165

: :

+ P152 + P162: :

: :

* S212 * S216

: P153 : P163

: :

+ P154 + 164

:

:

B* S1000

: P2000

:

+ P102

::

-> L1

(2) Printout example by “SUB-PROGRAM NUMBER [NO/YES]”

[ ] S1

P1

P100

<-L1

S210

P101

P150 P155 P160

[ ] S1

P100 <-L1

S210

P150 P155 P160

<Not print sub program number> <Print sub program number>

Sub prograrm number

Fig.3.5.3.3(i) Example of Printout of Step Sequence Diagram (1/2)




183

(3) Printout example of more than one page.

Note) The maximun element count for printingwithout sub-program number is given inparentheses.

Size of one page

14 element

22 element

(28 element)

Link number

(1/3)

=>5

v1 v2 v3

(2/3)

=>4

v1 v2 v3

(3/3)

< > 5=>

4=>

<- Number of a sub program

Fig.3.5.3.3 (i) Example of Printout of Step Sequence Diagram (2/2)




184

Specify printer forms and a print format as described below.

PRINT (SETUP) RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

PAPER SIZE/LADDER PRINT:

10 INCH / ASCII

10 INCH / GRAPHIC

15 INCH / ASCII

15 INCH / GRAPHIC

Fig.3.5.3.4 SETUP Menu Screen

[Operation]

1) Select F2 [SETUP] from the output item selection screen.

2) The SETUP menu screen appears.

3) Position the cursor to a desired item (e.g., forms size/ladder

diagram print format) with the or key.

4) Select the item by pressing the Enter key.

5) Position the cursor to the desired item (e.g., 10 INCH/ASCII)

with the , , , or key, then make the selection

by pressing the Enter key.

6) If F10 [END] is selected after forms selection, the screen displayreturns to the output item selection screen.

(1) Forms size/ladder diagram print formatSpecify a forms size. In addition, specify whether to print the ladderdiagram in character format (ASCII) or graphic format (GRAPHIC).The currently specified output format is indicated by “”.

3.5.3.4Print Format-1: SETUPMenu




185

Each parameter file of this software can be rewritten using a commerciallyavailable text editor so that the output format shown in each of thefollowing frames can be changed.

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Diagram output

AMROFTRP. DAT

1. Change the paper selectionname

2. Set the top margin

3. Set the net spacing

4. Set the printer model andpaper

CROSSINF. DAT

(Setting the cross-referencelist output format)

8. Set the output format guid-ance information

9. Set the output information

10.Specify the output format

11.Set the read/write coil guid-ance information

12.Specify the linefeed

13.Specify the page break

5. Set the line spacing

6. Set the left margin

(Message file)

7. Set the title of printout

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

PR201-10 . INF

PR201-15 . INF

PR201-A4 . INF

PR10-A . INF

PR15-A . INF

PRA4-A . INF

ESC-P-10 . INF

ESC-P-15 . INF

ESCP10-A . INF

ESCP15-A . INF

FANUC-10 . INF

For these parameter files, do not change any item not described here.

(1) Changing the paper selection nameThis item makes it possible to change the name of each choice duringdiagram output format selection.

Name of file to beedited

Point of change Settings

AMROFTRP.DAT #10-A=10-inch/ASCII#10-G=10-inch/graphic#15-A=15-inch/ASCII#15-G=15-inch/graphic#A4L-A=A4 portrait/ASCII#A4L-G=A4 portrait/graphic

Arbitrary character stringconsisting of up to 30half-size (or 15 full-size)characters

Note#A4L-A=and #A4L-G=are unavailable in the output toVP1000.

3.5.3.5Print Format-2(AMOFTRP, DAT/*.INF/Message File)




186

(2) Setting the top marginThis item makes it possible to specify the top margin of a diagram.



AMROFTRP.DAT TOPMGL=0TOPMG=0(for each form)

Decimal number

(3) Setting the spacing between the LADDER netBy modifying this item, the spacing between the LADDER nets usedduring diagram printout can be changed in the manner shown below.

Y0.2

*00008Y0.700001

Y0.1Y0.0

*00006

Y0.700001

Y0.1

Y0.700001

Y0.0

*00006

N00003C

N00004D

N00005E

Y0.0

*00006

Y0.2

*00008Y0.700001

Y0.1Y0.0

*00006

Y0.7

00001

Y0.1

Y0.700001

Y0.0

*00006

N00003C

N00004

D

N00005E

Y0.0

*00006

When LCNTL=4 When LCNTL=5



AMROFTRP.DAT LCNTL=4(Set for each sheet)

Specify either 4 or 5




187

(4) Setting the printer model and print paperThis item can change the printer model and print paper that arespecified at paper selection.

Name of file tobe edited

Point ofchange

*.INF that can be set Printer name Print paper type/print mode

AMROFTRP.DAT

#10-A :

:C FILE=

PR10 A . INFPR201 10 . INF

ESCP10 A . INFESC P 10 . INFFANUC 10 . INF

PR201PR201

VP1000VP1000FANUC printer

10-inch continuous form/ASCII10-inch continuous form/graphic

10-inch continuous form/ASCII10-inch continuous form/graphic10-inch continuous form/ASCII

#10-G : :C FILE=

PR10 A . INFPR201 10 . INFESCP10 A . INFESC P 10 . INFFANUC 10 . INF

PR201PR201VP1000VP1000FANUC printer

10-inch continuous form/ASCII10-inch continuous form/graphic10-inch continuous form/ASCII10-inch continuous form/graphic10-inch continuous form/ASCII

#15-A : :C FILE=

PR15 A . INFPR201 15 . INFESCP15 A . INFESC P 15 . INF

PR201PR201VP1000VP1000

15-inch continuous form/ASCII15-inch continuous form/graphic15-inch continuous form/ASCII15-inch continuous form/graphic

#15-G : :C FILE=

PR15 A . INFPR201 15 . INFESCP15 A . INFESC P 15 . INF

PR201PR201VP1000VP1000

15-inch continuous form/ASCII15-inch continuous form/graphic15-inch continuous form/ASCII15-inch continuous form/graphic

#A4L-A : (Note) :C FILE=

PRA4 A . INFPR201 A4 . INF

PR201PR201

A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCIIA4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic

#A4L-G : (Note) :C FILE=

PRA4 A . INFPR201 A4 . INF

PR201PR201

A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCIIA4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic

Note

#A4L-A and #A4L-G are unavailable in the output toVP1000.

(5) Setting the line spacingThis item can specify the line spacing of a diagram. The file to beedited is the one specified according to the descriptions in Section1.4.4.



*.INF LPI (H) (1B) (C) (T20) ;

LDRLPI (H) (1B) (C)

(T15) ;

(H) (1B) (C) (T<decimalnumber>) ;(H) (1B) (C) (T<decimal

number>) ;

(6) Setting the left marginThis item can specify the left margin of a diagram. The file to beedited is the one specified according to the descriptions in (4).



*.INF LMARGIN (H) (1B) (C)(L000) ;

(H) (1B) (C) (L<decimalnumber>) ;




188

(7) Setting the title of printoutThis item can change the title of a diagram.

Name of file to be edited Point of change Settings

I-PRTOUT. JPN.I-PRTOUT. ENG.

@ SYS-TITLE

(*** SYSTEM & PARAMETER ***) ;@ CMT-TITLE(*** SYMBOL & COMMENT ***) ;

@ LAD-TITLE(*** LADDER DIAGRAM ***) ;@ STEP-TITLE(*** STEP SEQUENCE DIAGRAM ***) ;@ IO-TITLE(*** I/O MODULE DATA ***) ;@ MSG-TITLE(*** MESSAGE DATA ***) ;@ TIT-TITLE(*** TITLE DATA ***) ;@ CRS-TITLE(*** CROSS-REFERENCE ***) ;@ BIT-TITLE(*** BIT ADDRESS MAP ***) ;

(C) (<any character string consisting of up to60 half-size (or 30 full-size) characters>) ;

Notes

1 These point of changes are in the file, I_PRTOUT. ENG.2 One–byte katakana characters cannot be used.

(8) Setting the cross-reference list output format guidance informationThis item can specify characters to be output as guidance informationto be output during cross-reference listing. In the CROSSINF.DATfile, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid as guidanceinformation.

Name of file to be

edited


CROSSINF.DAT GUIDE= Any character string consistingof up to 19 bytes

(9) Setting the cross-reference list output informationThis item can specify step and/or net numbers to be output ascross-reference information. If both step and net numbers arespecified, which is to be printed first can also be specified. In theCROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning arevalid as cross-reference information.




189



CROSSINF.DAT NET-INF=STEP-INF=

When only the net number isoutput:NET-INT=1STEP-INF=0When only the step number isoutput:

NET-INT=0STEP-INF=1When the net and stepnumbers are output in thestated sequence:NET-INT=1STEP-INF=2When the step and netnumbers are output in thestated sequence:NET-INT=2STEP-INF=1

(10)Specifying the cross-reference list output format

This item enables a character string to be printed at the beginning of the step and net numbers. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with nosemicolon at the beginning are valid.



CROSSINF.DAT FORM= Character string+‘%s’

NoteOnly letters in lowercase are valid as ‘%s’.

(11)Setting the cross-reference list read/write coil guidance information

This item can set a comment about coil attributes. In theCROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning arevalid.



CROSSINF.DAT READ=WRITE=

Character string consisting ofup to 13 bytes.READ=-| |- -| / |- :WRITE=-( )- -( / )- :

(12)Specifying the cross-reference list linefeedThis item can insert a space line between addresses. In theCROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are

valid.Name of file to be

editedPoint of change Settings

CROSSINF.DAT NL= Decimal number




190

NoteIn this case, space lines as many as the specified value plus1 are inserted between addresses. (If 0 is specified as thelinefeed count, no space line is inserted betweenaddresses.)

(13)Specifying the cross-reference list page break This item can specify a page break between address types. In theCROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning arevalid.



CROSSINF.DAT FF= ‘0’=the page is not advanced‘1’=the page is advanced




191

Environment settings for diagram printout - example 1 (settings in fileAMROFTRP.DAT)

When ’3’ isselected asthe printoutpaper

#PAPER=10-G* #10-A=10 inch/ASCII

LENGTHL=11LENGTH=11WIDTHL=10

WIDTH=10PITCHL=15/120PITCH=20/120LINESL=83LINES=55RATIOL=2/3RATIO=2/3GRAMODL=14GRAMOD=16ANKMODL=0ANKMOD=1LEFTMGL=0LEFTWG=0

* TOPMGL=0* TOPMG=0* LCNTL=4* C FILE=PR10 A.INF

O FILE=PRTDAT.DMP#END

*#10-G=10 inch/graphicLENGTHL=11LENGTH=11WIDTHL=10WIDTH=10PITCHL=15/120PITCH=20/120LINESL=83LINES=55RATIOL=2/3RATIO=2/3GRAMODL=14GRAMOD=16ANKMODL=0ANKMOD=1LEFTMGL=0LEFTWG=0

* TOPMGL=0* TOPMG=0* LCNTL=4* C FILE=PR201 10.INF


* #15-A=15 inch/ASCIILENGTHL=11LENGTH=11WIDTHL=15WIDTH=15PITCHL=15/120PITCH=20/120LINESL=83LINES=55RATIOL=2/3RATIO=2/3GRAMODL=16GRAMOD=16ANKMODL=1ANKMOD=1LEFTMGL=0

LEFTWG=0* TOPMGL=0* TOPMG=0* LCNTL=4* C FILE=PR15 A.INF


* #15-G=15 inch


Changing the types of print-out paper


#PAPER=10-G#10-A=NEC 10LENGTHL=11LENGTH=11WIDTHL=10

WIDTH=10PITCHL=15/120PITCH=20/120LINESL=83LINES=55RATIOL=2/3RATIO=2/3GRAMODL=14GRAMOD=16ANKMODL=0ANKMOD=1LEFTMGL=0LEFTWG=0TOPMGL=5TOPMG=0LCNTL=4C FILE=PR10 A.INFO FILE=PRTDAT.DMP#END#10-G=EPSON 10LENGTHL=11LENGTH=11WIDTHL=10WIDTH=10PITCHL=15/120PITCH=20/120LINESL=83LINES=55RATIOL=2/3RATIO=2/3GRAMODL=14GRAMOD=16ANKMODL=0ANKMOD=1LEFTMGL=0LEFTWG=0TOPMGL=0TOPMG=0LCNTL=4

C FILE=ESCP10 A.INFO FILE=PRTDAT.DMP#END#15-A=15 inch/ASCIILENGTHL=11LENGTH=11WIDTHL=15WIDTH=15PITCHL=15/120PITCH=20/120LINESL=83LINES=55RATIOL=2/3RATIO=2/3GRAMODL=16GRAMOD=16ANKMODL=1ANKMOD=1LEFTMGL=0

LEFTWG=0TOPMGL=0TOPMG=0LCNTL=5C FILE=PR15 A.INFO FILE=PRTDAT.DMP#END

* #15-G=15 inch

(The name is changed from ’1:10inch/ASCII’ to ’1:NEC 10’.)

Changing the upper margin

(The net spacing for the LADDERdiagram is widened.)

(The upper margin is set to 5characters.)

Changing the types ofprintout paper

(The name is changed from’2:10inch/graphic’ to ’2:EPSON10’. )

Changing the type of printer

(The printer is changed toEPSON VP1000 and the paper ischanged to 10-inch forms.)

Changing the spacing betweenthe LADDER nets

Note

An asterisk (*) indicates data which can be modified.




192

Environment settings for diagram printout - example 2 (settings in filePR201 10.INF)

PR201H3 CNTINF {CRLF (H)(OD,OA);FORMF (H)(OC);CPI (H)(1B)(C)(H);CANCEL (H)(18);LDRCPI (H)(1B)(C)(Q);

* LPI (H)(1B)(C)(T20);

* LDRLPI (H)(1B)(C)(T15);

* LMARGIN (H)(1B)(C)(L000);RMARGIN (H)(1B)(C)(/078);LDRCHAR (H)(1B)(C)(J0014);JPNSET (H)(1B)(C)(K);JPNRESET (H)(1B)(C)(H);

}

: :

: :

: :

: :

: :

: :

PR201H3 CNTINF {CRLF (H)(OD,OA);FORMF (H)(OC);CANCEL (H)(18);CPI (H)(1B)(C)(H);LDRCPI (H)(1B)(C)(Q);LPI (H)(1B)(C)(T25);LDRLPI (H)(1B)(C)(T15);LMARGIN (H)(1B)(C)(L005);RMARGIN (H)(1B)(C)(/078);LDRCHAR (H)(1B)(C)(J0014);JPNSET (H)(1B)(C)(K);JPNRESET (H)(1B)(C)(H);}

: :

: :

: :

: :

: :

: :

Setting the spacing betweenlines

(Line spacing is set to 25.)

Setting the left margin

(Left margin is set to 5 charac-ters.)

NoteAn asterisk (*) indicates data which can be modified.




193

Environment settings for diagram output - example 3 (sample setting 1of the CROSSINF.DAT file)

Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT file

:

GUIDE=STEP No./NET No.

NET-INF=2STEP-INF=1

FROM=S%s/N%s

READ=-I I-!-I/I- :

WRITE=-()- -(/)- :

NL=1

FF=0

;

Sample cross reference output

[C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE]

*** Cross reference *** PAGE 1

STEP NO./NET No.


X0.0

X0.1

Y0.0

R0.0

MULTIPLE COIL USED

: S00045/N00009 S00049/N00012 S00053/N00013 S00082/N00017

S00088/N00020 S00094/N0002

: S00050/N00010 S00054/N00012 S00059/N00015 S00065/N00017

S00077/N00029

: S00045/N00009 S00128/N00062 S00256/N00098

: S00009/N00003 S00012/N00008 S00014/N00009 S00015/N00010

S00022/N00010 S00024/N00012 S00033/N00015 S00045/N00017

S00047/N00019 S00074/N00032 S00079/N00035

: S00002/N00001




194

Environment settings for diagram output - example 4 (sample setting 2of the CROSSINF.DAT file)

Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT file

:

GUIDE=step number

NET-INF=0STEP-INF=1

FROM=S%s

READ=read

WRITE=write

NL=0

FF=0

;

Sample cross reference output

[C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE] *** Cross reference *** PAGE 1

Step number


MULTIPLE COIL USED

X0.0

Read : S00045 S00049 S00053 S00082 S00088 S00094

X0.1

Read : S00050 S00054 S00059 S00065 S00077

Y0.0

Write: S00045 S00128 S00256

R0.0

Read : S00009 S00012 S00014 S00015 S00022 S00024 S00033 S00045

S00047 S00074 S00079Write: S00002

Upon the completion of installation, the default printer is set to EPSONVP1000.

(1) Changing the printer specification to NEC PR201To enable output to an NEC PR201 printer, change the setting file bymeans of the procedure described below. (In the following example,

the floppy disk drive is drive A, installed drive is under the C: \ FLADDER directory, and the file is changed from the DOS prompt.)

[Operation]

1) Copy the AMROFTRP.PR file from the APPENDIX directory of Volume 1.5 of system floppy disk to the install directory.

Example:C: \ CD FLADDER Enter

C: \ FLADDER>COPY A: \ APPENDIX \

AMROFTRP.PR C: Enter

3.5.3.6Changing the PrinterSpecification




195

2) Delete the AMROPTRP.DAT file from install directory.

Example:C: \ FLADDER>DEL AMROPTRP.DAT Enter

3) Change the name of the AMROFTRP.PR file toAMROPTRP.DAT.

Example:C: \ FLADDER>RENAME AMROFTRP.PR

AMROPTRP.DAT Enter

NoteTo reenable output to the EPSON VP1000 printer, performsteps 1) through 3), replacing AMROFTRP.PR withAMROFTRP.ESC.

(2) Changing the printer specification to a FANUC printerFor details, see Section 3.5.3.5 (4).

NoteFANUC PRINTER is connected to a serial port with

RS-232-C cable.Please set the communication mode from DOS promptbefore start by the following command.(Example) When connected to a serial port COM1.

C: />MODE COM1:4800,N,8,2 Enter

During compilation, an edited source program is translated into an objectfile executable by the PMC. Uncompiled programs cannot use onlinefunction and cannot be transferred to the RAM for the PMC. Compilation

can be performed in one of two modes: normal mode and condensedmode.

CompileTransferred to the

ROM writer

and PMCSource

programObject

file

Condensed mode

A source program can be compiled in condensed mode. When aladder with the same number of steps is compiled in condensed mode,

the size of the created object file is smaller than that created in normalmode. As a result, condensed mode has the advantages listed below.

3.5.4Compilation




196

1) A larger C language area can be allocated.

Ladder

Normal mode Condensed mode

Object file

Clanguage

Ladder

↑

Clanguage

2) Time required for compilation is reduced.

3) Time required for transfer from the personal computer to thePMC is reduced.

4) A ROM module with a smaller capacity may be used.

On the other hand, condensed mode has the restrictions describedbelow.

1) Memory map changes (area expansion) are likely to occur wheninstructions, symbols, comments, and so forth are added when aROM format file generated by compilation in condensed mode

is transferred to the PMC and edited with the built–in editingfunction. In this case, the user needs to pay attention to possibleoverlap between the ladder area and C language area.

Ladder

Overlap (A C language program

map change is required.)

ROM format fileLadder

C

language

C

language

2) A ROM format file generated by compilation in condensed modecannot be compared with a ROM format file generated bycompilation in normal mode.

Changing the order of subprograms

When a program is compiled, the source program, subdivided intosubprograms, is converted to a single ROM file. Within the ROMfile, subprograms are arranged in ascending order of subprogramnumbers.




197

(1) Start

[Operation]

1) Select [compil] (compile) from the offline menu.

2) The compile screen appears.

Source program name : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

Output to ROM format file

SYMBOL & COMMENT [F6]

YES NET COMMENT [F7] POINTERS ONLY

Compile PMC–RB4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER ¥ ]

1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 SYMBOL 7 NETCMT 8 CONDNS 9 DOS 10 END

Fig.3.5.4.1 (a) Compile Menu Screen

General Flow of Operation for compiling

[COMPIL]

[ EXEC ] [CONDNS]

Offline menu

Specify input program

Offline menu

F3

F8F1

Fig.3.5.4.1 (b) Compiling General Operation and Screens

(2) Compile

(a) Normal mode

[Operation] 1) Select F1 [EXEC].

2) Compile processing is performed in normalmode.

(b) Condense mode

[Operation] 1) Select F8 [CONDNS].

3.5.4.1Start and Terminate




198

2) Compile processing is performed in condensemode.

(3) Displaying the results of compile processingPressing F2 [MAP] after the completion of compile processingdisplays a memory map for the object file.The results of compile processing are displayed by pressing F3[ERROR] on the compile screen, regardless of whether an error orwarning has been output. Moreover, the results of compileprocessing are output to a text–format file, as described below.

C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

##### PASSI #####

MESSAGE

SYMBOL

LEVEL1.#LA

Ladder program exists beyond END1 instruction. (00111net)

LEVEL2.#LA

P1.#LA

P2.#LA

There is no SP instruction at the top of the subprogram.

##### PASS2 #####

Compile completed Error count =00002 Warning count =00000



Output the compile result in two passes.

Net No.

in each

subprogram.

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Fig.3.5.4.1 (c) Compile Result

PASS1: Convert to object

PASS2: Syntax check

If many errors have occurred, those errors can be easily identified byviewing the relevant file with the text editor or by printing out the file.The results of execution can also be displayed using a utility function.(See Section 3.5.9.)

Example: When the program shown below is compiled, thefollowing files are output to the C:¥DATA directory:Execution result file SAMPLE.ERRMap file SAMPLE.MAP


Compile Normal End

Compile completed error count=000000 warning count=000000

Compile PMC–RB4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER ¥ ]

1 EXEC 2 MAP 3 ERROR 4 5 6 SYMBOL 7 NETCMT 8 CONDNS 9 DOS 10 END

Fig.3.5.4.1 (d) Complile Completed Screen




199

(4) DOS command

You can call MS–DOS shell by pushing F9 [DOS] key.If you want to terminate this, key in the command as bellow atMS–DOS command line.

A : \ >EXIT

(5) Termination

[Operation]

1) Select [END] or press the Esc key.

2) The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

These options’ initial value can be changed at the Program option set–up.(Refer to 3.5.7 Program option set–up.)

(1) F6 [SYMBOL]

Select whether output or not output the symbol & comment data toROM format file.However,the symbols which can not be displayed on CRT/MDI(7bytes or more symbols) and the coil comments assigned to themnever output to object file.

“YES”: (Default setting)The symbols which can be displayed on CRT/MDI(6bytes or lesssymbols) and the coil comments assigned to them are output to objectfile.They can be displayed on CRT/MDI.

“NO” :No symbol/coil comment is converted to object file.Any symbol and coil comment is not displayed on CRT/MDI.

(2) F7 [NETCMT]If Net comment is used in ladder program, you can choose whether‘Net comment pointer’ (Note1) is output to object file or not.

“POINTERS ONLY” : (Default setting)To edit the ladder program by CNC on–line editor and decompile thedata select this setting.However, ladder size gets larger because ‘Net comment pointer’ isoutput to object file.

“NO” :Any ‘Net comment pointer” is not output to object file. In this case,ladder size in the object file is saved.However, decompile the object file makes its net comment datainformation lost.

3.5.4.2Compile Options




200

NoteNet comment has its own character information only in asource program on the personal computer.Compiled object file does not include any net commentcharacters.Only ‘Net comment pointer’( = information of net commentposition.) can be output to object file as an functionalinstruction “NOP”.This ‘Net comment pointer” helps to restore net commentdate at decompiling the object file that is edited on CNCon–line editor.

It enables a password to be added during compilation.

The password can be used to prohibit ladder programs from beingdisplayed or edited. This function requires to be set the program option.(Refer to 3.5.7 Setting program options.)

(1) Password typesThere are two password types.Each password consists of up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

Type Use

Password (R) Password to allow display on the CNC.

Password (R/W) Password to allow display and edit ing on the CNC.

(2) Password setting (compile)

1) When no password → Go to 10).

When password RW & R, RW or RAfter compilation [EXEC] or [CONDNS] is selected, you will be

prompted to specify whether to use a password.

Do you enter password? (Y/N)

To set a password, press Y

→ If password RW & R or R go to 2).→ If password RW go to 6).

If it is unnecessary to set a password, press N

→ Go to 10).

2) The password (R) set screen appears.

Enter password (R)

3) Enter a password.

A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or lessletters and/or numerals.

Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished fromeach other. (If a lowercase letter is entered, it is assumed tobe uppercase.)

3.5.4.3Password Set Function




201

It is impossible to use space, kana, kanji, and specialcharacters (such as *, #, and @).

Some character strings are unusable.If one such character string is entered as a password, an errormessage is displayed. In such a case, use another characterstring.

An entered password is not displayed on the screen.

If the Enter key is pressed before any valid password is

specified, use of a password is not specified.→ If password=RW&R go to 6).

If password=R go to 10).

When Esc is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is

discontinued.→ Go to 1).

4) The password configuration screen appears.

Verification (R)

5) You will be prompted to enter the same password as enteredbefore, to ensure that your password was entered correctly.

When the password entered this time matches one that wasentered before, it is accepted.

When they do not match, the message ”Password mismatch”is displayed.You are allowed to retry entering twice.

When Esc is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is

discontinued.→ Go to 1).

If password=R is specified.

→ Go to 10).6) The password (R/W) set screen appears.

Enter password (R/W)

7) Enter a password (R/W).

A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or lessletters and/or numerals.

Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished fromeach other. (If a lowercase letter is entered, it is assumed tobe uppercase.)

It is impossible to use space, kana, kanji, and specialcharacters (such as *, #, and @).

Some character strings are unusable.If one such character string is entered as a password, an errormessage is displayed. In such a case, use another characterstring.

An entered password is not displayed on the screen.

If the Enter key is pressed before any valid password is

specified, use of a password is not specified.→ Go to 10).




202

When Esc is pressed, the attempt to specify a password is

rejected.→ Go to 1).

8) The password confirmation screen appears.

Verification (R/W)

9) You will be prompted to enter the same password as enteredbefore, to ensure that your password was entered correctly.

When the password entered this time matches one that wasentered before, it is accepted.

When they do not match, the message ”Password mismatch”is displayed.You are allowed to retry entering twice.

When Esc is pressed, the attempt to specify a password is

rejected.→ Go to 1).

10)Compilation begins.

During decompilation, an object file is translated into a source programthat can be edited or printed out.

Data that is uploaded from the PMC or is read from ROM is object filedata. Data in the object file cannot be edited or printed out. Such datamust be decompiled before it can be edited or printed out.

DecompileObject file

Source

program

NoteTo decompile a password–protected object file, it isnecessary to enter a password. (See Section 3.5.4.)

3.5.5Decompilation




203

(1) Start

[Operation]

1) Select [DECOMP] (decompile) from the main menu.

2) The decompile screen appears.


Output to Source Program

SYMBOL & COMMENT

Merge [F4] YES

Duplicated symbol definition[F5] MEMORY CARD DATA (effective)

Decompile PMC–RB4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER ¥ ]

1 EXEC 2 3 4 MERGE 5 SYMBOL 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.5.1 (a) Decompile Menu Screen

(2) Decompiling

[Operation]

1) Select [EXEC] on the decompile screen.

2) Decompilation is performed and the result is displayed.

(3) Decompiling

Upon the completion of decompiling, pressing the F2 [MAP] key candisplay the memory map of the object file.

The result of decompiling can be displayed by pressing the F3[ERROR] key on the decompile screen, regardless of whether an erroror warning has occurred.

If many errors have occurred, the error file can be viewed or printedusing a text editor.

The result of decompiling can also be displayed using the utilityfunction (see Section 3.5.9).

(Example) When the program shown below is decompiled :Result file SAMPLE.ERR and map file SAMPLE.MAPare output to directory C: \ DATA.

3.5.5.1Operation




204


Decompile normal end

Decompile completed error count=000000 warning count=000000


1 EXEC 2 MAP 3 ERROR 4 MERGE 5 SYMBOL 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.5.1 (b) Decompile end Screen

(4) Termination

[Operation]

1) Select [END].


(1) Merge

In case the existent file is specified for output source program whendecompiling, the existent source program is deleted and new sourceprogram is created with the contents of object file.

In this case it is possible to merge the Ladder in object file with theSymbol/Commnet in source program by specifying theundermentioned function–key.


Output to source program

SYMBOL & COMMENT

Merge [F4] YES

Duplicated symbol definition[F5] MEMORY CARD DATA (effective)


1 EXEC 2 3 4 MERGE 5 SYMBOL 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.5.2 Decompile Menu Screen

3.5.5.2Decompile Option




205

(a) F4 [MERGE]This specification decides whether to merge the symbol/comment by“NO” or “YES”.

1) ”NO” :The existent source program is deleted and new source programis created with the contents of object file.There is no display of “F5[SYNBOL]” in this condition.

2) “YES” : (Default setting)The symbol/commnet in source program is merged with that inobject file. As for the other data except symbol/comment, objectfile is effective.Just after this specification, F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed tospecify which symbol definition is effective, either in sourceprogram or in object file, when they are in conflict.

(b) F5 [SYMBOL]F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed when ”YES” is specified forF4[MERGE].This specification decides which symbol definition in either sourceprogram or object file is effective when they are in conflict.

1) “SOURCE DATA”

The symbol definition in source program is effective.2) “MEMORY CARD DATA” : (Default setting)The symbol definition in object file is effective.




206

(c) The combination of F4[MERGE] and F5[DUPADR], and its result.

- Symbol/Comment data

ADDRESS SYMBOL(6byte) COIL-COMMENT(30byte)

X0.0 XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

R1.4 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

(i) The result of ”MERGE = NO”

- Symbol/Comment data

ADDRESS SYMBOL(16byte) RELAY-COMMENT(16byte) COIL-COMMENT(30byte)

X0.0 AAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

Y2.3 BBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

Y4.7 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY



(ii)The result of ”MERGE = YES” and ”Symbol definition = MEMORY CARD DATA”.




(iii)The result of ”MERGE = YES” and ”Symbol definition=SOURCE DATA”. program”.

X0.0 AAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA


Y4.7 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

Source program

Object file

Source program

Source program

Source program




207

To decompile a password-protected file, it is necessary to enter apassword.

Set password type Password type to be entered

Both password (R) and (R/W) Password (R/W)

Password (R/W) Password (R/W)

Password (R) Password (R)

1) After discompilation [EXEC] is selected, the following passwordentry screen appears.

Enter password (R)

NoteIf an R/W password has been set up, ”password (R/W)” isdisplayed.

2) When the valid password is entered, discompilation begins.If the newly entered password is incorrect, an error message isdisplayed, and processing discontinues.(You are allowed to retry entering twice.)

When Esc is pressed, the request to start discompilation is

rejected.

3.5.5.3Password




208

When the results of decompilation are output to a source program, theyare split into units of subprograms and output to different files. Fordetails, see Section 2.6.2.

The END instruction is not in the source program.

The instruction is automatically added when the

program is compiled.

Object file Source program

END1 (SUB 1)

END2 (SUB 2)

END3 (SUB 48)

SP (SUB 71)

SPE (SUB 72)

SP (SUB 71)

SPE (SUB 72)

SP (SUB 71)

SPE (SUB 72)

END (SUB 64)

P001

P002

P003

Ladder 1st level

LEVEL1.#LA

Ladder 2nd level

LEVEL2.#LA

Ladder 3rd level

LEVEL3.#LA

Subprogram P1

(Ladder)

P1.#LA

Subprogram P2

(Step Sequence)

P2.#SS

Subprogram P3

(Ladder)

P3.#LA

3.5.5.4Outputting to Split Files




209

There are three types of input/output operations, as described below.

(1) Transfer with the PMC RAM via an RS-232–C interface.

(2) Input/output between PMC RAM and a memory card or floppy disk (FD) via a Floppy Cassette Adapter or Handy File, respectively.

(3) Backup and restore source program and.

[Operation]1) Switch off the personal computer and input/output unit, and

connect them via an RS-232-C cable. (See Appendix H.)

2) Select [I/O] (input/output) from the main menu.

3) The input/output menu appears.

Ports are set according to the values in the following data files.

(1) FLIO_AT.DATThese files are in text format. So, a text editor can be used to changeset values in the files.

(2) Contents of the FLIO_AT.DAT(effective data section only)

3.5.6Input/Output

3.5.6.1I/O Port Setting




210

PMC-WRITER =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2

FA-WRITER =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2

PMC-L =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2

PMC-M =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2

PMC-M (TT) =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2

PMC-M (AXIS) =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2PMC-MMC =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2

PMC-MMC (AXIS) =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2

PMC-N =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-P =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2

PMC-QA =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-M (I/O) =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2

PMC-M (I/O, TT) =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2

PMC-M (I/O, AXIS) =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2

PMC-N (I/O) =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-RB =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-RC =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-RA1 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-RA2 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-RB2 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-RA3 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-RB3 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-RC3 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-PA1 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-PA3 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-QC =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-NB =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-RB4 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-RC4 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-RB4 (STEP-SEQ) =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

PMC-RC4 (STEP-SEQ) =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

DATA-BLOCK=IO-PORT-SET

Entity on the left-hand side of each equal sign (=) : Device

Entity on the right-hand side of each equal sign (=) : Represented inthe format of each MODE command. Only the first parameter (portnumber) and second parameter (baud rate) can be changed.




211

Data can be transferred serially via RS-232-C.

Download

Upload

Comparison

9600/4800bps

CNC

PMC (I/O) screen

PMC (I/O) screen

PMC (I/O) screen

9600/4800bps

9600/4800bps

Ladder Editing

Package

Baud rate setting

(1) Download[Operation]

1) Select F3 : [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

2) Select F1 : [DNLOAD] (download) on the PMC menu screen todisplay the source program name.

3) Press the System key of the CNC.

4) Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], [I/O], [HOST], and [EXEC] inthis order.


6) Downloading is executed. During operation, the indication“EXECUTING” blinks.

7) When downloading terminates normally, the indication“NORMAL END” is output.

(2) UploadLanguage data (C language) other than Ladder programs can be used.When uploading or comparison is executed from PMC, one of twodata types (LADDER or ALL) can be specified. LADDER and ALLhave the following meanings:

LADDER Sequence program only

ALL Sequence program and language data (C language)

Specify either data type in step 6) of the operation described below:[Operation]

1) Select F3 : [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

2) Select F2 : [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen to display thesource program name.



3.5.6.2Transfer to and fromPMC

*

*

*

*




212


6) Select either LADDER or ALL with cursor.

7) Uploading is executed. During operation, the indication“EXECUTING” blinks.

8) When uploading terminates normally, the indication“NORMAL END” is output.

(3) Comparison[Operation]

1) Select F3 :[PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

2) Select F3 :[COMPAR] (comparison) on the PMC menu screen todisplay the source program name.




6) Comparison is executed. .During operation, the indication“EXECUTING” blinks.

7) When comparison terminates normally, the indication“NORMAL END” is output.

(4) Termination

[Operation]

1) Select [END].


NoteIn the operations above, an asterisk prefixed to a circlednumber represents an operation on the CNC.

A object file compiled in a personal computer can be converted to amemory card format file, and output to a memory card via a memory cardinterface installed in the personal computer. The PMC program on thememory card can be sent to the RAM of the CNC by inserting the memorycard in the memory card interface in the CNC. By reversing theprocedure, programs can be transferred from the CNC RAM to thememory card.

(1) PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC

[Operation]1) Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.

2) F3 : Select [COMPILE] and compile a source program.

3) Return to the main menu, and select [I/O] (input/output) from it.

4) Select F5 : [M–CARD] (memory card) from the input/outputmenu.

3.5.6.3Memory Card Interface inthe Personal Computerand Memory Card

*

*




213

I/O PMC–RB3 [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

F1 KEY: FA WRITER

F2 KEY: PMC WRITER F3 KEY: PMC

F4 KEY: Handy File

F5 KEY: Memory Card

F6 KEY: BACKUPF9 KEY : ROM format file

F10 KEY : END

1 FAWRT 2 PMCWRT 3 PMC 4 FDCAS 5 M–CARD 6 BACKUP7 8 9 ROMFIL 10 END

Fig.3.5.6.3 (a) Input/Output Menu

5) Select [WRITE] (write (programmer → memory card)).

I/O (MEMORY CARD) PMC–RC3 [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

F1 KEY : WRITE (PROGRAMMER → Memory Card)

F2 KEY : READ (PROGRAMMER ← Memory Card)

F10KEY : END

1 WRITE 2 READ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.6.3 (b) Memory Card Input/Output Screen

6) Convert the file from source program to memory card format.Specify the following items for execution.

Name of the source programDisplay the source program name.

Name of the memory card fileSpecify the name of a memory card file (accessible via a

memory card interface in the CNC) to be created byconversion, and the drive where the memory card is inserted.




214

I/O (TO MCARD) PMC–RC3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

WRITE (Programmer → Memory card)


Memory Card FILE NAME : D:¥SAMPLE.#BF

(Specify the MEMORY CARD drive)

1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.6.3 (c) Input/Output (to MCARD) Screen

The following operations are performed on the CNC side.

7) The following two methods can be used to insert the memory cardoutput in step 6) into the memory card interface in the CNC andread programs on the memory card.

Using the I/O function of the PMCSpecify M–CARD, READ, and the desired filename or filenumber at DEVICE, FUNCTION, and FILE NO. on thePMC I/O screen, respectively, then press soft key [EXEC].Sequence programs are read from the memory card filecreated in step 5).

PMC I/O PROGRAM MONIT STOP

CHANNEL = 1DEVICE = M–CARDFUNCTION = READDATA KIND = LADDERFILE NO. =( #NAME )

EXEC CANCEL WRITE READ COMPAR

PMC I/O screen

Using the BOOT SYSTEM at power–on timeEach CNC can read the sequence program from the memorycard by using the BOOT SYSTEM at power–on time.Refer to manual of each CNC for the operation.




215

(2) PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer

PMC programs are written to a memory card, using a memory cardinterface in the CNC. When the memory card is inserted in a memorycard interface in the personal computer, the PMC programs on thememory card can be accessed as ordinary DOS files.

[Operation]

1) Specify M–CARD, WRITE, DATA KIND, and the desired

filename (omissible) at DEVICE, FUNCTION, LADDER, andFILE NO. on the PMC I/O screen, respectively, then press softkey [EXEC]. Sequence programs are output to the memory.

PMC I/O PROGRAM MONIT STOP

CHANNEL = 1DEVICE = M–CARDFUNCTION = WRITEDATA KIND = LADDERFILE NO. =

( #NAME )

EXEC CANCEL WRITE READ COMPAR

PMC I/O screen

The following operations are performed on the personalcomputer side.

2) Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.


4) Select F5 : [M–CARD] (memory card) from the input/outputmenu. (See Fig. 3.5.6.3 (a).)

5) Select [READ] (read (programmer ← memory card)). (See Fig.3.5.6.3 (b).)

6) Convert the PMC programs output to a memory card in step 1)from memory card format to source program format byspecifying the following items and running the utility.

Name of the memory card fileSpecify the name of the conversion source memory card filewritten to the memory card, and the memory card drive inwhich the memory card is inserted.

Name of the source program

Display the source program name.




216

I/O (FROM MCARD) PMC–RC3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

READ (Programmer ← Memory card)

Memory Card FILE NAME : D:¥SAMPLE.#BF

(Specify the MEMORY CARD drive)


1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.6.3 (d) Input/Output (from MCARD) Screen

7) Discompile the object file after conversion, and the resultant filewill become able to be edited on the personal computer.

If a object file compiled on a personal computer is converted to HandyFile format and output to a 3.5” floppy disk (DOS format), the PMCprogram can be read into the RAM of the CNC via a Handy File interfaceconnected to the CNC. This operation can be reversed.

(1) PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC

[Operation]

1) Compile a source program.


3) Select F4 : [FDCAS] (Handy File) from the input/output menu.(See Fig. 3.5.6.4 (a).)

4) Select [WRITE] (WRITE (Programmer → Handy File)).

I/O (FDCAS) PMC–RB3 [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

F1 KEY : WRITE(Programmer → Handy File)

F2 KEY: READ (Programmer ← Handy File)

F10 KEY : END

1 WRITE 2 READ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.6.4 (a) FDCAS Input/Output Screen

3.5.6.4Handy File+3.5” FloppyDisk (MS–DOS Format)




217

5) Convert the source program to Handy File format by specifyingthe following items and running the utility.

Name of the source programDisplay the source program.

Name of the Handy File format fileSpecify the name to be assigned to the Handy File format file(accessible by the Handy File) to be generated by conversion,and the 3.5” disk drive to which the file is output; 5” floppydisk cannot be used.

I/O (TO FDCAS) PMC–RC3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

WRITE (Programmer → Handy File)


Handy File File name : D:¥SAMPLE.#SF

(Specify the floppy disk drive)

1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.6.4 (b) Input/Output (to FDCAS) Screen

The following operations are performed on the CNC side.

6) Connect the CNC and Handy File, and insert the 3.5” floppy disk generated in step 4) into the Handy File.

(2) PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer

[Operation]1) Connect the CNC and Handy File, and output the PMC program

to a 3.5” floppy disk (DOS format).

The following operations are performed on the personalcomputer side.

2) Select [I/O] (input/output) from the main unit.

3) Select F4 : [FDCAS] (Handy File) from the input/output menu.

4) Select [READ] (READ (Programmer ← Handy File)). (See Fig.3.5.6.4 (a).)

5) Convert the PMC program on a 3.5” floppy disk (Handy Fileformat) generated in step 1) to source program by specifying thefollowing items and running the utility.

Name of the Handy File format fileSpecify the program name output in step 1), and the 3.5”floppy disk drive where the floppy disk is inserted.

Name of the source programDisplay the source program.




218

I/O (FROM FDCAS) PMC–RC3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

READ (Programmer ← Handy File)

Handy File File name : D:¥SAMPLE.#SF(Specify the floppy disk drive)


1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.6.4 (c) Input/Output (from FDCAS) Screen

6) Decompile the source program file after conversion, and theresultant file will become able to be edited on the personalcomputer.

This backup function can back up the source program, which the systemuses, to another source program and can restore the backup sourceprogram.

Please use this function when you back up the source program underediting or under debugging.

I/O (BACKUP) PMC–RC3 [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

F1 KEY : BACKUP

F2 KEY : RESTORE

F10KEY : END

1 BACKUF 2 RESTOP3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.6.5 (a) Backup Menu Screen

(1) Backup

[Operation]

1) Select [BACKUP] from the input/ output menu.

2) Select F1 : [BACKUP] from the backup menu.

3) Enter a backup program name, and press [EXEC].

3.5.6.5Backup of User Program




219

I/O (BACKUP) PMC–RB3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

BACKUP (SOURCE PROGRAM → BACKUP PROGRAM)

BACKUP PROGRAM NAME :

1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.6.5 (b) Backup Screen

4) When backup terminates normaly, the “NORMAL END”message is displayed.

(2) Restoring

[Operation]

1) Select [BACKUP] from the input/ output menu.

2) Select F2 : [RESTOR] from the backup menu.

3) Enter a backup program name, and press [EXEC].

I/O (RESIORE) PMC–RB3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

RESTORE (SOURCE PROGRAM ← BACKUP PROGRAM)

BACKUP PROGRAM NAME :

1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.6.5 (c) Restoring Screen

4) When restoring terminates normaly, the “NORMAL END”message is displayed.




220

It is possible to convert between a ROM format file and a memory cardformat file. ROM format file conversion function can be used at thefollowing cases.

a.In the case of using ROM format file which is created by FAPTLADDER.

b.In the case of link processing.

(1) Operation

1) Select [I/O] from the off–line menu. The input/output menuscreen is displayed.

2) Select F9:[ROMFIL] from the input/output menu. The“I/O(ROM format file)” screen (Fig.3.5.6.6(a)) is displayed.

3) Select F1:[WRITE]. The “I/O (MCARD→ROM FILE)” screenis displayed.Select F2:[READ]. The “I/O (ROM FILE→MCARD)” screen isdisplayed.

4) Input a ROM format file name and a memory card file name.

5) When press [EXEC], it is possible to convert between a ROMformat file and a memory card file.

I/O (ROM format file) PMC–RB3 [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

F1 KEY: WRITE (Memory Card → ROM format file)

F2 KEY: READ (Memory Card ← ROM format file)

F10 KEY: END

1 WRITE 2 READ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10END

Fig.3.5.6.6(a)

This function enables the setting of options for each function.

Specified data is stored for each source program.

[Operation]

1) Using the or key, position the cursor to the function for

which options are to be set.

2) On the setting screen for each function, select an item by positioning

the cursor with the or key, then change the setting with the

or key.

3.5.6.6Converting ROM FormatFile

3.5.7Setting ProgramOptions




221

Program option set–up


Compile

Decompile


Fig.3.5.7

The user can set the compile function options as described below. Theseoptions, when set, are used as the initial values of the compile options forthe off–line function, or are used for compile processing performed withthe on–line functions.

For details of each option, see Section 3.5.4.

(1) Condense

This option specifies whether condense mode is to be used forcompile processing.

(2) Symbol

This option specifies whether to output symbol or comment data toan object file.

(3) Net commentThis option specifies whether to output net comment data to an objectfile.

(4) Password

This option specifies whether to display the password setting dialogbox at compile time.

[NO] : Does not display the dialog box. (Passwordsetting is disabled.)

[RW&R] : Displays the password (R/W) setting dialog boxas well as the password (R) setting dialog box.

[RW] : Displays only the password (R/W) setting dialog

box.[R] : Displays only the password (R) setting dialog

box.

3.5.7.1Compile




222



[Compile]

condense : [OFF/ON]symbol/comment : [NOT USE/USE]

net comment : [NO/POINTERS]

password : [ NO/RW&R/RW/R]


Fig.3.5.7.1

The user can set the decompile function options as described below.These options, when set, are used as the initial values of the off–linefunction decompile options, or are used for the decompile processingperformed with the on–line functions.For details of each option, see Section 3.5.5.

(1) Symbol merge

This option specifies whether to merge source program data andobject file symbol/comment data at decompile time.

[NO] : Does not merge symbol and comment data.

[SOURCE] : Gives priority to the source data whenduplicate addresses exist in the source

program and the symbol data of the objectfile.

[MEMORY CARD] : Gives priority to the object file data whenduplicate addresses exist in the sourceprogram and the symbol data of the objectfile.

3.5.7.2Decompile




223



[Decompile]

symbol merge : [NO/SOURCE/ MEMORY_CARD]

1 EDIT 2 PRINT 3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP5 I/O 6 SET–UP 7 MNEEDT8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10

END

Fig.3.5.7.2

When a new program is to be created, the initial value of each option canbe modified by means of the procedure described below.

[Operation]

1) Using the text editor, open the OPTION.CNF file under the directorywhere this system is installed.

2) Find the section corresponding to a model subject to initial valuemodification (that is, a line starting with #).

Example: #32;(RA3) for PMC–RA3#41;(RB4_STEP) for PMC–RB4 (STEP SEQ)

NoteA section having a line beginning with a semicolon (;)

contains legend data. Any attempt to modify such a sectionis ignored.

3) Find the subsection corresponding to a function subject to initialvalue modification (that is, a line starting with *).

4) Specify a new value for the option whose initial value is to bemodified.

3.5.7.3

Subsection Option Setting and function

*COMPILE condense 0: Performs compile processing in normal

mode.1: Performs compile processing in

condense mode.

symbol(Symbol/ comment)

0: Dose not output symbol/comment datato the object file.

1: Output symbol/comment data to theobject file.

netcmt(Net comment)

0: Dose not output net comment data to theobject file.

1: Output net comment data to the objectfile.

3.5.7.3Modifying ProgramOption Initial Values(OPTION.CNF)




224

Subsection Setting and functionOption

password 0: Dose not set a password.1: Sets a password (R/W) and password

(R).2: Sets a password (R/W).3: Sets a password (R).

*DECOMPILE symbol–merge 0: Dose not perform merge processing.

1: Preforms merge processing with prioritygiven to source program data.2: Preforms merge processing with priority

given to object file data.

NoteNever attempt to modify the values of options that are notlisted in the above table. Otherwise, the system maymalfunction.

A source program is converted to a mnemonic file that can be edited withany standard text editor.

[Operation]

1) Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

2) The mnemonic menu screen appears (Fig. 3.5.8.1 (a)).

MNEMONIC EDIT PMC–RC4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ]

[C: ¥FLADDER¥ ]

F1 KEY : SOURCE PROGRAM → MNEMONIC FILE

F2 KEY : MNEMONIC FILE ← SOURCE PROGRAM

F3 KEY : EXECUTE USER BATCH FILE

F10KEY: END

1 MNECNV 2 SRCCNV 3 BATCH 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.8.1 (a) Mnemonic Menu Screen

3) Select [MNECNV] (conversion to mnemonic).

4) The mnemonic conversion screen appears (Fig. 3.5.8.1(b)).

3.5.8Mnemonic Editing

3.5.8.1Conversion of a SourceProgram to a MnemonicFile




225

1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

SOURCE → MNEMONIC PMC–RC4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ]

[C: ¥FLADDER¥ ]

1) SOURCE PROGRAM NAME :2) MNEMONIC FILE NAME :

3) CONVERT DATA KIND SELECTION : ( 0 : ALL , 4 : LADDER )

( 1 : SYSTEM PARAMETER , 5 : I/O MODULE )

( 2 : TITLE , 6 : MESSAGE )

( 3 : SYMBOL & COMMENT )

4) MODE : FOR _P–G

Selected Options /ERC FLMNE.ERR /OUT V

Fig.3.5.8.1 (b) Mnemonic Conversion Screen

5) Specify the following items:

Source program nameDisplay the name of the source program to be converted.The source program that is specified in program selection asinitial menu.

Mnemonic file nameSpecify the name of the mnemonic file to which a sourceprogram is converted. Up to 40 characters can be specified.

Data conversion selectionSpecify data files subject to conversion. All data files can bespecified or specific data files can be selected.

Mode (setting item selection)Specify setting items. Select items from the table below, using

the and keys.

FOR_P-G P-G output format data is converted.Converts the text of a Japanese-language message tocode format (Note 2).

Japanese languagecomment (Note)

Comment data, which may include kanji characters, isconverted.Converts the text of a Japanese-language message toJapanese-language format (Note 2).

FULL_OPTIONS Comment data, which may include kanji characters, isconverted.Data including address symbols and comments, andfunction instruction names treated as comments isconverted.

Data including all instruction sections, operand sections,and comment sections is converted.Converts the text of a Japanese-language message toJapanese-language format (Note 2).




226

LABEL/ SUB-PROGRAM

Data is converted and the jump destination (label) of afunction instruction (JMPB, JMPC, CALL, SP, or anotherinstruction) used in a sub-program is highlighted. Thestep number of the converted mnemonic data does notagree with other setting. (The function instructionsection used in the sub-program does not agree with theother setting.)Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to

Japanese-language format (Note 2).

Notes1 The item specifying Japanese language comment

conversion cannot be selected on an English mode system.2 Format displayed on the code or Japanese-language input

mode screen during message editing.

6) Select [EXEC] upon completion of item specification.

7) Source program is converted to a mnemonic file.

8) An error message is displayed ifEnter

is pressed after conversion.

The mnemonic conversion screen appears when Space is pressed

after conversion.

A mnemonic text file edited in a certain format using a atandard text editoris converted to a source program.

[Operation]

1) Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

2) The mnemonic menu screen appears.

3) Select [SRCCNV] (conversion to a source program).4) The source program conversion screen appears (Fig. 3.5.8.2).

1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

MNEMONIC → SOURCE PMC–RC4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ]

[C: ¥FLADDER¥ ]

1) MNEMONIC FILE NAME :2) SOURCE PROGRAM NAME :

Fig.3.5.8.2 Source Program Conversion Screen

3.5.8.2Conversion of aMnemonic File to aSource Program




227

5) Specify the following items:

Mnemonic file nameSpecify the name of a mnemonic file to be converted. Up to 40characters can be specified.

Source program nameDisplay the name of the source program to which a mnemonicfile is to be converted.

6) Select [EXEC] upon completion of item specification.7) Mnemonic file is converted to a source program.

8) An error message is displayed if Enter is pressed after conversion.

The source program conversion screen appears when Space is

pressed after conversion.

If a mnemonic file created using a commercially available text editor isto be converted to a source program, the mnemonic file must be in thefollowing format.

(1) Identification codeThe mnemonic file defines data with four different identificationcodes that each begin with %.

ID code Description

%@A%@E%@0 to 5% only

Beginning of ALL-format dataEnd of ALL-format dataBeginning of unit-format dataEnd of unit-format data

The unit-format data mentioned above varies from one PMC modelto another as listed below.

-PMC model

-R series/PA3/QC/NB/NB2

ParameterTitleSymbol & commentLadderMessageI/O module

%@0%@1

%@2 or %@2-C (Note 1)%@3%@4%@5

Note“%@2”, and “%@2-C” correspond to source format types asfollows:%@2 : FORMAT-A/B%@2-C: FORMAT-C

Ladder Editing Package uses FORMAT-C only. This means that, as partof conversion to a mnemonic file, conversion to ”%@2-C” type code isperformed. For conversion to a source program, however, both type codes(“%@2” and “%@2-C”) can be used.

(2) Linefeed codeControl character LF (0AH) is defined as a linefeed code. Controlcharacter CR (0DH) is ignored.

3.5.8.3Mnemonic File Format




228

(3) Reserved symbols

1) ; This special character is reserved for use in ladder data.

A semicolon is used in the ladder data section to separate ladderdata from a comment. Characters that follow a semicolon aretreated as a comment. When a mnemonic file is converted back to a source program, a semicolon and a comment that followsit are not generated.

2) : This special character is reserved for use in ladder and I/Omodule data.

A colon is used in the ladder data section to separate a netnumber from ladder data. Data that precedes a colon is treatedas a net number.

A colon is also used in the I/O module data section to separatea channel number from I/O module data. Data that precedes acolon is treated as a channel number.

(4) Control characterThe dollar character ”$” is used as control character in the mnemonicfile. Every dollar character in the sentence must be described as ”$$”in the mnemonic file.

(a) Symbol and comment data1) Description of address and symbolDescribe the address data and the symbol strings in a same line.Describe the address data to top of line and the symbol stringsdescribe after address data with blank character or horizontaltabulation character as delimitter.

| R0200.0 UNIT–3–POWER

Symbol

Blank character or horizontal tabulation character

Address

2) Description of relay comment and coil commentDescribe the relay comment and coil comment after addressdefined in (1).The first string between two single quotation marks after mark ”$1” is relay comment. And next string between two singlequotation marks is coil comment.

| $1 ’KEEP POWER ON’ ’KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON’

Coil comment


Relay comment

Mark of comment dataline (only ’$1’)


When relay comment is not used, a part of relay comment must bedescribed by double single quotation marks.




229

| $1 ’’ ’INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE’

NoteEvery single quotation mark in the relay comment and coilcomment string must be described as ”$” + ” ’ ” in the

mnemonic file.

(b) Ladder data

1) Description of net commentThe net comment data is specified by ’(*’ and ’*)’ characters.

Characters Means

(* Start of net comment

*) Terminater of net comment

2) Designation of new page (for ladder diagram printing)Designation of new page for ladder diagram printing must be

described as ”$P” or ”$p” in the mnemonic file.

Characters Means

$P or $p Designation of new page(for ladder diagram printing)

(a) ParameterFollowing example is for PMC-RC4. For other PMCs, seeAPPENDIX A FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMCMODELS

1) PMC-RC4

2. Counter data type (Binary or BCD)

3. Whether an operator’s panel is used

(YES: Used, NO: Not used)

4. PMC model

(PMC-RC3/PMC-RC4/PMC-RC4

(STEPSEQ))

5. Start address of language program link

control statement data

(0 or 800000 to 8FFFFF

(hexadecimal))

6. Percentage of language programexecution time (1% to 99%)

7. Ladder execution time

(Always 100%)

%@0↓

2 BCD↓

3 NO↓

4 PMC – RC4↓

5 000000

6 50↓

7 100↓

%↓

[EOB]

3.5.8.4Sample Mnemonic Files(Single-format)




230

NoteWhen specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether anoperator’s panel is used), specify the KEY address, LEDaddress, KEY image address, and LED image address asfollows:

3 YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010↓

(b) Title (common to all models)

%@1↓

01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME↓

02 MACHINE TOOL NAME↓

03 CNC & PMC NAME↓

04 PMC PROGRAM NO.↓

05 EDITION NO.↓

06 PROGRAM DRAWING NO.↓

07 DATE OF PROGRAMING↓

08 PROGRAM DESIGNED BY↓

09 ROM WRITTEN BY↓10 REMARKS↓

%↓

[EOB]

(c) Symbols and comments (common to all models)

%@2–C

R0200.0 UNIT–3–POWER

$1 ’KEEP POWER ON’ ’KEEP UNIT–3 POWER ON’

R0200.1 UNIT–2–ACT

$1 ’$’OIWER$$’ ’KEEP UNIT–4 $$POWER$’ ON’

R0300.0

$1 ’KEEP POWER ON’ ’KEEP UNIT–4 POWER ON’

P0008 OPEN–FRONT

$1 ’OPEN FRONT COVER’

L0100 INITIALIZE

$1 ’’ ’INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE’

%

[EOB]

Display of

symbol/comment

Symbol

Coil CommentRelay comment

Control code

no Relay comment




231

(d) Ladder (common to all models)

1) FOR_P-G

%@3 ↓

RD X0.4↓

OR Y80.6↓

WRT D300.1↓

SUB 1↓

RD.NOT X3.0↓

SUB 40↓

2↓

8191 ↓

D300 ↓

SUB 2↓

%↓

[EOB]

2) FULL_OPTIONS

%@3↓

N00001: SUB 71 ; SP

P1 ;(SUBPR1 ) ”SUB PROG. NO.01” ↓; [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.01]↓

N00002: RD X0.0 ;(XADRS1 ) ”JUMPB LABEL L001”↓

SUB 68 ; JMPB↓

L100 ;(LABEL1 ) ↓

; [LABEL L00001]↓

N00003: RD X0.1 ;(XADRS2 ) ”JUMPC LABEL L001”↓

SUB 73 ; JMPC↓

L100 ;(LABEL1 ) ↓

; [LABEL L00001]↓

N00004: SUB 69 ; LBL ↓

L100 ;(LABEL1 ) ↓

; [LABEL L00001]↓

N00005: SUB 72 ; SPE ↓ N00006: SUB 71 ; SP ↓

P2 ;(SP1000 ) ”SUB PROGRAM NO.1” ↓

N00007: RD R0.0 ;(RADRS00) ↓

DEC D0 ;(DADRS04) ↓

2↓

WRT D0.0 ↓

N00008: SUB 72 ; SPE ↓

N00009: SUB 64 ; END ↓

% ↓

Symbol

Relay comment

Coil comment

no Commentno Relaycomment




232

3) LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM

%@3↓

SUBPR1 SP SUBPR1 ;<P1 > ”SUB PROG. NO.01”

; [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.01]↓

RD XADRS1 ;<X0.0 > ”JUMPB LABEL L001” ↓

JMPB LABEL1 ;<L100 > ↓

;[LABEL L00001] ↓

RD XADRS2 ;<X0.1 > ”JUMPB LABEL L001” ↓

JMPB LABEL1 ;<L100 > [LABEL L00001]↓

LABEL1 LBL ;<L100 > ↓

;[LABEL L00001]↓

SPE ↓

SP1000 SP ;<P2 > ”SUB PROG. NO.1” ↓

RD RADR00 ;<R0.0 > ↓

DEC DADR04 ;<D0 > ↓

2↓

WRT D0.0 ↓

SPE ↓

END ↓

% ↓

Address Relay comment

Coil commentSymbol

(e) Message

%@4↓

A00.0 2100020 ATC DOOR NOT CLOSE↓

A00.1 2100022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON↓

A00.2 2100020 EDTOK KEY SWITCH ON↓

%↓

[EOB]

(f) I/O module

%@5↓

X000 1 0 1 ID64A ↓

Y008 1 0 4 OD64B↓

%↓

[EOB]




233

(a) PMC-RB4

%@A ↓

%@0 ↓

2 BINARY↓

3 NO↓

4 PMC–RB4 ↓

% ↓

%@1 ↓

01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME↓

10 REMARKS↓

% ↓

%@2–C ↓

R0.200.0 UNIT–3–POWER ↓

$1 ’KEEP POWER ON’ ’KEEP UNIT–3 POWER ON’ ↓

R0200.1 UNIT–2–ACT↓

$1 ’$’POWER$$’ ’KEEP UNIT–4 $$POWER$’ ON’ ↓

R0300.0 ↓

$1 ’KEEP POWER ON’ ’KEEP UNIT–4 POWER ON’ ↓

P0008 OPEN–FRONT↓$1 ’OPEN FRONT COVER’ ↓

L0100 INITIALIZE↓

$1 ’’ ’INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE’ ↓

% ↓

%@3 ↓

RD R1001.0↓

OR R120.3 ↓

AND R1000.2 ↓

WRT Y2000.4 ↓

(*

Inscribe the net comment here. Any characters

which are input with personal computer can be used.

*)

RD R1001.0↓ AND R1000.2 ↓

WRT Y23.4 ↓

(* $P *)

RD R101.0 ↓

OR R123.4 ↓

AND R100.2↓

WRT Y200.4↓

% ↓

%@4

A00.0 2100020 ACT DOOR NOT CLOSE ↓

A00.1 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON ↓

% ↓

%@5 ↓

X000 1 0 1 ID16C ↓Y008 1 0 4 OD32A ↓

% ↓

%@E ↓

Net

comment

form feed position (in Ladder diagram printing)

3.5.8.5Sample Mnemonic Files(All-format)




234

When using the step sequence method, mnemonic instructions cannot becoded.

The mnemonic conversion functions need following notes:

1) Programming by Mnemonic InstructionsA step sequence program cannot be created with mnemonicinstructions. It is impossible to create a step sequence program with

a text editor, or to read the program by means of mnemonic-to-sourceconversion.

2) Source-to-Mnemonic and Mnemonic-to-Source ConversionsIf source-to-mnemonic conversion is executed for a step sequencesource program, only ladder subprograms are converted tomnemonics, step sequence subprograms being ignored. If a stepsequence source program is subjected to source-to-mnemonicconversion, then to mnemonic-to-source conversion, the originalsource program will not be replicated.

The batch file FLMNE.BAT can be executed by suspending the executionof mnemonic editing.

A user’s own batch file generated by editing the contents of theFLMNE.BAT file with a standard text editor can also be executed.

Example 1The execution of mnemonic editing is suspended and text editor VZ isactivated. (In this case, VZ must be defined in the environment variablePATH beforehand.)

[Operation]

1) Use a standard text editor to create the batch file FLMNE.BATas follows:

VZ

2) Select MNEEDT (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

3) The mnemonic menu screen appears.

4) Select ([BATCH] (user batch file execution).


Execute ’FLMNE.BAT’.

Add parameter(s)? [A(Add), N(Not add), S(Stop)]

6) Specify A (Add), and specify *.HEX as the parameter. VZ isactivated and a list of files with the extension .HEX is displayed.

7) To restart memu screen of mnemonic, terminate VZ.

Hit any key!

8) Press any key. The screen display returns to the mnemonic menuscreen.

Example 2The execution of Ladder Editing Package is suspended. Then, thecommand processor COMMAND.COM is activated and DOScommands are enabled. Create FLMNE.BAT as follows:

3.5.8.6The Note if the StepSequence Function isSelected When Setting aModel

3.5.8.7

User Batch FileExecution




235

COMMAND

Selecting [UTILTY] from the off-line menu enables the use of the utilityfunctions. The following functions are registered at installation:

UTILITY

F1 Dos

F2 floadat

F3 View result

F4 Linker

Fig.3.5.9 (a) Utility Screen

1) Moving to the DOS command line (starting COMMAND.COM)

F1

: Dos2) Data transfer between the P-G and personal computer

(FLOADAT) (For details, see Section 3.4 in Appendix C.)

F2 : floadat

3) Referencing the results of compile or decompile processing

F3 : View result

4) Link function

F4 : Linker

3) detailed below.

The user can register any desired command as a utility. For an explanationof how to perform this registration, see Section 3.1 of Appendix C.

(1) Referencing the results of compile or decompile processing (startingFLVIEW.BAT)Upon the completion of compile or decompile processing, anexecution result file and map file are created. These files are of textformat, enabling their reference using a commercially availableeditor. By using this function, however, these files can be referencedeven before Ladder Editing Package is terminated.

[Operation]

1) Press F3 on the utility screen.

2) Then, the pop-up screen shown below appears. These files can

now be referenced by pressing the Enter key.

EXEC FILE NAME

FLVIEW, BAT %P.err

The user can specify the type of files to be referenced, simply by changingthe file name extension (.err: Execution result file/.map: Map file).

3.5.9Utility




236

“ON-LINE FUNCTION” can be selected from the off-line menu. Fordetails, see Section “3.4 On-Line Function”.

3.5.10Selecting On-LineFunction from Off-LineFunction



B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

237

4ERROR MESSAGE LIST

This chapter describes the general output messages. Messages are outputand categorized:

function–name : E–xxxx : error–message

Error number (four digits)

Category (error, warning, etc.)

Name of the processing which caused the error

(1) Function nameThe processing causing the error is represented by a singlealphabetic character.

Funcion name Processing

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

KL

N

Initial menu and option setting

Title editing

I/O module editing

System parameter editing

Ladder diagram/step diagram editing

Symbol and comment editing

Message editing

Printing

Compilation

Decompilation

Mnemonic conversionInput/Output

On–line monitor

(2) Message categoryOutput messages are classified into the following categories. Thecategories are represented by single alphabetic characters.

F: Fatal error. The error number is 2xxx.The system can be operated, but processing of the user programcannot be continued because of an error.

E: Error. The error number is 3xxx.Processing is continued, but the results will be lost. Alternatively,the processing is stopped.

W: Warning. The error number is 4xxx.Processing is continued. The results will be retained, but cannot beguaranteed.



4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

238

(Program Name Selection, Option Setting, On–Line Execution)

Number Message Contents

A:F–2000 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY.

A:F–2001 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE.

A:F–2004 THIS DATA CAN NOT BE HANDLEDAT THIS VERSION OF FAPT LAD-DER.

A:F–2005 SOURCE PROGRAM HAS WRONGFILE (S).

The source program contains an invalid file or does not contain nec-essary files.

Check the source program files.

A:F–2006 NOT FOUND XXXX FILE.

A:F–2007 NOT FOUND XXXX SOURCE PRO-GRAM.

A:F–2008 CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE.

A:F–2009 CANNOT CLOSE XXXX FILE.

A:F–2010 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM BRO-KEN.

4.1A : INITIAL MENU

4.1.1Fatal Error




239


A:E–3120 ENTER PROGRAM NAME. The name of the source program has not been input. Input the sourceprogram name.

A:E–3121 THE SOURCE PROGRAM DOESNOT EXIST.

A:E–3122 PMC MODEL FILE IS NOT FOUND. The specified source program is not compatible with the system. Fordetails of which machine models are compatible, see Section 1.2.2.

Some system files (xxxx.TBL) cannot be found. Reinstall the system.

A:E–3124 CANNOT CREATE NEW PRO-GRAM XXXX.

The specified source program cannot be created because a directoryhaving the same name already exists. Input another source programname.

A:E–3125 ILLEGAL PATH OF SOURCE PRO-GRAM NAME.

The specified path does not exist. Check the input source programname.

A:E–3126 SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE DIF-FERENT.

A FORMAT–A/B program was specified when copying a source pro-gram. FORMAT–A/B cannot be used. Convert the program via a

memory card or mnemonic format file. For details, see Appendix D.

A:E–3128 XXXX FILE READ ERROR. File xxxx cannot be read.

A:E–3130 XXXX FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANYKEY.

File xxxx cannot be read.

A:E–3131 XXXX FILE OPEN ERROR. File xxxx cannot be opened.

A:E–3132 XXXX FILE CLOSE ERROR. File xxxx cannot be closed.

A:E–3133 INSUFFICIENT DISK ERROR. The file cannot be output because there is insufficient free space onthe disk. Terminate the system and delete any unnecessary files inthe disk to create more free space.

A:E–3134 INVALID OPTION INITIALIZED.(XXXX FILE WAS UPDATED.)

The option file (OPTION) has been initialized because its data wasdestroyed.

A:E–3137 CANNOT CREATE FILE XXXX. File xxxx cannot be created.A:E–3138 ILLEGAL SOURCE PROGRAM

NAME.

A:E–3139 ILLEGAL XXXX SOURCE PRO-GRAM NAME.

A:E–3140 NOT FOUND FILE.

A:E–3143 CANNOT OPEN FILE. File xxxx cannot be opened.

A:E–3144 CANNOT CLOSE FILE. File xxxx cannot be closed.

A:E–3145 FILE I/O ERROR. An error occurred during file access.

A:E–3146 XXXX FILE I/O ERROR.

A:E–3147 UNKNOWN PMC SERIES.

A:E–3148 XXXX FILE WRITE ERROR. HITANY KEY.

Data cannot be written to file xxxx.

4.1.2Error




240


B:E–3020 FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY The source program title file (TITLE) cannot be read.

B:E–3021 FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY Data cannot be written to the source program title file (TITLE) or con-trol file (CONTROL).

B:E–3022 FILE I/O ERROR. HIT ANY KEY An error occurred during file access.

4.2B : TITLE EDITING

4.2.1Error




241


C:E–3021 FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY The source program I/O module file (IOMODULE) cannot be read.

C:E–3022 FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY Data cannot be written to the source program I/O module file (IOMO-DULE) or control file (CONTROL).

C:E–3023 INPUT DATA INVALID Input data is invalid. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the input procedure.

C:E–3024 APPOINTED GROUP NOT EXIST The specified group does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm theinput value range.

C:E–3025 APPOINTED BASE NOT EXIST The specified base does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm theinput value range.

C:E–3026 APPOINTED SLOT NOT EXIST The specified slot does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the inputvalue range.

C:E–3027 APPOINTED ID CODE NOT EXIST The specified module does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm themodule names that can be specified.

C:E–3028 INPUT KEY NOT USED

C:E–3030 ADDRESS APPOINT ILLEGAL The specified module cannot be used at this address. Check whetherthe output module is specified at address X and whether the inputmodule is specified at address Y.

C:E–3032 THE SAME GROUP,BASE ANDSLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED.

The specified group, base, and slot have already been assignedmodules.Specify different group, base, and slot numbers.

C:E–3033 INVALID CHANNEL NO. APPOINT The specified channel does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirmwhich channels can be specified.

C:E–3034 INVALID DATA, EXCEPT ’0’, IS SPE-CIFIED AT THE SLOT OF XXX ASI/O UNIT B.

For I/O Unit–B (xxx:power–on/off information), a slot other than slot0 cannot be specified. Specify slot 0.


C:W–4020 THE SAME GROUP,BASE ANDSLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED.

The specified group, base, and slot have already been assignedmodules. Check whether the same numbers can be assigned for thegroup, base, and slot.

C:W–4021 INVALID DATA, EXCEPT ’0’, IS SPE-CIFIED AT THE BASE OF I/O UNITB.

For the I/O Unit–B module, a base other than base 0 cannot be speci-fied. Specify base 0.

C:W–4022 BOTH I/O UNIT–A AND UNIT–BARE SPECIFIED IN THE SAMEGROUP.

I/O Unit–A and I/O Unit–B cannot be assigned to the same group.Specify different groups.

4.3C : I/O MODULEEDITING

4.3.1

Error

4.3.2Warning




242


D:E–3020 FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY The source program system parameter file (SYSPARAM) cannot beread.

D:E–3021 FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY Data cannot be written to the source program system parameter file(SYSPARAM) or control file (CONTROL).

D:E–3022 INVALID VALUE

D:E–3023 INPUT DATA INVALID

D:E–3024 OPERATER PANEL ADDRESSERROR

When 1 (YES) is set in

6) OPERATOR PANEL (which specifies whether the F0 operatorpanel is used or not), specify the following address:

7) KEY ADDRESS8) LED ADDRESS9) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS10) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS

4.4D : SYSTEMPARAMETEREDITING

4.4.1Error




243


E:F–2100 CANNOT READ ∗ FILE.

E:F–2101 CANNOT WRITE ∗ FILE.

E:F–2102 CANNOT SEEK ∗ FILE.


E:E–3100 INPUT INVALID

E:E–3101 ADDRESS BIT NOTHING

E:E–3102 RELAY OR COIL NOTHING

E:E–3103 HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL

E:E–3104 VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL

E:E–3105 ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO.

E:E–3106 FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL

E:E–3107 PARAMETER NOTHING

E:E–3108 LADDER ILLEGAL

E:E–3109 ERROR NET FOUND

E:E–3110 RELAY OR COIL FORBIT

E:E–3111 PLEASE COMPLETE NET

E:E–3112 ILLEGAL NETS CLEAED

E:E–3113 ADDRESS BIT NOTHING

E:E–3114 FUNCTION NOT FOUND

E:E–3115 LADDER BROKEN

E:E–3116 ADDRESS BYTE NOTHING

E:E–3117 STACK REGISTER OVER(8BIT)ERR

E:E–3118 PLEASE KEY IN SUB NO.

E:E–3119 PLEASE KEY IN FUN NO.

E:E–3120 SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA TOOLARGE

E:E–3121 SAME SYMBOL DATA EXIST

E:E–3122 SOURCE PROGRAM OF DIFFER-ENT FILE FORMAT

A Format–B and C programs were found to exist when renaming aFormat–A program.

4.5E : LADDER/STEPSEQUENCE EDITING

4.5.1Fatal Error

4.5.2Error (at EditingLadder Diagram)




244

Number ContentsMessage

E:E–3123 ILLEGAL SUBPROGRAM NAME An invalid subprogram name was input.

E:E–3124 TOO DEEP NESTING OF SUB– PROGRAM

E:E–3125 SAME SUB–PROGRAM NAMEEXISTS

E:E–3126 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITIONWILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOUSELECT TO ZOOM ’∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗’.

E:E–3127 SOURCE PROGRAM OFANOTHER FORMAT EXISTS

A Format–B and C programs, having the same name as that specifiedfor the Copy/Move to file function, was found to exist during Format–Aprogram editing.

E:E–3128 ILLEGAL SYMBOL A value that cannot be used as a symbol was input during symbolediting.

E:E–3129 PROGRAM OPEN ERROR

E:E–3130 PROGRAM NOT EXIST

E:E–3131 NOT EXIST APPOINT DATA SIZE

E:E–3132 PROGRAM NOT READ

E:E–3133 PROGRAM NOT WRITE

E:E–3134 DIRECTORY NOT EXIST

E:E–3135 LADDER DATA NOT EXIST

E:E–3136 PROGRAM IS OPENED

E:E–3137 PROGRAM NAMES LIMIT OVER

E:E–3138 CAN NOT RENAME LATMP An attempt was made to perform renaming after edit ing LATMP withthe File function.

E:E–3139 PROGRAM NOT EXIST


E:E–3200 ILLEGAL SOURCE CODE. A read error occurred when reading the specif ied intermediate codefile.

E:E–3201 BUFFER SIZE OVER. An intermediate code exceeds the Edit buffer size.

E:E–3202 NUMBER OF NEST BRANCH TOOBIG.

The maximum allowable number of branch nests has beenexceeded.

E:E–3203 NUMBER OF BRANCH TOO BIG. The maximum allowable number of branches has been exceeded.

E:E–3204 SIZE OF TABLE BUFFER TOO BIG. The maximum allowable number of element tables has beenexceeded.

E:E–3205 UNCONNECTED STEPSEQUENCE DIAGRAM.

The step, transition, branch, or line is not continuous.

E:E–3206 SELECTED BRANCH ERROR. The start side of the select branch does not agree with its end side.

E:E–3207 PARALLEL BRANCH ERROR. The start side of the parallel branch does not agree with its end side.

E:E–3208 SYNTAX ERROR. The sequence in the select branch is other than ”transition to step totransition.” Or, the sequence in the parallel branch is other than ”stepto transition to step.”

4.5.3Error (at Editing StepSequence)




245


E:E–3209 STEP LINE SYNTAX ERROR. The step line contains an element other than initial step, step, blockstep, jump (dummy step), and serial move (vertical line).

E:E–3210 TRANSITION LINE SYNTAXERROR.

The transition line contains an element other than initial step, step,block step, and jump (dummy step).

E:E–3211 CANNOT INSERT. Insertion is not possible at the specified location. Or, if inserted, themaximum coordinate value is exceeded.

E:E–3212 CANNOT MAKE DIAGRAM. A soft key that cannot be changed was specified when changing anelement.

E:E–3213 HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL. A horizontal line was specified in place of the closing code of thebranch.

E:E–3214 JUMP FORWARD CHECK ERROR. The label pointed to by JUMP does not exist.

E:E–3215 CHECK INCOMPLETE ERROR. The intermediate code cannot be created because it has not beencompletely checked.

E:E–3216 CHART SEQUENCE ERROR. The step line is not properly connected to the transition line.

E:E–3217 CHART START CODE ERROR. The chart start code does not exist (step).

E:E–3218 CHART END CODE ERROR. The chart end code does not exist.

E:E–3219 JUMP CLOSE ERROR. JUMP has not been closed correctly.

E:E–3220 HORIZONTAL LINE DUPLICATEERROR.

A branch contains two or more left end codes. (Invalid data existsbefore and after the branch code.)

E:E–3221 BRANCH UNCONNECTED ERROR. The branch connection is invalid.

E:E–3222 BRANCH SEQUENCE ERROR. There is an invalid code before or after the branch start and endcodes.

E:E–3223 CANNOT COPY DIAGRAMS. The copy destination is invalid.

E:E–3224 CANNOT MOVE DIAGRAMS. The move destination is invalid.

E:E–3225 ILLEGAL SPECIFIED POSITION. The specified coordinate value does not exist.

E:E–3226 STRINGS NOT FOUND. The specified character string does not exist.

E:E–3227 STEP NUMBER DUPLICATEERROR.

The specified step number is already in use. Check which step num-bers are already in use.

E:E–3228 LABEL NUMBER DUPLICATEERROR.

The specified label is already defined.

E:E–3229 CANNOT DELETE TEMPORARYFILE.

The temporary file cannot be deleted.

E:E–3230 SAME SUB–PROGRAM NAMEEXISTS.

The same file already exists, but with a different extension.

E:E–3231 INPUT INVALID. Data outside the address range is set.

E:E–3232 EXPECTED ADDRESS. No subprogram number is specified.

E:E–3233 TOO DEEP NESTING OF SUB– PROGRAM.

An attempt was made to perform ZOOM for more than eight layers.

E:E–3234 ILLEGAL FILE NAME.

E:E–3235 SUB–PROGRAM ALREADYENTRIED.

The specified subprogram is a file that is currently being edited.

E:E–3236 CANNOT DELETE PROGRAM. The intermediate code fi le cannot be deleted.

E:E–3237 CANNOT CHANGE DATA. Data cannot be converted because it is invalid.




246

Number Message

E:W–4100 ILLEGAL OPERATION

E:W–4101 EDIT BUFFER OVER

E:W–4102 70LINE/1NET OVER

E:W–4103 LARGE NET APPEARED

E:W–4104 MNEMONIC BUFFER OVER

E:W–4105 SET COUNT OVER

E:W–4106 256STEP/1NET OVER

E:W–4107 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WAS CAN-CELLED

E:W–4108 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CAN-CELLED, IF YOU SELECT TO SAVE.

E:W–4109 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CAN-

CELLED,IF YOU SELECT TO UPDATE/APPEND.

E:W–4110 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CAN-CELLED, IF YOU SELECT TO OVERWRITE.

E:W–4111 MACHINE KIND AND INPUT PROGRAM NOTCONSISTENCY !

4.5.4Warning (at EditingLadder Diagram)




247

Number Message

F:E–3100 INPUT DATA ILLEGAL.

F:E–3101 SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA TOO LARGE

F:E–3102 SAME SYMBOL DATA EXIST

F:E–3103 NO DEFINITION ADDRESS APPOINTED

F:E–3104 NOT FOUND DATA ERROR

F:E–3105 FILE READ ERROR HIT ANY KEY

F:E–3106 FILE WRITE ERROR HIT ANY KEY

F:E–3107 DATA SAVE ERRORF:E–3108 SAME ADDRESS DATA EXISTS.

F:E–3109 INPUT ADDRESS DATA.

F:E–3110 ILLEGAL SYMBOL.

4.6F : SYMBOL &COMMENT EDITING

4.6.1Error




248

Number Message

G:E–3100 ILLEGAL CHARACTERS ARE SPECIFIED AT ∗.

G:E–3101 MESSAGE DATA TOO LARGE.

G:E–3102 THE FOLLOWING DATA OF ∗ WERE DELETED.

4.7G : MESSAGEEDITING

4.7.1

Error




249


H:F–2005 SOURCE PROGRAM HAS WRONGFILE(S). ($)

H:F–2008 CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE.


H:E–3100 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY. An attempt was made to reserve memory, but there was insufficientfree space.

H:E–3101 CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE. File xxxx cannot be opened.

H:E–3102 CANNOT READ XXXX FILE. File xxxx cannot be read.

H:E–3103 NOT FOUND XXXX FILE. File xxxx cannot be found.

H:E–3104 NOT EXIST XXXX FILE. File xxxx does not exist.

H:E–3105 DATA INVALID XXXX FILE. The format of file xxxx is invalid.

H:E–3106 CANNOT WRITE XXXX FILE. Data cannot be writ ten to the f ile xxxx.

H:E–3107 OUTPUT FILE NOT DEFINED. An error occurred upon opening the output f ile.

H:E–3108 WRITE ERROR OUTPUT FILE. An error occurred upon writing to the output file.

H:E–3109 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE NEEDXXXX BYTE FREE

There is insufficient free space on the disk. Reserve xxxx bytes offree space.

H:E–3110 INSUFFICIENT CURRENT & TMPDISK SPACE NEED XXXX BYTEFREE

There is insufficient free space on the disk to perform cross–refer-ence. Reserve xxxx bytes of free space.

H:E–3111 STEP NUMBER (XXXX) OVER. The maximum allowable number of steps for the ladder diagram hasbeen exceeded. The maximum number of steps that can be printedis 32767.

H:E–3112 SYMBOL & COMMENT FILE READERROR.

An error occurred upon reading symbol data.

H:E–3113 NET COMMENT FILE READERROR.

An error occurred upon reading a net comment.

H:E–3114 SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA BRO-KEN.

The symbol data is invalid.

4.8H : PRINTOUT

4.8.1Fatal Error

4.8.2Error




250


H:W–4100 CANCEL PRINTER OUTPUT. The <BREAK> key was pressed before the completion of printing.

H:W–4101 CANCEL FILE OUTPUT. The <BREAK> key was pressed during file output.

H:W–4102 SEL SWITCH OFF The SEL indicator on the printer is not lit. Press the SEL button suchthat the indicator lights.

4.8.3Warning




251


I:F–2100 NOT ENOUGH DISK SPACE

I:F–2101 OUT OF MEMORY


I:E–3100 XXXX READ ERROR The source program cannot be read. (This error normally does not

occur during compilation.)

I:E–3101 XXXX WRITE ERROR The compilation results cannot be written.

I:E–3102 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NAMEILLEGAL.

An invalid source program name is specified. (This error normallydoes not occur during compilation.)

I:E–3103 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NOTFOUND.

Source program xxxx does not exist. (This error normally does notoccur during compilation.)

I:E–3105 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM FOR-MAT IS DIFFERENT.

The source program format is FORMAT–A. (This error normally doesnot occur during compilation.)

I:E–3107 SYSTEM PARAMETER READERROR.

The source file for the system parameter data does not exist.

I:E–3108 TITLE READ ERROR. The source file for the title data does not exist.

I:E–3109 I/O MODULE READ ERROR. The source file for the I/O module data does not exist.

I:E–3110 VERIFICATION ERROR The input password differs from the registered password.

I:E–3111 THIS WORD CAN NOT BE USEDAS PASSWORD. TRY ANOTHERWORD

Input the password correctly.

I:E–3112 ONLY ALPHABETICAL ANDNUMERICAL CHARACTERS AREALLOWED

The input password contains a non–alphanumeric character.

I:E–3200 THERE IS AN UNDEFINEDINSTRUCTION.

An instruction that cannot be run by the specified program exists.

I:E–3201 THERE IS NO COIL IN THE FUNC-TIONAL INSTRUCTION WHICHNEEDS THE COIL.

A functional instruction is lacking a required coil.

I:E–3220 SPECIFIED VALUE FOR A PARAM-

ETER OF THE XXXX INSTRUC-TION IS OUTSIDE THE RANGE.

An out–of–range value is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx.

I:E–3221 PROGRAM NUMBER IS DIFFER-ENT FROM PROGRAM NAME.

The parameter of the subprogram start instruction (SP) contains aprogram number that does not correspond to the program name.

I:E–3222 AN ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBERIS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXXINSTRUCTION.

An out–of–range program number or an address other than a pro-gram number is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx.

I:E–3223 AN ILLEGAL LABEL NUMBER ISSPECIFED FOR THE XXXXINSTRUCTION.

An out–of–range label number or an address other than a label num-ber is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx.

I:E–3250 THERE IS NO LADDER PROGRAM. The ladder program is empty. Specify the END1 or END2 instruction.

4.9I : COMPILE

4.9.1Fatal Error

4.9.2Error




252


I:E–3251 THE SIZE OF LADDER PROGRAMIS TOO LARGE.

The size of the ladder program exceeds the maximum size specifiedfor the selected program type.

I:E–3252 LADDER PROGRAM IS BROKEN. An unrecognizable instruction exists.

I:E–3253 LADDER EXECUTION TIME ATTHE 1ST LEVEL IS TOO LARGE.

Because the first level of the main program takes too long to execute,the ladder cannot be executed. Make the first level smaller, orincrease the ratio of the ladder execution time in the system parame-ter.

I:E–3254 THE NUMBER OF DIVISION OFLADDER EXCEEDS 99.

Because the number of second level divisions in the main programexceeds the maximum of 99, the ladder cannot be executed. Makethe second level smaller, or increase the ratio of the ladder executiontime in the system parameter.

I:E–3270 SP INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BEUSED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM.

SP is the start instruction for a subprogram. It cannot be used in themain program.

I:E–3271 SPE INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BEUSED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM.

SPE is the end instruction for a subprogram. It cannot be used in themain program.

I:E–3272 JMPC INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BEUSED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM.

The JMPC instruction performs a jump from a subprogram to thesecond level of the main program. It cannot be used in the main pro-gram.

I:E–3273 CALL INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BEUSED EXCLUDING THE 2ND

LEVEL MAIN PROGRAM.

The CALL instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannotbe called from other than the second level of the main program.

I:E–3274 CALLU INSTRUCTION CAN NOTBE USED EXCLUDING THE 2NDLEVEL MAIN PROGRAM.

The CALLU instruction cannot be used because a subprogram can-not be called from other than the second level of the main program.

I:E–3290 THERE IS NO SP INSTRUCTION ATTHE TOP OF THE SUBPROGRAM.

A subprogram must start with the SP instruction to indicate the startof the subprogram.

I:E–3291 THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTIONAT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUB-PROGRAM.

A subprogram must end with the SPE instruction to indicate the endof the subprogram.

I:E–3292 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTSBEYOND SPE INSTRUCTION.

No instructions can be placed after the SPE instruction because theSPE instruction indicates the end of a subprogram.

I:E–3293 SP INSTRUCTION IS DETECTEDIN THE SUBPROGRAM.

The SP instruction cannot be placed within a subprogram becausethe SP instruction indicates the start of a subprogram.

I:E–3310 THERE IS NO END1 INSTRUCTION. The END1 instruction is not found at the end of the first level.

I:E–3311 THERE IS NO END2 INSTRUCTION. The END2 instruction is not found at the end of the second level.

I:E–3312 THERE IS NO END3 INSTRUCTION. The END3 instruction is not found at the end of the third level.

I:E–3313 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTSBEYOND END1 INSTRUCTION.

No instructions can be placed after the END1 instruction because theEND1 instruction indicates the end of the first level.


No instructions can be placed after the END2 instruction because theEND2 instruction indicates the end of the second level.


No instructions can be placed after the END3 instruction because theEND3 instruction indicates the end of the third level.

I:E–3316 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTSBEYOND END INSTRUCTION.

No instructions can be placed after the END instruction because theEND instruction indicates the end of the entire ladder program.

I:E–3317 END1 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE

USED.

END1 is specified for other than the first level.

I:E–3318 END2 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BEUSED.

END2 is specified for other than the second level.

I:E–3319 END3 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BEUSED.

END3 is specified for other than the third level.

I:E–3320 END INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BEUSED.

The END instruction is specified for the first level.

I:E–3330 THERE IS NO COME INSTRUCTION. The COME instruction is not specified when the COM instruction, thatindicates the start of the instruction control range, is specified.




253


I:E–3331 CALL INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BEUSED IN THE RANGE CON-TROLED COM INSTRUCTION.

The CALL instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannotbe called from within the COM instruction control range.

I:E–3332 CALLU INSTRUCTION CAN NOTBE USED IN THE RANGE CON-TROLED COM INSTRUCTION.

The CALLU instruction cannot be used because a subprogram can-not be called from within the COM instruct ion control range.

I:E–3333 ANOTHER COM INSTRUCTIONCAN NOT BE USED IN THERANGE CONTROLED COMINSTRUCTION.

The COM instruction, that indicates the start of the instruction controlrange, is specified twice within the range.

I:E–3334 COME INSTRUCTION MUST BETHE PAIR WITH COM.

The COME instruction, that indicates the end of the instruct ion controlrange, is specified when the COM instruction, used to indicate thestart of the range, is not specified.

I:E–3335 COME INSTRUCTION ISDETECTED THOUGH THE CASEOF THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFI-CATION.

The COME instruction is specified to indicate the end of the instruc-tion control range when the end of the range has already beendefined as a number of coils.

I:E–3340 THERE IS NO JMPE INSTRUCTION. The JMP instruction is specified to indicate the start of the jump block,but the JMPE instruction, that indicates the end of the block, is notspecified.

I:E–3341 ANOTHER JMP INSTRUCTIONCAN NOT BE USED IN THERANGE OF JMP INSTRUCTION.

Another JMP instruction is specified to indicate the start of a jumpblock before the JMPE instruction is specified to indicate the end ofthe first block.

I:E–3342 JMPE INSTRUCTION MUST BETHE PAIR WITH JMP.

A JMPE instruction that indicates the end of a jump block is specifiedwhen no JMP instruction, that indicates the start of a block, is speci-fied.

I:E–3343 JMPE INSTRUCTION IS DETECTEDTHOUGH THE CASE OF THE COILNUMBER SPECIFICATION.

A JMPE instruction is specified to indicate the end of a jump blockwhen the end of the block has already been defined as a number ofcoils.

I:E–3350 THERE IS NO LABEL OF XXXX. The JMPB instruction does not contain label xxxx that indicates the jump destination.

I:E–3351 THE LABEL OF XXXX IS USEDTWICE OR MORE.

Two or more identical label numbers are found when defining jumpdestinations with the LBL instruction. Specify unique label numbers.

I:E–3352 TOO MANY LABELS. The number of jump destinations defined with the LBL instructionexceeds the maximum allowable number that can be specified for theselected program type. Decrease the number of defined jump des-tinations.

I:E–3353 THE DESTINATION OF JMPBINSTRUCTION IS BEYOND COM/ COME INSTRUCTION.

The JMPB instruction cannot be used to jump from a point inside toa point outside the COM instruction control range, or vice versa.JMPB operations can be performed only entirely within the range orentirely outside the range.

I:E–3400 THERE IS AN UNDEFINEDINSTRUCTION.

The step sequence program contains a failed instruction or aninstruction that cannot be used with the selected program type.

I:E–3420 PROGRAM NUMBER IS DIFFER-ENT FROM PROGRAM NAME.

The parameter of the program start instruction (SP) contains a pro-gram number that does not correspond to the program name.

I:E–3421 AN ILLEGAL STEP NUMBER ISSPECIFIED FOR THE XXXXINSTRUCTION.

Instruction xxxx contains an out–of–range step number or an addressother than a step number.

I:E–3422 AN ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBERIS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXXINSTRUCTION.

Instruction xxxx contains an out–of–range program number or anaddress other than a program number.

I:E–3423 AN ILLEGAL LABEL NUMBER ISSPECIFED FOR THE XXXXINSTRUCTION.

Instruction xxxx contains an out–of–range label number or anaddress other than a label number.

I:E–3440 THERE IS NO SP INSTRUCTIONAT THE TOP OF THE SUBPRO-GRAM.

A subprogram must start with the SP instruction to indicate the startof the subprogram.




254


I:E–3441 THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTIONAT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUB-PROGRAM.

A subprogram must end with the SPE instruction to indicate the endof the subprogram.

I:E–3442 STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAMEXISTS BEYOND SPE INSTRUC-TION.

No other instructions can be placed after the SPE instruction becausethe SPE instruction indicates the end of a subprogram.

I:E–3443 SP INSTRUCTION IS DETECTEDIN THE SUBPROGRAM. The SP instruction cannot be placed within a subprogram because theSP instruction indicates the start of a subprogram.

I:E–3460 THE LABEL OF XXXX ISASSIGNED FOR TWO OR MORESTEP PROGRAMS.

Two or more defined jump destinations have identical label numbers.Define a unique label number for each jump destination.

I:E–3461 TOO MANY LABELS. The number of defined jump destinations exceeds the numberallowed for step sequence editing. Reduce the number of jump des-tination definitions.

I:E–3462 DSTEP INSTRUCTION WITHOUTDLBL.

There is no label corresponding to the specified DSTEP instruction.

I:E–3480 THE STEP NUMBER OF XXXX ISASSIGNED FOR TWO OR MORESTEP PROGRAMS.

Two or more steps have identical step numbers. Define a unique stepnumber for each step.

I:E–3570 THE SIZE OF THE MESSAGE DATA

IS TOO LARGE.

The amount of message data exceeds the maximum number of char-

acters that can be specified for the selected program type. Reducethe total number of characters.

I:E–3600 DATA TOO LARGE.(LADDER + STEP SEQUENCE)

The combined size of the ladder program and the step sequence pro-gram exceeds the maximum allowable size specified for the selectedprogram type. Reduce the size of the ladder or step sequence pro-gram.

I:E–3601 DATA TOO LARGE.(MESSAGE + SYMBOL + COM-MENT + LADDER + STEPSEQUENCE)

The combined size of the message, symbol, comment, ladder, andstep sequence data exceeds the maximum allowable size specifiedfor the selected program type. Reduce the size of any of these datatypes.

I:E–3620 THERE IS NO SUBPROGRAMXXXX.

The selected program does not contain any subprogram file numberedxxxx. Create a subprogram file having this number.

I:E–3640 LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE PRO-GRAM EXISTS BEYOND ENDINSTRUCTION.

The END instruction is placed at the end of the second level when itis followed by a subprogram. Or, the END instruction is placed at theend of a subprogram when there is a subsequent subprogram havinga higher program number.

I:E–3650 THERE IS NO LABEL OF XXXX. There is no label corresponding to the specified JMPC instruction.

I:E–3651 THE LABEL OF XXXX IS USEDTWICE OR MORE.

In the main program, two or more LBL instruction jump destinationshave identical label numbers. Define a unique label number for each jump destination.

I:E–3652 TOO MANY LABELS. The total number of LBL instruction jump destinations defined in themain program exceeds the maximum allowable number specified forthe selected program type. Reduce the total number of jump destina-tions defined in the main program.

I:E–3653 THE LABEL OF XXXX TO REFEREXISTS IN ANOTHER LEVEL.

Label xxxx, indicating a jump destination, cannot be placed in otherthan the second level because the JMPC instruction specifies a jumpfrom a subprogram to the second level of the main program. Definelabel xxxx in the second level.

I:E–3654 THE LABEL OF XXXX EXISTS INTHE RANGE OF THE COMINSTRUCTION.

Label xxxx, indicating the jump destination of the JMPC instruction,is within the COM instruction control range. Place label xxxx outsidethe range.




255


I:W–4100 THE TITLE DATA WHICH COULDNOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNCWAS REPLACE WITH SPACECODE.

The title data contains kana or kanji characters. These characters arereplaced by spaces.

I:W–4101 ILLEGAL OP.PANEL (PARAMETER).PROCEED TO COMPILE USING’NO’

Necessary addresses (key address, LED address, etc.) are not setwhen YES is specified for the system parameter indicating whetherthe F0 operator panel is to be used. The value of this parameter ischanged to NO during compilation.

I:W–4102 EDITING SUB–PROGRAM HASNOT COMPLETED.

There is a subprogram for which editing has not yet been completed.Complete the editing of this subprogram.

I:W–4103 MULTIPLE SUB–PROGRAMS WITHSAME NUMBER EXIST.

Two subprograms have identical numbers (e.g., P1.#LA andP1.#SS). The ladder program is the first to be compiled (P1.#LA inthe above example).

I:W–4104 THE SOURCE–PROGRAM IS FOR-MAT–B. THIS PARAMETER IS

IGNORED:SYMBOL/COMMENT

Symbols and comments are always output in FORMAT–B.

I:W–4105 THE SOURCE–PROGRAM IS FOR-MAT–B. THIS PARAMETER ISIGNORED: NET COMMENT

The FORMAT–B data does not include a net comment. Specifyingthis item has no effect.

I:W–4200 THERE IS NO LADDER PROGRAM. The ladder program is empty. This ladder program is not output to amemory card file.

I:W–4201 LADDER EXECUTION TIME ATTHE 1ST LEVEL IS TOO LARGE.

The first level of the main program takes too long to execute. Makethe first level smaller, or increase the ratio of the ladder execution timein the system parameter.

I:W–4202 THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICA-TION OF COM INSTRUCTION ISNOT ALLOWED.

The end of the COM instruction control range cannot be specified asa number of coils. The specified number of coils is ignored, the endof the range being identified by the COME instruction.

I:W–4203 THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICA-TION OF JMP INSTRUCTION ISNOT ALLOWED.

The end location of a jump cannot be specified as a number of coils.The specified number of coils is ignored, the end location being identi-fied by the JMPE instruction.

I:W–4204 UNUSED NET COMMENTPOINTER FOUND.

The ladder program contains a pointer to a lost net comment characterstring. This pointer is not output to a memory card file.

I:W–4400 THERE IS NO STEP SEQUENCEPROGRAM.

The step sequence program is empty. This step sequence programis not output to a memory card file.

I:W–4500 THE SYMBOL DATA WHICHCOULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THECNC WAS REPLACED WITHSPACE CODE.

The symbol data contains a special character that cannot be handledby the CNC. This character is replaced by a space.

I:W–4501 THE COMMENT DATA WHICHCOULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THECNC WAS REPLACED WITH

SPACE CODE.

The comment data contains a special character that cannot be han-dled by the CNC. This character is replaced by a space.

I:W–4502 COMMENT DATA SIZE EXCEEDS64KB. SYMBOL/COMMENT DATAIS NOT CONVERTED TO THEMEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE.

More than 65,535 characters have been input as comment data.None of the symbol and comment data is output to a memory card file.

I:W–4570 THE MESSAGE DATA WHICHCOULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THECNC WAS REPLACED WITHSPACE CODE.

The message data contains a special character that cannot be han-dled by the CNC. This character is replaced by a space.

I:W–4600 UNREFERENCED SUBPROGRAMXXXX.

Subprogram xxxx is not called by any program. This program is, how-ever, output to a memory card file.

4.9.3Warning




256


J:F–2100 FUNCTION CODE ERROR.

DATA:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx,SYSTEM:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

The function code specified in the memory card f ile does not matchthat defined in the system. The file’s function code appears immedi-ately after DATA; the system’s function code after SYSTEM. Installvalid system data.

J:F–2101 PMC SERIES IS DIFFERENT FROM’XXXX’ MEMORY CARD FORMATFILE.

The program specified in memory card file xxxx does not match theselected program type. Select a valid program.

J:F–2102 ’XXXX’ MEMORY CARD FORMATFILE NOT FOUND.

Specified memory card file xxxx does not exist. Create the file.

J:F–2103 MISMATCHED PASSWORD. The entered password is invalid. Enter the password correctly.

J:F–2104 ’XXXX’ MEMORY CARD FORMATFILE READ ERROR.

Memory card file xxxx cannot be read. The file is invalid.

J:F–2105 ’XXXX’ SOURCE PROGRAMWRITE ERROR.

Data cannot be written to source program xxxx.


J:E–3100 THERE IS AN UNDEFINEDINSTRUCTION.

There is a failed instruction or an instruction that cannot be used withthe selected program type.

J:E–3101 THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTIONAT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUB-PROGRAM.

There is a subprogram in the selected program that does not end withthe SPE instruction.

J:E–3200 THE NUMBER OF SYMBOL DATAIN SOURCE PROGRAM EXCEEDSTHE LIMIT.

The symbol data size in a selected program exceeded the system–de-fined limit before the program was executed. The program thus cannotbe executed; reduce the symbol data size.

J:E–3300 ID CODE (I/O MODULE)ERROR.(ADDRESS XXXX)

An invalid ID code is specified at address xxxx in the I/O module data.The program cannot be executed; prepare a valid memory card file.

4.10J : DECOMPILATION

4.10.1

Fatal Error

4.10.2Error




257


J:W–4100 THE SIZE OF LADDER PROGRAMIS TOO LARGE.

The number of steps defined in a subprogram in the ladder programexceeded the maximum number that can be specified for the selectedprogram type. The subprogram is output to the source program.Make necessary corrections by editing the ladder diagram.

J:W–4101 XXXX UNUSED NET COMMENTPOINTER FOUND.

xxxx net comment pointers do not correspond to any net commentcharacter string. These net comment pointers are not output to thesource program. Edit the ladder diagram as necessary.

J:W–4102 XXXX UNUSED NET COMMENTSTRINGS FOUND.

xxxx net comment character strings do not correspond to any netcomment pointer. These net comment character strings are deleted.Edit the ladder diagram as necessary.

J:W–4103 XXXX DUPLICATED NET COM-MENT POINTER FOUND.

xxxx identical net comment pointers have been found. Characterstrings are copied so that the same net comment character stringshave the same net comment pointers.

J:W–4104 THE STEP NUMBER OF XXXX ISUSED TWICE OR MORE.

Step number xxxx is assigned to two or more different steps. Edit thestep sequence as necessary.

J:W–4200 THE NUMBER OF SYMBOL DATAEXCEEDS THE LIMIT.(ADDRESS XXXX, SYMBOL XXXX)

The total number of data items exceeded the system–defined limitwhen the symbol data merge operation reached the indicated symboldata (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx). Data subsequent to this symboldata is not output to the source program.

J:W–4201 XXXX SYMBOL DATA AT DUPLI-CATED ADDRESS FOUND.

xxxx symbol data items are defined for the same address. Either thesource data or the memory card data becomes valid, depending onthe setting of the symbol merge option.

J:W–4202 SAME SYMBOL EXISTS.(ADDRESS XXXX, SYMBOL XXXX)

The symbol character string defined in the indicated symbol data(address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx) is already defined at another address.This symbol data is not output to the source program.

J:W–4203 ILLEGAL SYMBOL.(ADDRESS XXXX, SYMBOL XXXX)

The indicated symbol data (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx) was foundto be invalid as a result of the IEC–compliant symbol character stringcheck. This symbol data is not output to the source program. To out-

put it to the source file, change the setting in the %%%FLSET.CNFfile.

J:W–4204 SYMBOL DATA ADDRESS ILLEGAL.(SYMBOL XXXX)

The symbol data containing symbol xxxx contains an invalid address.This symbol data is not output to the source program.

J:W–4300 ILLEGAL OPERATOR PANEL (SYS-TEM PARAMETER). PROCEED TODECOMPILE USING ’NO’.

The operator panel specification in the system parameter data isinvalid. Processing continues while ignoring the operator panel spec-ification.

J:W–4301 THIS MEMORY CARD FORMATFILE IS NOT FOR EXPANDED R/DADDRESS.

The R/D extension address cannot be used because the PMC ver-sion of PMC–RC is earlier than 3. Change the PMC version in the sys-tem parameter.

J:W–4800 ’XXXX’ MEMORY CARD FORMATFILE ILLEGAL.

The header section of memory card file xxxx is invalid. However, pro-cessing continues.

J:W–4900 ’OPTION’ READ FAILED.

SETTING HAS CHANGED INTODEFAULT.

The file settings have returned to the defaults.

The settings in the OPTION file of the selected program cannot beread. Create a valid file or modify the file settings. The option resetfunction key may be used.

J:W–4901 ’%%%FLSET.CNF’ READ FAILED.SYMBOL CHARACTERS ARE NOTCHECKED.

Symbol character check is not performed.

The settings in the %%%FLSET.CNF file cannot be read. Create avalid file or modify the file settings. When this check is not made, pro-cessing may be continued even without making the changes.

4.10.3Warning




258


K:F–2000 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY.

K:F–2001 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE.

K:F–2006 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ FILE.

K:F–2007 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ SOURCEPROGRAM.

K:F–2100 FILE I/O ERROR.

K:F–2101 SET–UP FILE BROKEN.

K:F–2102 ILLEGAL OPTION(S).

K:F–2103 INSUFFICIENT PARAMETER(S). Required system or functional instruction parameters are not speci-fied.

K:F–2104 TOO MANY PARAMETERS. The functional instruction contains more parameters than arerequired.

K:F–2105 ILLEGAL OPTION–SPECIFIED FILE.

K:F–2106 ILLEGAL IDCODE.

K:F–2107 EXPECTED TERMINATOR.

K:F–2108 PMC SERIES IS DIFFERENT FROMSOURCE–PROGRAM.

K:F–2109 EXPECTED IDCODE.

K:F–2110 ILLEGAL PARAMETER(S).

K:F–2111 CREATE TEMPORARY FILE(S) INCURRENT DIRECTORY.

K:F–2112 NOT SPECIFIED ENVIRONMENTALVARIABLE ’TMP’.

K:F–2113 ILLEGAL NAME OF SET–UP FILE.

K:F–2114 NOT FOUND SET–UP FILE.

K:F–2115 EXPECTED ’/PC’ OPTION.

K:F–2116 ’XXXX’ EXECUTABLE FILE NOTFOUND.

K:F–2117 INPUT DATA ILLEGAL.

4.11K : MNEMONICCONVERSION

4.11.1Fatal Error




259


K:E–3100 ’XXXX’ FILE CANNOT EXECUTE.

K:E–3101 ’XXXX’ SYMBOL & COMMENTDATA BROKEN.

K:E–3102 CANNOT BE HANDLE DATA TYPE’%@2–C’.

The mnemonic of extended symbol ’%@2–C’ is converted when%%%FLSET.CNF is a FORMAT–A/B file.

K:E–3103 CANNOT CONVERT FILES OF THEPMC SERIES SET UP THE SYS-TEM.

K:E–3104 CANNOT OVERWRITE EXISTINGDATA.

K:E–3105 CANNOT SPECIFY BIT ADDRESSOF PARAMETER.

A bit address is specified in the byte address parameter of the func-tional instruction.

K:E–3106 CANNOT SPECIFY BYTE ADDRESSON BASIC INSTRUCTION.

A byte address is specified for the basic instruction.

K:E–3107 CANNOT SPECIFY OUTPUT MOD-ULE AT INPUT ADDRESS.

An output module is specified as the input address of the I/O moduledata.

K:E–3108 CANNOT SPECIFY INPUT MOD-ULE AT OUTPUT ADDRESS.

An input module is specified as the output address of the I/O moduledata.

K:E–3109 CANNOT SPECIFY THE ADDRESSPROHIBITED USING AS PARAME-TER.

A parameter prohibited address is specified as the address parame-ter of the functional instruction.

K:E–3110 CANNOT SPECIFY THE BITADDRESS.

K:E–3111 CANNOT SPECIFY THE BYTEADDRESS.

K:E–3112 CANNOT SPECIFY THE INPUT

ADDRESS.

An output prohibited address is specified as the output address

parameter of the functional instruction.

K:E–3113 CANNOT SPECIFY THE INPUTADDRESS WITH COIL.

An output prohibited address is specified for the coil.

K:E–3114 CANNOT SPECIFY THE ODDADDRESS.

An odd–number prohibited address is specified as an odd–numberaddress.

K:E–3117 EXPECTED A MULTIPLE OF 2. The system parameter contains a value that is other than a multipleof 2.

K:E–3118 EXPECTED A MULTIPLE OF 5. The system parameter contains a value that is other than a multipleof 5.

K:E–3119 EXPECTED ADDRESS. The basic instruction has no address.

K:E–3120 EXPECTED FUNCTION NUMBER.

K:E–3121 EXPECTED PARAMETER(S). The functional instruction has no parameter.K:E–3122 IDCODE NOT FOUND IN ’XXXX’.

K:E–3123 ILLEGAL ADDRESS. An invalid address or an address that cannot be specified is specified inthe symbol and comment data, or message data.

K:E–3124 ILLEGAL ADDRESS IN DATATABLE.

An invalid address is specified in the functional instruction data table.

K:E–3125 ILLEGAL ADDRESS OF PARAME-TER.

An invalid address is specified in the functional instruction addressparameter.

K:E–3126 ILLEGAL CHARACTER(S). The system parameter, t it le data, symbol and comment data, or mes-sage data contains invalid character data.

4.11.2Error




260


K:E–3127 ILLEGAL SOURCE–PROGRAMNAME.

K:E–3128 ILLEGAL MNEMONIC FILE NAME.

K:E–3129 ILLEGAL PARAMETER NUMBER. The system parameter contains an invalid data number.

K:E–3130 ILLEGAL TITLE NUMBER. The data number of the data identifier is invalid.

K:E–3131 ILLEGAL VALUE. The system parameter contains an invalid value.

K:E–3132 ILLEGAL VALUE IN BASE DATA. An invalid value is specified in the base data of the I/O module data.

K:E–3133 ILLEGAL VALUE IN GROUP DATA. An invalid value is specified in the group data of the I/O module data.

K:E–3134 ILLEGAL VALUE IN SLOT DATA. An invalid value is specified in the slot data of the I/O module data.

K:E–3135 ILLEGAL VALUE OF PARAMETER. An invalid value is specified in the data table of the functional instruc-tion.

K:E–3136 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHAR-ACTER(S).

K:E–3137 INPUT MNEMONIC FILE NAME.

K:E–3138 INPUT SOURCE–PROGRAMNAME.

K:E–3139 INVALID A NUMBER OF CONVERTDATA.

K:E–3140 INVALID FUNCTION’S NAME. An unsupported functional instruction is specified.

K:E–3141 INVALID FUNCTION NUMBER.

K:E–3142 INVALID MODULE NAME. The module name of the I/O module data is invalid.

K:E–3143 RETURN STATUS FROM SPAWN ISE2BIG(=7).

K:E–3144 INVALID PMC SERIES OF SPECI-FIED SOURSE–PROGRAM.

K:E–3145 INVALID QUALIFIER. The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, ladder,or I/O module data is followed by an invalid character.

K:E–3146 LACK OF XXXX FILE.K:E–3147 MESSAGE DATA TOO LARGE.

K:E–3148 MNEMONIC FILE NOT FOUND.

K:E–3149 NOT ENOUGH PARAMETER(S). Required system or functional instruction parameters are not speci-fied.

K:E–3150 NOT FOUND BASE DATA. The base data of the I/O module is not found.

K:E–3151 NOT FOUND GROUP DATA. The group data of the I/O module is not found.

K:E–3152 NOT FOUND MODULE NAME. The module name of the I/O module is not found.

K:E–3153 NOT FOUND SLOT DATA. The slot data of the I/O module is not found.

K:E–3154 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ PROCESSINTERFACE FILE.

K:E–3155 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ SOURCE– PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FILE.

K:E–3156 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ SUB PRO-GRAM FILE.

K:E–3157 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS. The address of the mnemonic data or I/O module data is specif ied.

K:E–3158 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS IN DATATABLE.

An out–of–range address is specified in the functional instructiondata table.

K:E–3159 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS OFADDRESS.

An out–of–range address is specified as a message setting address.




261


K:E–3160 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS OFPARAMETER.

An out–of–range address is specified in the functional instructionparameter.

K:E–3161 OUT OF PARAMETER VALUE. An out–of–range value is specified in the functional instructionparameter.

K:E–3162 OUT OF VALUE. An out–of–range value is specified in the system parameter.

K:E–3163 OUT OF VALUE IN BASE DATA. An out–of–range value is specified in the base data of the I/O moduledata.

K:E–3164 OUT OF VALUE IN DATA TABLE. An out–of–range value is specified in the functional instruction datatable.

K:E–3165 OUT OF VALUE IN GROUP DATA. An out–of–range value is specified in the group data of the I/O moduledata.

K:E–3166 OUT OF VALUE IN SLOT DATA. An out–of–range value is specified in the slot data of the I/O moduledata

K:E–3167 PLEASE SHORTEN FILE NAME.

K:E–3168 PROCESS ERROR.

K:E–3172 SOURCE–PROGRAM NOT FOUND.

K:E–3173 SPECIFIED CONVERT DATA NOT

FOUND.(XXXX)

K:E–3174 SPECIFY THE VALUE(SLOT)EXCEPT 0 AT I/O UNIT–B ’XXXX’.

K:E–3176 SYMBOL DATA COUNT OVER.

K:E–3177 SYMBOL DATA NOT FOUND. Although comment data exists, there is no symbol data.

K:E–3178 SYMBOL OR COMMENT DATANOT FOUND.

Only symbol or comment data was converted to the address.

K:E–3179 THE SAME GROUP,BASE,ANDSLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED.

The group, base, and slot data of the I/O module data all have thesame number.

K:E–3181 TOO LONG STRINGS. The length of the system parameter, message data, or title dataexceeds the maximum.

K:E–3187 TOO MANY CHARACTERS IN 1LINE. The number of characters entered on a line of the system parameter,message data, title data, symbol and comment mnemonic data, mne-monic data, or I/O module data exceeds the limit.

K:E–3188 TOO MANY PARAMETERS. The functional instruction contains more parameters than arerequired.

K:E–3189 TOTAL VALUE OF BASE AND SLOTIS OVER.

The sum of the base data and slot data values of the I/O module dataexceeds the maximum.

K:E–3190 UNDEFINED INSTRUCTION. The data contains an undef ined instruct ion.

K:E–3191 UNEXPECTED ADDRESS. An address is specif ied in a location where it is not required.

K:E–3192 UNEXPECTED PARAMETER(S). A parameter is specified for an instruction that requires no parame-ters.

K:E–3193 UNKNOWN DATA NUMBER. A nonexistent data number is specif ied for a system parameter or

data identifier.K:E–3194 DATA ENTRY ERROR. An attempt to register symbol and comment data failed.

K:E–3195 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHAR-ACTER(S) IN SYMBOL DATA.

The symbol data contains a double–byte character. Double–bytecharacters cannot be used in symbol data.




262


K:W–4100 COMMENT DATA NOT FOUND. Only symbol data was converted to the address.

K:W–4101 DATA NOT FOUND. The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, mes-sage data, or I/O module data does not exist.

K:W–4102 DELETED KANJI CHARACTERS.

K:W–4103 EXPECTED CONTROL CONDITION(S).

No control condition is specified for the functional instruction.

K:W–4104 ILLEGAL CHARACTERS ARE SPE-CIFIED AT ’XXXX’.

Invalid character data exists in ’xxxx.’

K:W–4105 ILLEGAL OP.PANEL(PARAMETER).PROCEED TO DISCOMPILEUSING ’NO’.

System parameter ’OP.PANEL’ contains an invalid value; the value isconverted to ”NO.”

K:W–4106 ILLEGAL SYMBOL. The symbol data is nonstandard (check level–1). (For FORMAT–Conly)

K:W–4107 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHAR-ACTER(S).

The message data contain a double–byte character.

K:W–4108 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHAR-ACTER(S) IN COMMENT DATA.

Comment data containing a double–byte character was convertedwithout the double–byte character conversion option (J option).

K:W–4109 LOGICAL OPERATED WITHUNUSED REGISTER(S).

An operation was performed using a register that is not registered inthe ladder data.

K:W–4110 LOGICAL PRODUCT REMAINS INREGISTER(S).

A register exists that has not been output to the ladder data.

K:W–4111 MESSAGE DATA INCLUDE KANAOR KANJI CHARACTERS AT’XXXX’.

Message data xxxx contains a double–byte or single–byte katakanacharacter.

K:W–4112 NOT ENOUGH CONTROL CONDI-TION (S).

Control conditions required for the functional instruction are not speci-fied.

K:W–4113 NOT FOUND DATA AT XXXXADDRESS.

No message is defined for address xxxx.

K:W–4114 NOT FOUND PARAMETER NUM-BERED XXXX.

K:W–4115 NOT FOUND TITLE NUMBEREDXXXX.

K:W–4116 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ PMC–OS FILE.

K:W–4117 NOT USED NET COMMENTPOINTER EXIST. XXXX

K:W–4118 OUTPUT UNUSED REGISTER(S).

K:W–4119 OVERWROTE EXISTING DATA.

K:W–4120 INVALID QUALIFIER. An invalid character follows the end code ”%” of the system parame-ter, title data, symbol and comment data, ladder data, message data,or I/O module data.

K:W–4121 REGISTERS OVERFLOW.

K:W–4122 SOME GARBAGE DATA AREFOUND AT END OF LADDERDATA.

During conversion to Format–B, data that does not belong to level 1to 3, or to any subprogram, is found. This indicates that there is datasubsequent to the last SPE.

K:W–4123 SPECIFY SAME GROUP,BASE,AND SLOT.

The group, base, and slot data of the I/O module data all have thesame number.

4.11.3Warning




263


K:W–4124 SPECIFY SAME NUMBER(GROUP)AT I/O UNIT–B AS I/O UNIT–A.

K:W–4125 SPECIFY THE VALUE(BASE)EXCEPT 0 AT I/O UNIT–B.

K:W–4126 THE FOLLOWING DATA OF ’XXXX’WERE DELETED, BECAUSE OF

EXCEEDING THE LIMIT.K:W–4127 TOO MANY CONTROL CONDI-

TIONS.The functional instruction is subject to too many control conditions.

K:W–4128 UNEXPECTED COIL(S). A coil was specified when not required by the funct ional instruct ion.

K:W–4129 UNEXPECTED CONTROL CONDI-TION(S).

A basic instruction was specified in a functional instruction for whichno control conditions are required.

K:W–4130 REDEFINITION OF ADDRESSDATA.

Two or more symbol definitions exist for a single address. When thestart code of the symbol data is ”%@2,” the symbol definition must notbe specified more than once. The second and subsequent definitionsare ignored. For information relating to the start code, see Section3.5.8.3.

K:W–4131 REDEFINITION OF SYMBOL DATA. The same symbol is specified for two or more different addresses.Symbols other than the first specified symbol are replaced by spaces.

K:W–4132 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR SYM-BOL DATA.

The character string length of the symbol data exceeds the maximum(six characters for FORMAT–A and FORMAT–B; 16 characters forFORMAT–C). The symbol data is replaced by spaces.

K:W–4133 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COM-MENT DATA.

The comment data length exceeds 30 characters. The commentdata is replaced by spaces.

K:W–4134 SYMBOL DATA ALREADY EXIST. Two or more different symbols are specified for the same address.(For FORMAT–C, an identical symbol may be specified in more thanone location.) Symbols other than that specified first are replaced byspaces.

K:W–4135 RELAY COMMENT DATA ALREADYEXIST.

Two or more different character strings are specified for the samerelay comment at the same address. (For FORMAT–C, an identicalcharacter string may be specified in more than one location.) Relaycomments other than that specified first are replaced by spaces.

K:W–4136 COIL COMMENT DATA ALREADYEXIST.

Two or more different character strings are specified for the same coilcomment at the same address. (For FORMAT–C, an identical char-acter string may be specified in more than one location.) Coil com-ments other than that specified first are replaced by spaces.

K:W–4137 COMMENT TITLE DATA ALREADYEXIST.

Two or more different character strings are specified for the samecomment title at the same address. (For FORMAT–C, an identicalcharacter string may be specified in more than one location.) Com-ment titles other than that specified first are deleted.

K:W–4138 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR RELAYCOMMENT DATA.

The relay comment data length exceeds 16 characters. (For FOR-MAT–C only) The relay comment data is replaced by spaces.

K:W–4139 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COILCOMMENT DATA.

The coil comment data length exceeds 30 characters. (For FOR-MAT–C only) The coil comment data is replaced by spaces.

K:W–4140 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COM-

MENT TITLE DATA.

The comment title data length exceeds 30 characters. (For FOR-

MAT–C only) The comment title data is replaced by spaces.




264


L:E–3100 NOT EXIST ’XXXX’ FILE. File xxxx does not exist.

L:E–3101 ROM ID UNMATCH ERROR The currently set cassette or module does not match the currentlyselected machine model.

L:E–3102 FILE OPEN ERROR The specified file cannot be opened.

L:E–3103 FILE READ ERROR The specified file cannot be read.

L:E–3104 FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the specified file.

L:E–3105 FILE CLOSE ERROR The specified file cannot be closed.

L:E–3106 INVALID RECEIVE DATA Data other than an ISO code has been received.

L:E–3107 TIME OUT ERROR No response was received within a specified period after the PC

issued an instruction. Check the destination’s power source, set-tings, cable connections and parameters (baud rate and stop bit), andwhether the contents of CONFIG.SYS are valid.

L:E–3108 ACCESS CANCELED Access has been interrupted.

L:E–3109 FILE–ROM UNMATCH ERROR The file contents do not match the ROM data.

L:E–3110 CONTROL CODE ERROR The control code is invalid.

L:E–3120 FIRST RECORD INFORMATIONERROR

The contents of the first record are invalid.

L:E–3121 ROM DATA CAN’T CONDENSEERROR

The ROM data cannot be compressed.

L:E–3122 PART OF ROM DATA INVALID The ROM file data is invalid.

L:E–3123 ROM FILE > ROM ERROR The ROM file exceeds the size of ROM itself.

L:E–3124 ROM FILE FORMAT ERROR The ROM file format is invalid.

L:E–3125 ROM PARITY ERROR OF APPOINTFILE

The ROM parity of the specified file is invalid.

L:E–3126 ROM COUNT ERROR The ROM count is invalid.

L:E–3150 ROM FILE OPEN ERROR The ROM file cannot be opened.

L:E–3151 WORK FILE OPEN ERROR The work file cannot be opened.

L:E–3152 WORK FILE INITIALIZE ERROR The work f ile cannot be init ialized.

L:E–3153 WORK FILE CLOSE ERROR The work file cannot be closed.

L:E–3154 S RECORD FORMAT ERROR The S record format is invalid.

L:E–3155 WORK FILE SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed for the work file.

L:E–3156 WORK FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the work file.

L:E–3157 ROM FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the ROM file.

L:E–3158 WORK FILE READ ERROR The work file cannot be read.

L:E–3159 ROM FILE READ ERROR The ROM file cannot be read.

L:E–3160 ROM FILE FORMAT ERROR The ROM file format is invalid.

L:E–3180 ROM SET ERROR The EROM is mounted improperly.

L:E–3181 DIAGNOSIS ERROR An error was detected during EROM diagnosis.

L:E–3182 EROM OUT LEVEL ERROR The EROM is faulty.

L:E–3183 COMPARE ERROR The EROM data does not match the ROM file contents.

4.12L : INPUT/OUTPUT

4.12.1Error




265


L:E–3184 DATA FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written because the EROM is not deleted.

L:E–3185 BLANK CHECK ERROR The EROM is not yet deleted.

L:E–3186 DATA SEND ERROR The number of data items is invalid.

L:E–3187 PARITY ERROR A parity error occurred during data transmission.

L:E–3188 ROM WRITER IS OCCAPIED The writer is in use.

L:E–3189 ROM TYPE ERROR The ROM type is invalid.

L:E–3190 COMPARE ERROR ADDRESS = ,INPUT DATA = , FILE DATA =

L:E–3191 ’FLIO _AT.DAT’ FILE FORMATERROR. HIT ANY KEY.

The format of the FLIO_AT.DAT file is invalid.

L:E–3192 MEMORY CARD ERROR An error occurred during memory card format conversion.

L:E–3193 NUMBER ERROR OF INPUTPARAMETER

An error occurred during memory card format conversion.

L:E–3194 NO.3 PARAMETER ERROR The third parameter specif ied for memory card format conversion isinvalid.

L:E–3195 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conver-sion.

L:E–3196 NO.4 PARAMETER ERROR The fourth parameter specified for memory card format conversion isinvalid.

L:E–3197 INVALID PMC TYPE The activated machine is other than a model that can performmemory card format conversion.

L:E–3198 INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OFCASSETTE SIZE)

The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (thecount falls outside the allowable range).

L:E–3199 INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OFFILE SIZE)

The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the filesize falls outside the allowable range).

L:E–3200 PMC TYPE FILE READ ERROR The machine model setting file cannot be read.

L:E–3201 INITIALIZE ERROR Memory card format conversion cannot be initialized.

L:E–3202 NOT EXIST FILE The memory card format conversion file does not exist.

L:E–3203 FILE READ ERROR The memory card format conversion file cannot be read.

L:E–3204 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to activate memory cardformat conversion.

L:E–3205 OUT OF MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conver-sion.

L:E–3206 NOT MAKE FILE The memory card format conversion file cannot be created.

L:E–3207 NOT OPEN WORK FILE The work file for memory card format conversion cannot be opened.

L:E–3208 CONVERT TABLE MAKE ERROR An error occurred upon creating a conversion table for memory cardformat conversion.

L:E–3209 PMC TYPE I/O ERROR An I/O error occurred for the machine model setting file.

L:E–3210 BREAK PMC TYPE FILE The machine model setting file was destroyed during an I /O opera-tion.

L:E–3211 IMPOSSOBLE PROSESS ERROR The child process cannot be executed.L:E–3212 ROM FILE TYPE ERROR The ROM file format is invalid.

L:E–3213 FILE SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed for the specified file.



L:E–3216 NOT EXIST SOURCE CONVERTFILE

The source file for which format conversion is to be performed doesnot exist.

L:E–3217 INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OFROM SIZE)

The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (theROM size falls outside the allowable range).




266


L:E–3218 FILE SIZE GAIN ERROR The file size cannot be obtained.

L:E–3219 FILE SIZE CHANGE ERROR The file size cannot be changed.

L:E–3220 DATA SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed in the file data section.

L:E–3221 ROM INFORMATION ERROR Data cannot be written to the ROM file data section.


L:E–3223 OBJECT FILE I/O ERROR An I/O error occurred in the object file.

L:E–3224 DATA MAX OVER The data exceeds the maximum allowable size.

L:E–3225 DATA SIZE IS LESS THAN ROMSIZE

Execution cannot be continued because the data size is smaller thanthat of the count.

L:E–3226 INVALID DATA SIZE OF MEMORYCARD

The size of the memory card data section is invalid.

L:E–3227 INVALID MEMORY CARD FILE The memory card file is invalid (the identification data is invalid).

L:E–3228 INVALID ROM COUNT IN ROM FILE The ROM count in the ROM file is invalid.

L:E–3229 ROM PARITY ERROR The parity value in the ROM file is invalid.

L:E–3230 PARAMETER ERROR(MEMORY CARD TYPE)

An invalid parameter exists (memory card format).

L:E–3300 ERROR OF INPUT FILE NAME(1ST FILE NAME) The name of the source file for which format conversion is to be per-formed is invalid.

L:E–3301 ERROR OF INPUT FILE NAME(2ND FILE NAME)

The name of the destination file for source file conversion is invalid.

L:E–3302 ERROR OF INPUT FILE NAME(1ST/2ND FILE NAME)

The source and destination file names are both invalid.

L:E–3303 CANNOT EXECUTE CONVERSION The child process cannot be executed.

L:E–3304 INVALID PMC NAME The machine model name cannot be determined.

L:E–3306 MEMORY CARD FILE DOES NOTEXIST

The MCARD format file does not exist.

L:E–3320 THE NUMBER OF PARAMERTERSIN FILE ARE WRONG

The number of parameters specified in the text file is invalid.

L:E–3321 ERROR OF FUNCTION NO. The function number is invalid.L:E–3322 FILE DOES NOT EXIST The file does not exist.

L:E–3323 ERROR OF MEMORY ALLOCATION There is insufficient memory.

L:E–3324 ’LF’ DOES NOT EXIST No line feed code exists.

L:E–3325 CANNOT SEARCH STRING INTEXT FILE

The search character string is not found in the text file.

L:E–3326 ERROR OF PORT SET COUNT The specified number of ports is invalid.

L:E–3328 THERE ARE MORE PARAMETERSIN TEXT FILE IT IS NEEDED

The text file contains too many parameters.

L:E–3329 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND(FOR MORE THAN 128BITES)

The MODE command cannot be executed (the specified argumentis longer than 128 bites).

L:E–3330 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND(COULD NOT FILD COMMANDINTERPRETER)

The MODE command cannot be executed (the command interpreteris not found).

L:E–3331 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND(FOR INVALID COMMAND INTER-PRETER)

The MODE command cannot be executed (the command interpreterformat is invalid).

L:E–3332 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND(FOR FEW MEMORIES)”

The MODE command cannot be executed (there is insufficientmemory).

L:E–3333 INVALID ’PORT NO.’ IN TEXT FILE ’Port No.’ in the text file is invalid.

L:E–3334 INVALID ’BAUD RATE’ IN TEXT FILE ’Baud Rate’ in the text file is invalid.

L:E–3335 INVALID ’PARITY’ IN TEXT FILE ’Parity’ in the text file is invalid.




267


L:E–3336 INVALID ’DATA BITS’ IN TEXT FILE ’Bit Length’ in the text file is invalid.

L:E–3337 INVALID ’STEP BITS’ IN TEXT FILE ’Stop Bit’ in the text file is invalid.

L:E–3338 INVALID ’X PARAMETER’ IN TEXTFILE

’X Parameter’ in the text file is invalid.

L:E–3339 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND The MODE command cannot be executed.

L:E–3340 PORT INITIALIZE IS COMPLETEEND The port has been successfully initialized.

L:E–3341 TEMPORARY FILE FORMATERROR

The temporary file format is invalid.

L:E–3342 COULD NOT DELETE TMPORARYFILE(FOR INVALID PASS NAME)

The work file cannot be deleted (the pathname is invalid).

L:E–3343 COULD NOT DELETE TMPORARYFILE(FOR COULD NOT FIND FILE)

The work file cannot be deleted (the specified file is not found).

L:E–3344 UNKNOWN PMC TYPE The specified machine model is an undefined PMC model.

L:E–3345 PORT INITIALIZE ERROR Port initialization failed.

L:E–3350 PORT ERROR(OVER RUN) A port overrun occurred (detected by the I/O port status check).

L:E–3351 PORT ERROR(PARTY) A parity error occurred (detected by the I/O port status check).

L:E–3352 PORT ERROR(FRAMING) A framing error occurred (detected by the I/O port status check).

L:E–3353 PORT ERROR(BREAK INTERRUPT)

A break interrupt error occurred (detected by the I/O port statuscheck).

L:E–3354 PORT ERROR(TIME OUT)

A time out error occurred (detected by the I/O port status check).

L:E–3355 PORT ERROR(DATA OUTPUT)

A data transmission error occurred (detected by the I/O port statuscheck).

L:E–3356 TIMER SET/CANCEL ERROR The system timer is invalid. Change the data in the text file(FLIO_AT.DAT). For details, see the comment section ofFLIO_AT.DAT.

L:E–3400 ILLEGAL XXXX PROGRAM NAME. – Unpermitted character is used in specified program name. – The program name is over 8 characters.

L:E–3401 SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE ISDIFFERENT. Format–A/B source program is specified. Specify Format–C sourceprogram.

L:E–3402 XXXX FILE I/O ERROR.

L:E–3403 UNKNOWN PMC SERIES. Specified source program’s PMC type is unknown.

L:E–3404 XXXX DIRECTORY DOES NOTEXIST.

Specified directory for backup does not exist.


L:E–3501 INPUT PARAMETER COUNTERROR

The number of input parameters is invalid.

L:E–3502 INPUT PARAMETER MACHINELABEL NAME ERROR

The machine model label of the input parameter is invalid.

L:E–3503 DATA FILE OPEN ERROR The data file cannot be opened.

L:E–3504 DATA FILE READ ERROR The data file cannot be read.L:E–3505 CONVERT SOURCE FILE OPEN

ERRORThe source file for which format conversion is to be performed cannotbe opened.

L:E–3506 CONVERT OBJECT FILE OPENERROR

The destination file for source file conversion cannot be opened.

L:E–3507 PARAMETER COUNT ERROR INDATA FILE

The number of parameters specified in the data file is invalid.

L:E–3508 PARAMETER ERROR IN DATA FILE The data file contains an invalid parameter.

L:E–3509 INVALID DATA FILE INFORMATION The contents of the data file are invalid.




268


L:E–3510 CONVERT SOURCE FILE READERROR

The source file cannot be read.

L:E–3511 MEMORY ALLOCATE ERROR There is insufficient memory to continue processing.

L:E–3512 CONVERT SOURCE FILE FORMATERROR

The ROM file format is invalid.

L:E–3513 CONVER OBJECT FILE WRITE

ERROR

Data cannot be written to the destination file.

L:E–3514 DATA FILE DOSN’T EXIST The data file does not exist.

L:E–3515 COCNVERT CANCEL Conversion has been canceled.

L:E–3516 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to continue processing.


L:E–3601 INPUT PARAMETER COUNTERROR

The number of input parameters is invalid.

L:E–3602 INPUT PARAMETER MACHINELABEL NAME ERROR

The machine model label for the input parameter is invalid.

L:E–3603 DATA FILE OPEN ERROR The data file cannot be opened.

L:E–3604 DATA FILE READ ERROR The data file cannot be read.

L:E–3605 CONVERT SOURCE FILE OPENERROR

The source file cannot be opened.

L:E–3606 CONVERT OBJECT FILE OPENERROR

The destination file cannot be opened.

L:E–3607 PARAMETER COUNT ERROR INDATA FILE

The number of parameters specified in the data file is invalid.

L:E–3608 PARAMETER ERROR IN DATA FILE The data file contains an invalid parameter.

L:E–3609 INVALID DATA FILE INFORMATION The contents of the data file are invalid.

L:E–3610 CONVERT SOURCE FILE READERROR

The source file cannot be read.

L:E–3611 MEMORY ALLOCATE ERROR There is insufficient memory to continue processing.

L:E–3612 CONVERT SOURCE FILE FORMAT

ERROR

The ROM file format is invalid.

L:E–3613 CONVER OBJECT FILE WRITEERROR

Data cannot be written to the destination file.

L:E–3614 DATA FILE DOSN’T EXIST The data file does not exist.

L:E–3615 COCNVERT CANCEL Conversion has been canceled.

L:E–3516 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to continue processing.

L:E–3617 SUM CHECK ERROR OF SRECORD

The S record check sum is erroneous.

L:E–3618 FORMAT ERROR OF S0 RECORD The S0 record format is invalid.

L:E–3619 PMC TYPE CODE ERROR The machine model code for the S0 record is invalid.

L:E–3620 DATA CONVERT ERROR A data conversion error occurred.

L:E–3621 FORMAT ERROR OF S RECORD The S record format is invalid.

L:E–3622 PMC ADDRESS ERROR The specified PMC address falls outside the allowable range.

L:E–3700 NUMBER ERROR OF INPUTPARAMETER

An error occurred during memory card format conversion.

L:E–3701 NO.3 PARAMETER ERROR The third parameter specif ied for memory card format conversion isinvalid.

L:E–3702 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conver-sion.

L:E–3703 NO.4 PARAMETER ERROR The fourth parameter specified for memory card format conversion isinvalid.




269


L:E–3704 INVALID PMC TYPE The activated machine is other than a model that supports memorycard format conversion.

L:E–3705 INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF CASSETTE SIZE)

The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (thecount falls outside the allowable range).

L:E–3706 INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF FILE SIZE)

The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the filesize falls outside the allowable range).

L:E–3707 PMC TYPE FILE READ ERROR The machine model setting file cannot be read.

L:E–3708 INITIALIZE ERROR Memory card format conversion cannot be initialized.

L:E–3709 NOT EXIST FILE The memory card format conversion file does not exist.

L:E–3710 FILE READ ERROR The memory card format conversion file cannot be read.

L:E–3711 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to activate memory cardformat conversion.

L:E–3712 OUT OF MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conver-sion.

L:E–3713 NOT MAKE FILE The memory card format conversion file cannot be created.

L:E–3714 NOT OPEN WORK FILE The work file for memory card format conversion cannot be opened.

L:E–3715 CONVERT TABLE MAKE ERROR An error occurred upon creating a conversion table for memory cardformat conversion.

L:E–3716 PMC TYPE I/O ERROR An I/O error occurred for the machine model setting file.

L:E–3717 BROKEN PMC TYPE FILE The machine model setting file was destroyed during an I/O opera-tion.

L:E–3718 IMPOSSIBLE PROSESS ERROR The child process cannot be executed.

L:E–3719 ROM FILE TYPE ERROR The ROM file format is invalid.

L:E–3720 FILE SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed for the specified file.



L:E–3723 NOT EXIST SOURCE CONVERTFILE

The source file for which format conversion is to be performed doesnot exist.

L:E–3724 INVALID ROM COUNT

(OUT OF ROM SIZE)

The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the

ROM size falls outside the allowable range).

L:E–3725 FILE SIZE GAIN ERROR The file size cannot be determined.

L:E–3726 FILE SIZE CHANGE ERROR The file size cannot be changed.

L:E–3727 DATA SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed in the file data section.

L:E–3728 ROM INFORMATION ERROR Data cannot be written to the ROM file data section.


L:E–3730 OBJECT FILE I/O ERROR An I/O error occurred in the object file.

L:E–3731 DATA MAX OVER The amount of data exceeds the allowed maximum.

L:E–3732 DATA SIZE IS LESS THAN ROMSIZE

Execution cannot be continued because the data size is smaller thanthat of the count.

L:E–3733 INVALID DATA SIZE OF MEMORY

CARD

The size of the memory card data section is invalid.

L:E–3734 INVALID MEMORY CARD FILE The memory card file is invalid (the identification data is invalid).

L:E–3735 INVALID ROM COUNT IN ROM FILE The ROM count in the ROM file is invalid.

L:E–3736 ROM PARITY ERROR The parity value in the ROM file is invalid.

L:E–3737 PARAMETER ERROR(MEMORY CARD TYPE)

There is an invalid parameter (memory card format).




270


L:W–4100 ROM PARITY WARING OFAPPOINT FILE, CONTINUE TOTRANSFER? (Y/N)

L:W–4101 ROM PARITY WARING OFAPPOINT FILE

L:W–4102 XXXX IS A PROGRAM OFDIFFERENT PMC TYPE.

Restoring program PMC type and system PMC type is not same.

L:W–4200 ∗ NORMAL END Processing ended normally.

L:W–4201 ∗ D _PROGOPT _DRAM UNMATCH The DRAM does not match.

L:W–4202 ∗ PARITY UNMATCH The parity does not match.

L:W–4203 ∗ CASSETTE SIZE = XXXX Cassette size = xxxx

L:W–4204 ∗ ROM COUNT = XXXX ROM count = xxxx

L:W–4205∗

THE LAST 120H BYTES OF THEOBJECT FILE ARE DELETED The last 120h bytes of the ROM file have been deleted.

L:W–4206 ∗ ADJUST OBJECT FILE SIZE TOROM COUNT SIZE

The ROM count is appropriate for the object file size.

L:W–4207 ∗ ADD OBJECT FILE SIZE(XXXX BYTE)

The object file size has been increased by xxxx bytes.

4.12.2Warning




271


N:E–3001 FLASH ROM WRITE ERROR

N:E–3003 FLASH ROM ERASE ERROR The F–ROM is faulty.Replace the F–ROM.Contact FANUC Service.

N:E–3006 FLASH ROM SIZE ERROR The size of the sequence program is greater than that of F–ROM.Increase the size of F–ROM.Try using the off–line CONDENSE function.

N:E–3007 FLASH ROM NOT EMG STOP The CNC is not in emergency stop status.Set the CNC to emergency stop status.

N:E–3008 FLASH ROM PROGRAM DATAERROR

The PMC sequence program has failed.Input the sequence program again.

N:E–3030 LADDER SIZE ERROR The sequence program is too large to be written to the PMC.Check the size of the sequence program.

N:E–3031 PMC CONTROL TYPE BSI (RA1). When the PMC control module type is RA1, on–line editing cannot beperformed.

N:E–3036 PROGRAM SIZE ERROR(OPTION).

The size of the sequence program exceeds the option–specified size.Reduce the size of the sequence program.

N:E–3037 PMC TYPE UNMATCH. The PMC type is invalid.Convert the machine model using the off–line function.

N:E–3038 NO OPTION (LADDER STEP). The ladder step number option does not exist.

N:E–3041 THE COMMUNICATION TO PMC IS

NOT READY.

Communication with the PMC has not been established.

Start communication with the PMC.

N:E–3042 AN ALARM OCCURS ON PMC. Processing cannot be continued because of a PMC alarm.Clear the cause of the PMC alarm.

N:E–3045 LADDER SIZE OVER (PMC)

ERROR STATUS = nn

The ladder program being edited is too large to be written to the PMC.Reduce the size of the ladder program.

N:E–3046 THE PROGRAM IS NOT

CORRESPONDING (PMC). STA-TUS=NN

The program being edited does not match that of the PMC.Load, store, or restore the program such that it matches the PMC pro-gram.

N:E–3047 AN ALARM OCCURS ON PMC

ERROR STATUS = nn

Processing cannot be continued because a PMC alarm is issued.Check whether the ladder data being edited is valid.

N:E–3048 LADDER DATA ERROR (PMC)

ERROR STATUS = nn

The program being edited does not match that of the PMC.Load, store, or restore the program such that it matches the PMC pro-

gram.

N:E–3050 INPUT INVALID An invalid value has been entered.Enter a valid value.

N:E–3051 OBJECT BUFFER OVER The sequence program is full.Reduce the size of the ladder program.

N:E–3054 COM FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the COM (SUB9) functional instruction is invalid.Check whether the usage of COM and COME (SUB29) is valid.

N:E–3055 JUMP FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the JMP (SUB10) functional instruction is invalid.Check whether the usage of JMP and JMPE (SUB30) is valid.

4.13N : ON–LINEMONITOR

4.13.1

Error




272


N:E–3056 END FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the END1, END2, END3, and END functional instruc-tions is invalid.Check whether these instructions have been entered in the correctorder.

N:E–3058 LADDER BROKEN Data cannot be updated because the ladder program has failed.Input the ladder program again.

N:E–3060 CALL CALLU FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the CALL and CALLU functional instructions is invalid.Enter these instructions in the second ladder level, or in a subpro-gram.

N:E–3061 COM FUNCTION MISSING(CALL,SP)

The CALL or CALLU functional instruction is specified between the COM(SUB9) and COME functional instructions.Do not specify CALL or CALLU between COM and COME.

N:E–3062 JMP FUNCTION MISSING (SP) Within the subprogram, the usage of the JMP (SUB10) functionalinstruction is invalid.Check whether the usage of JMP and JMPE (SUB30) is valid.

N:E–3063 SUB PROGRAM MISSING The usage of the SP functional instruction is invalid.Check whether the usage of SP and SPE is valid.

N:E–3064 SP NO. DUPLICATE The specified subprogram number already exists.Specify another subprogram number.

N:E–3065 SUB PROGRAM NOTHING No subprogram exists.Create a subprogram.

N:E–3066 END FUNCTION NOTHING The END functional instruction does not exist .Enter the END functional instruction.

N:E–3068 LBL COUNT OVER The number of labels exceeds the allowed maximum.Reduce the number of labels.

N:E–3069 LBL NO. DUPLICATE The specified label number is already in use.Specify another label number.

N:E–3070 LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPB) The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPB does not exist.Enter the LBL functional instruction.

N:E–3071 COM FUNCTION MISSING (JPMB) The JMPB functional instruction is specified between the COM andCOME functional instructions. This instruction cannot be used to per-

form a jump from between COM and COME.Do not insert JMPB between COM and COME. Or, enter the LBLfunctional instruction, together with JMPB, between COM andCOME.

N:E–3072 JMPB FUNCTION MISSING The JMPB instruction cannot jump to other than a subprogram.Ensure that it jumps to a subprogram.

N:E–3073 LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPC) The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPC does not exist.Enter the LBL functional instruction.

N:E–3074 COM FUNCTION MISSING (LBL) The specified LBL functional instruction is specified between COMand COME. This instruction cannot be used to perform a jump frombetween COM and COME.Do not insert LBL between COM and COME. Or, enter the JMPCfunctional instruction, together with LBL, between COM and COME.

N:E–3075 JMPC FUNCTION MISSING The JMPC functional instruction is specified in other than a subpro-gram.Specify the JMPC functional instruction in a subprogram.

N:E–3076 LBL FUNCTION MISSING (JMPC) The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPC exists in a levelother than the second ladder level.Enter the LBL functional instruction in the second ladder level.

N:E–3077 SYMBOL UNDEFINE The entered symbol is not yet defined.Enter a valid symbol name.

N:E–3080 LADDER ILLEGAL The ladder program is invalid.Input the ladder program again.




273


N:E–3082 ILLEGAL OPERATION An invalid operation was performed (e.g., an attempt was made tocreate a relay or coil in a functional instruction).Be careful to specify operations correctly.

N:E–3084 DATA TABLE COUNT OVER The number of data tables exceeds the allowed maximum.Reduce the number of data tables.

N:E–3085 EDIT BUFFER OVER There is no free space in the buffer in which editing can be performed.

Reduce the size of the net being edited.N:E–3090 RELAY OR COIL FORBIT An unnecessary relay or coil exists.

Delete the unnecessary relay or coil.

N:E–3091 ADDRESS BIT NOTHING The specified address is not found.Check the specified address.

N:E–3092 HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL The horizontal lines of the net are not connected.Connect the horizontal lines.

N:E–3093 FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL There is an invalid connection between functional instructions.Ensure that the connections between functional instructions are spe-cified correctly.

N:E–3094 RELAY OR COIL NOTHING No relay or coil exists.Add a relay or coil.

N:E–3095 VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL The vertical lines of the net are not connected.Connect the vertical lines.

N:E–3096 PARAMETER NOTHING No parameters are specified for a functional instruction.Specify the required parameters.

N:E–3097 ADDRESS NOT DETECTED No address is specified.Specify an address.

N:E–3100 NET TOO LARGE The net being edited exceeds the size of the editing buffer.Reduce the size of the net being edited.

N:E–3102 LARGE NET APPEARED The net is too large to be displayed.Reduce the size of the net.

N:E–3111 ERROR NET FOUND An invalid net exists.Correct the invalid net.

N:E–3113 FUNCTION NOT FOUND The specified functional instruction is not found.Check the number of the functional instruction.

N:E–3114 ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO Search for a funct ional instruction has been performed using thewrong number.Check the number specified for the functional instruction.

N:E–3123 ROM FILE OPEN ERRORERROR STATUS = nn

The MCARD file cannot be opened.Check whether the program name has been entered correctly. Alter-natively, the MCARD file may have been destroyed.

N:E–3124 SYMBOL FILE OPEN ERRORERROR STATUS = nn

The symbol file cannot be opened.Check whether the program name has been entered correctly.Alternatively, the source program may have been destroyed.

N:E–3125 ROM FILE READ ERRORERROR STATUS = nn

The MCARD file cannot be read.The MCARD file may have been destroyed.

N:E–3126 ROM FILE READ ERROR (VMEM)ERROR STATUS = nn

An error occurred when reading data from extended memory.Memory management may have been disabled.Reboot the personal computer.

N:E–3130 ROM FILE WRITE ERRORNOT ENOUGH MEMORY

There is insufficient memory to perform writing to the MCARD file.Memory management may have been disabled.Reboot the personal computer.

N:E–3131 ROM FILE WRITE ERRORERROR STATUS = nn

Data cannot be written to the MCARD file.Check the amount of free space available on disk, and the name ofthe program to be saved.




274


N:E–3132 NET COMMENT FILE OPEN ERRORERROR STATUS = nn

The net comment file cannot be opened.Check whether the program name has been entered correctly.Alternatively, the source program may have been destroyed.

N:E–3140 FAIL TO ALLOCATE MEMORY FORDATA TABLE CONTROL DATA.

There is insufficient memory.Reserve an area in conventional memory.

N:E–3141 FAIL TO READ FROM PMC DATA

TABLE CONTROL DATA.

An error occurred while reading data table control data from the PMC.

Check the connection with the PMC and whether the specifiedmachine model matches that of the connected PMC.

N:E–3142 FAIL TO WRITE TO PMC DATATABLE CONTROL DATA.

An error occurred while writing data table control data to the PMC.Check the connection with the PMC and whether the specifiedmachine model matches that of the connected PMC.

N:E–3143 THIS DATA TABLE GROUP ISWRITE–PROTECTED.

An attempt was made to change a value in a data table group, but thatdata table group is write–protected.First, check whether the correct data table group is specified, then setthat data table group to write–enabled status.

N:E–3144 ADDRESS NOT FOUND. The specified address is not found.Check whether the address is specified correctly.

N:E–3150 LADDER DIAGRAM HAS NOTBEEN MODIFIED.

An attempt was made to update or restore the ladder diagram whenit had not been modified.

N:E–3151 AN ERROR OCCURS IN THE LAD-DER DIAGRAM.

An error occurred in the ladder diagram.The system cannot switch to update or monitor.Correct the error in the diagram.

N:E–3153 TEMPORARY FILE LOAD ERROR.NOT ENOUGH PROGRAMMEMORY

There is insufficient memory.Reserve an area in conventional memory or on disk.

N:E–3155 PROGRAM READ ERROR.NOT ENOUGH PROGRAMMEMORY

There is insufficient memory.Reserve an area in conventional memory.

N:E–3158 LADDER DIAGRAM HAS BEENMODIFIED.

The system cannot switch to store or monitor because the ladder dia-gram has been modified.Update the ladder diagram.

N:E–3160 SELECTED PROGRAM IS

UNMATCH.

The specified program does not match that in the PMC memory.

Specify the correct program, or load or store the program such thatit matches the PMC memory program.

N:E–3161 TRANSFER WAS ABORTED. The user has canceled the transfer.If the storing of a program is canceled, the program in PMC memorymay be destroyed. Store the program again to load it into the PMC.If program loading is canceled, the program remains as is. If the pro-gram does not match that in PMC memory, load or store the programsuch that it matches the PMC memory program.

N:E–3162 NOT CONNECTED TO PMC.CAN NOT TRANSFER PROGRAM.

Communication with the PMC has not yet been established. Set upcommunication with the PMC.

N:E–3163 MISMATCH PASSWORD The entered password is invalid.Enter a valid password.

N:E–3164 TOO LARGE PROGRAM.

NOT ENOUGH PMC’S PROGRAMMEMORY

The size of the specified program exceeds that of the PMC program

memory.Check the sizes of the specified program and the PMC programmemory.

N:E–3167 INVALID PROGRAM NAME. The program name is invalid.Check the program name.

N:E–3170 CUT BUFFER SIZE OVER. The specified range is too great.Specify a narrower range.

N:E–3171 CUT BUFFER ALLOCATIONERROR.

There is insufficient memory.Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional memory, or ondisk.




275


N:E–3172 NET COMMENT CUT ERROR (nn). When nn = –1:There is insufficient memory.Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional memory, or ondisk.When nn = –2:The net comment file contains invalid data.Check the net comments using the off–line function.

N:E–3173 NET COMMENT COPY ERROR(nn).

When nn = –1:There is insufficient memory.Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional memory, or ondisk.When nn = –2:The net comment file contains invalid data.Check the net comments using the off–line function.

N:E–3174 NET COMMENT PASTE ERROR(nn).

When nn = –1:There is insufficient memory.Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional memory, or ondisk.When nn = –2:The net comment file contains invalid data.

Check the net comments using the off–line function.N:E–3175 NET COMMENT APPEND ERROR. The net comment file contains erroneous data.

Check the net comments using the off–line function.

N:E–3176 NET COMMENT DELETE ERROR. The net comment file contains erroneous data.Check the net comments using the off–line function.

N:E–3177 NET COMMENT DATA WRITEERROR.

The net comment file contains erroneous data.Check the net comments using the off–line function.

N:E–3178 NOTHING NET COMMENT DATA. The net comment file contains no net comment within the specifiedrange.Check the net comments using the off–line function.

N:E–3183 THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED. – On-line editing function and I/O menu functions are protected. Con-firm keep relay. – Data table control data screen is protected. Confirm keep relay.

N:E–3184 WRITE PROTECT. (NOT MDI MODENOR EMERGENCY STOP.)

PMC parameter is write protected.Set CNC mode to MDI or emergency stop, or stop the sequence pro-gram.

N:E–3185 WRITE PROTECT. (CHECK PWE.) PMC parameter is write protected.Set CNC parameter PWE=1, or stop the sequence program.

N:E–3186 WRITE PROTECT. (CHECK PWEAND KEY4.)

PMC parameter is write protected.Set CNC parameter PWE=1, or set KEY4=1, or stop the sequenceprogram.

N:E–3187 WRITE PROTECT. Signal status is write protected.Confirm keep relay.




276

Number Contents

N:E–3300 Signal trigger unavailable

[Cause] Trigger data on PMC side is invalid.

[Remedy] Please re–start signal trigger.

N:E–3301 Signal trigger buffer allocation error

[Cause] The memory is insufficient.

[Remedy] Please secure an extended memory, conventional memory, and the disk space.

N:E–3302 Reject signal trigger

[Cause] Online editor is selected.

[Remedy] Please re–start signal trigger after online editor was finished.

N:E–3303 Debug ladder is executing. Cannot execute signal trigger

[Cause] Signal trigger cannot be executed because debug ladder is executing on PMC side.

[Remedy] Please re–start signal trigger after debug ladder was finished.

N:E–3304 Signal trigger buffer size error

[Cause] The memory buffer for signal trigger on PMC side is insufficient.

N:E–3305 Signal trigger data unavail

[Cause] Signal trigger parameter is not corrected.

[Remedy] Please confirm the data of signal trigger parameter.

N:E–3310 Signal trace is unavailable

[Cause] Signal trace is not supported on PMC side.

[Remedy] It is necessary to exchange a system ROM of PMC.

N:E–3311 Signal trace parameter error

[Cause] Signal trace parameter is not corrected .

[Remedy] Please confirm the address of signal trace parameter.

N:E–3312 Signal analysis is executing. Signal trace cannot be executed

[Cause] Signal trace cannot be executed because signal analysis is executing on PMC.

[Remedy] Please re–start signal trace after signal analysis was finished.

N:E–3320 PMC parameter file read error.

[Cause] Fail in reading the PMC parameter file.

[Remedy] A hard error may occur. Please confirm following cases.a) Whether drive is ready.

b) Whether disk format is right.

N:E–3321 PMC parameter file read error. Specified file not found.

[Cause] The specified file is not found.

[Remedy] Please confirm whether the file name is correct.

N:E–3322 PMC parameter file write error.

[Cause] Fail in writing the PMC parameter file.

[Remedy] A hard error may occur. Please confirm following cases.

a) Whether drive is ready.

b) Whether disk is not write–protected.

c) Whether disk format is right.

N:E–3323 PMC parameter file write error. Specified path not found.[Cause] The specified path is not found.

[Remedy] Please confirm whether the file name is correct.

N:E–3324 PMC parameter file write error. Insufficient disk space.

[Cause] Insufficient disk space.

[Remedy] Please secure the disk space.

N:E–3325 PMC parameter file write error. File is write protected.

[Cause] The file is write–protected.

[Remedy] Please cancel the write–protect.




277

Number Contents

N:E–3326 Illegal PMC parameter file name.

[Cause] The mistake is found in the file name.

[Remedy] Please confirm the file name.

N:E–3327 This file format is not PMC parameter file format.

[Cause] There is a part of illegal format in the PMC parameter file.

[Remedy] Please confirm whether the file format is correct.

N:E–3328 Can not save.(Not EDIT mode.)

[Cause] PMC parameter file can not be saved if NC is not EDIT mode while Ladder is running.

[Remedy] Please put NC into EDIT mode. Or, please stop the Ladder.

N:E–3329 Can not restore.(Not emergency stop nor PWE = ”1”.)

[Cause] PMC parameter file can not be restored if NC is not stopping emergency or Parameter Write Enable (PWE) is not ”1” while Ladder is running.

[Remedy] Please put NC into the state of emergency stop and set Parameter Write Enable (PWE) ”1”. Or,please stop the Ladder.

N:E–3341 Step cannot be executed. Ladder program is running

[Cause] Step cannot be executed because the ladder program is running.

[Remedy] Please stop the ladder program.

N:E–3342 Block cannot be executed. Ladder program is running

[Cause] Block cannot be executed because the ladder program is running.


N:E–3343 Step cannot be executed. Signal trigger is executing

[Cause] Step cannot be executed because signal trigger is executing.

[Remedy] Please stop the execution of signal trigger function.

N:E–3344 Block cannot be executed. Signal trigger is executing

[Cause] Block cannot be executed because signal trigger is executing.


N:E–3345 Trigger cannot be executed. Ladder program is running

[Cause] Trigger cannot be executed because the ladder program is running.


N:E–3346 Scan cannot be executed. Ladder program is running

[Cause] Scan cannot be executed because the ladder program is running.


N:E–3347 Trigger cannot be executed. Signal trigger is executing

[Cause] Trigger cannot be executed because signal trigger is executing.


N:E–3348 Scan cannot be executed. Signal trigger is executing

[Cause] Scan cannot be executed because signal trigger is executing.


N:E–3349 Ladder debug parameter error. (Address %s?)

[Cause] In ladder debug parameter, trigger address is not correct.

[Remedy] Please confirm trigger address. N:E–3350 Ladder debug parameter error. (Count %s?, Min=1 Max=32767)

[Cause] In ladder debug parameter, trigger count or scan count is not correct.

[Remedy] Please confirm trigger count or scan count.

N:E–3351 Block execution aborted !

[Cause] Block execution is aborted by the following operations.

– Select Online editor

– Run the ladder program

– Enter or exit online monitor




278

Number Contents

N:E–3352 Address cannot be changed. Debug trigger is executing

[Cause] Trigger address cannot be changed because debug trigger is executing.

[Remedy] Please stop the execution of debug trigger.

N:E–3353 Count cannot be changed. Debug trigger is executing

[Cause] Trigger count cannot be changed because debug trigger is executing.

[Remedy] Please stop the execution of debug trigger.

N:E–3354 Count cannot be changed. Debug scan is executing

[Cause] Scan count cannot be changed because scan is executing.

[Remedy] Please stop the execution of scan.

N:E–3370 Signal analysis is unavailable

[Cause] Signal analysis not supports on PMC side.

[Remedy] It is necessary to exchange a system ROM of PMC.

N:E–3371 Signal analysis parameter error

[Cause] Signal analysis parameter is not corrected.

[Remedy] Please confirm the data of signal analysis parameter.

N:E–3372 Signal trace is executing. Cannot execute signal analysis

[Cause] Signal analysis cannot be executed because signal trace is executing on PMC side.

[Remedy] Please re–start signal analysis after signal trace was finished.

N:E–3373 Disable init for sampling

[Cause] Signal analysis cannot be initialized because signal analysis is executing on PMC side.

[Remedy] Please re–try parameter initialized after signal analyz was finished.

N:E–3374 Aborted signal analysis execution and initialize ?

[Cause] Signal analysis cannot be initialized because signal analysis is executing on PMC side by the keepmemory data of the old edition.



APPENDIX



B–62884EN/01

A. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUALPMC MODELS

281

A

Those functions which vary depending on the PMC model are describedbelow. Read this appendix in conjunction with Section 1.2.2.



A. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUALPMC MODELS B–62884EN/01

282

The system parameter editing screens for all of the PMC models areshown below. For a detailed explanation of editing, see Section 3.5.2.6.

(1) PMC–RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6

EDIT (SYSTEM PARAMETER) PMC–RB3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END


2) (UNUSED)

3) (UNUSED)

4) (UNUSED)


6) KEY ADDRESS :

7) LED ADDRESS :



PMC TYPE = RB3

(2) PMC–RC3/RC4

EDIT (SYSTEM PARAMETER) PMC–RC4 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END


2) LADDER EXEC : 100% (1–150%)

3) (UNUSED)

4) LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO : 50% (0–99%)5) LANGUAGE ORIGIN : 000000H


7) KEY ADDRESS :

8) LED ADDRESS :



PMC TYPE = RC4

A.1SYSTEMPARAMETERS

A.1.1

Editing



B–62884EN/01


283

The system parameter mnemonic formats for the PMC models are shownbelow. For information about the mnemonic editing function, see Section3.5.8.

(1) PMC–RB4/RB5/RB6

%@0↓

2 BINARY↓

3 NO↓

4 PMC – RB4↓

%↓

[EOB]


3. Whether an operator’s panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)

4. PMC model (PMC-RB4/PMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ) /

PMC-RB5/PMC-RB6 (STEP SEQ) )

Note When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used), specify the KEY address, LED address,

KEY image address, and LED image address as follows:

3 YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010↓

(2) PMC–RB3

%@0↓

2 BINARY↓

3 NO↓

4 PMC – RB3↓

7 100↓

%↓

[EOB]



4. PMC model (PMC-RB3)

7. Ladder execution time (100% (fixed))



3 YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010↓

(3) PMC–RC3/RC4

%@0↓

2 BCD↓

3 NO↓

4 PMC – RC4↓

5 000000

6 50↓7 100↓

%↓

[EOB]



4. PMC model (PMC-RC3/PMC-RC4/PMC-RC4

(STEPSEQ))

5. Start address of language program link control statement data

(0 or 800000 to 8FFFFF (hexadecimal))6. Percentage of language program execution time

(1% to 99%)

7. Ladder execution time (Always 100%)



3 YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010↓

A.1.2Examples of MnemonicFiles (Single–Format)




284

During linking, load modules created in the C language are linked witha ROM format file. The C language can be used only withPMC-RC3/RC4/RC4 (STEP SEQ)/QC/NB/NB2. Linking is notrequired when the C language is not used.

ROM

format fileROM

format file

Transferred

to the ROM

writers and

PMC

Link

Load modules

in C language

NotesThis function enables linking to be performed on a personalcomputer. In addition, with this function, an object and Clanguage load modules can be separately transferred to

and linked on the PMC (dotted line in the figure below).

Personal computer

PMC – RC3

C program development environment for PMC-RC (/RC3/RC4/QC/NB)

Link control statement

creation tool

Link control sourceC language source

iC286 (compiler)

BND386 (binder)

BLD386 (binder)

OJ386 (converter)

Intel hexadecimal

load module

HEX2SREC

(Note 1)

FANUC

distribution

library

FAPT LADDER

Object file

(MCARD file)

Convert

(Note 2)ROM format file

LinkROM format file

with C language

Object file

(MCARD file)

Convert

(Note 2)

Debug

ROM writer

A.2LINK



B–62884EN/01


285

Notes1 Intel hexadecimal load modules cannot be linked. Before

link operation, convert the file format by referring to theHEX2SREC User’s Manual.

2 With FAPT LADDER-II, ROM format files are no longerused. This means that a ROM format file cannot be created

by compile processing alone, conversion between an objectfile and ROM format file being required. A detaileddescription is given below.

(a) Using method of HEX2SRECIntel hexadecimal load modules cannot be directly linked. Performthe below operation before linking.

[Operation]

1) Execute HEX2SREC.EXE in response to the DOS prompt.Specify as follows:

C:\FLADDER\APPENDIX> HEX2SREC input-file-name output-file-name

2) Conversion is performed.

3) Check that specified file names have been created using the DIRcommand.

4) Specify an output file name (for example, SAMPLE.SR) as theload module file name for linking.

NoteWhen the extension of an input file name is omitted, theextension “.HEX” is assumed. Output is directed to a filewith the same name but the extension is changed to ”.SR.”The specification of the following files has the same effectin input/output:HEX2SREC SAMPLE.HEX SAMPLE.SR

HEX2SREC SAMPLE SAMPLE.SR

HEX2SREC SAMPLE.HEX

HEX2SREC SAMPLE

(b) Converting between an object file and ROM format fileA ROM format file cannot be created by compiling a source program.

Instead, in the case of link processing, the following extra work isrequired.

· Before link processing: Conversion from an object file (MCARDfile) to a ROM format file

· After link processing: Conversion from a ROM format file to anobject file (MCARD file)

For the method of conversion, see 3.5.6.6.




286

(c) Starting link processing

[Operation]

1) Press F4 on the utility screen.

2) Then, the pop-up screen shown below appears. Pressing the Enter

key displays the link screen.

EXEC FILE NAME

i _lipmcr – p fl03400. tbl

↑

Model file name

Specify the model to be used for link processing, by changing themodel file name.The table below indicates the correspondence between the PMCmodels and model file names.

PMC model Model file name

PMC-RC3PMC-RC4PMC-RC4 (STEP SEQ)

fl03400.tbl (Initial value)fl04000.tblfl04200.tbl

3) The link screen appears.

Linker PMC–RC3 <0>[A:¥FLADDER¥]

1 EXEC 2 MAP 3 ERROR 4 P 5 I 6 7 8 9 10 END

Load module file name : A:¥DATA¥C–MODULE.SR

ROM format file name : A:¥DATA¥SAMPLE.#EX

Series Edition Machine tool name

NC & PMC name Program no.

NoteIf an invalid model file is specified, the status line of the linkscreen does not display a model name. In such a case,check the following:· When the newly entered file name is invalid

→ Enter a valid file name.

· When the specified model file is not installed

→ Install the model file.



B–62884EN/01


287

(d) Linking

[Operation]

1) Specify the load module file name and ROM format file name tolink. The load module file name must conform to DOSspecifications. Here the load module file name should bespecified with its extension (--------.***). (Specity an outputprogram name for HEX2SREC.)

2) Select [EXEC].(4) Termination

[Operation]

1) Select [END].




B. AUTOMATIC COMPILATIONAND DECOMPILATION B–62884EN/01

288

BAUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION

(1) Conditions for starting automatic compilation or decompilationWhen [ON–LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)] has been selectedfrom the initial menu, automatic compilation or decompilation isperformed according to the following conditions:

[Conditions/results]

The start conditions are determined from the results of comparing thetime stamps of the CONTROL and MCARD files for the sourceprogram. The conditions under which these files are updated and theresults of updating are described below.

[File updating conditions]

1) CONTROL file

The CONTROL file is updated once the source program has been

modified by using the off–line editing function.2) MCARD file

The MCARD file is updated once the source program has beeninput by using the off–line input/output function (for example,after being transferred from the PMC or converted from amemory–card or Handy–File format file), or once processing hasbeen terminated after modifying the ladder program by using theon–line function.

[Results]

1) When the CONTROL file has the most recent time stamp

→ Automatic compilation is performed.

[Applicable cases]

When no compilation is performed after the program isedited by using the off–line function

etc

2) When the MCARD file has the most recent time stamp

→ Automatic decompilation is performed.

[Applicable cases]

When no decompilation is performed after the program istransferred from the PMC by using the off–line input/outputfunction

When processing is terminated after the ladder program isedited by using the on–line function

etc

3) When both files have the same time stamp→ Automatic start processing is not performed.

[Applicable cases]

When compilation is performed after the program is editedby using the off–line function

etc



B–62884EN/01

B. AUTOMATIC COMPILATIONAND DECOMPILATION

289

NoteThe options applied to automatic compilation ordecompilation, started under the above conditions, arethose specified with [PROGRAM OPTION SETTING] of theoff–line function. Before attempting to select [ON–LINEFUNCTION], confirm the set options. For details of how toset options, see Section 4.5.7.



C. CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE B–62884EN/01

290

CCHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE



B–62884EN/01 C. CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE

291

“%%%FLSET.CNF” is a file of the text form and some setting parameters, by

which the behavior of system is decided, are described there.

The file exits in the directory in which the system is installed.

And the parameters can be changed by a text editor on the market.

Note%%%FLSET.CNF contains the set values used todetermine system operation. If data in this file is notmodified correctly, the functions described in this manualmay not be performed correctly. Do not, therefore, attemptto modify any data other than the items described below.

(1) Sample of “%%%FLSET.CNF”

;

; FAPT LADDER Initial Setting File

; ( ‘key word =’⇐

9characters);

;

*V; System information

;

verl=A08B–9201–J503 Version 01.0;

rights=Copyrigth (C) 1991–1995 FANUC LTD.;

*S; System Setup

;

editor =; Text Editor

;

ladkey = 1; Ladder editing key buffer size

; (1 ⇐ ladkey ⇐ 16)

;

IEC_SYM=2 1:Check symbol (level–1) for IEC standard; 2:No check

;

*U; Utility Information

;

N = UTILITY; Utility Guidance

;

F1 = Dos / command.com; [F1] Soft Key Guidance & EXE

F2 = flOadat / FLOADAT; [F2] Soft Key Guidance & EXE

F3 = View result / FLVIEW.BAT %p.err; [F3] Soft Key Guidance & EXE

F4 =Linker / i_lipmcr–pf103400b.tbl; [F4] Soft Key Guidance & EXE

F5 =; [F5] Soft Key Guidance & EXE


F7 =; [F7] Soft Key Guidance & EXEF8 =; [F8] Soft Key Guidance & EXE


F10=; [F10] Soft Key Guidance & EXE

;

[EOF]

C.1SYSTEMCONFIGURATIONFILE “%%% FLSET.CNF”



C. CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE B–62884EN/01

292

(2) Registering a command in the utility

(a) Function

A tool which is executed under DOS can be registered in the[UTILITY] function on the initial or off–line menu.

(b) Key word

Items “F5=” to “F10=” are displayed under“ *U ; Utility Information ” For these items, describe the

tool to be assigned to each function key. Do not modify currentlydisplayed characters, such as *U and F5=. If such a character ismodified, the system does not recognize the assignment.

(c) Format

F1 = Dos / command. com ; !

Tool name displayed on the utility screen

Characters to the right of ; are assumed to be a comment.

[F1] Soft Key Guidance & EXE

Registered tool

Delimiter between displayed name and command

Function key to which the tool is assigned

The maximum number of characters which can be used to specifythe tool name and registered tool are as follows:

Tool name : 70 characters(or 35 double–byte characters)

Registered tool : 40 characters



B–62884EN/01 D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

293

DCONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM



D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01

294

(1) Source program types

FAPT LADDER supports three source program types: FORMAT–A,FORMAT–B, and FORMAT–C, while FAPT LADDER–II LadderEditing Package supports only the FORMAT–C type.

Supported source program type

FORMAT–A FORMAT–B FORMAT–C

FAPT LADDER (NOTE) (NOTE) (NOTE)

FAPT LADDER–II


NoteThe supported source program types also vary with thePMC model. For details, refer to the relevant FAPTLADDER manual.

SAMPLE MANAGEMENT OF FORMAT–C

1) FORMAT–CThis source program type is used on Ladder Editing Package.

The FORMAT–C source program is organized by below files.

<A case of specifying “C:¥DATA¥PRG_C” as source program>

CONTROL Source program managing f ile

SYSPARAM System parameter data file

TITLE Title data file⋅

XSYMBOL.xxx Symbol & Comment data file (Note 1)

MESSAGE Message data file

IOMODULE I/O Module data f ile

LEVEL1.#LA First level ladder data file

LEVEL2.#LA Second level ladder data file

LEVEL3.#LA Third level ladder data file (Note 2)

Pyyy.#LA Sub–program ladder data file (Note 3)

Pzzz.#SS Sub–program step sequence data file (Note 3)

NETCMT.xxx Net comment data file (Note 1)

OPTION Setting of option

MCARD Memory card format file

C : ¥

data¥

PRG _C¥

Notes1 ’xxx’ is number of multi file managing.2 Only for use LEVEL3 ladder.3 ’yyy’, ’zzz’ is number of sub–program.

2) FORMAT–A

This source program type is only used on FAPT LADDER.The source program is managed using the following names. Asingle directory can contain two or more source programs.

D.1DIFFERENCES FROMFAPT LADDER




295

xxxxxxxx.#CN : File managing user programs

xxxxxxxx.#PA : File storing system parameters

xxxxxxxx.#TA : File storing the title data

xxxxxxxx.#SY : File storing symbols

xxxxxxxx.#C1 : File storing comments

xxxxxxxx.#C2 : File storing comments (reserve)

xxxxxxxx.#ME : File storing messages

xxxxxxxx.#IO : File storing the I/O module data

xxxxxxxx.#LA : File storing ladder

(xxxxxxxx is the specified source program name.)

3) FORMAT–B

This source program type is only used on FAPT LADDER.A directory is created with the specified source program name.In the directory, the program is managed under the followingnames. A single directory cannot contain two or more sourceprograms.

CONTROL : File managing the source program

SYSPARAM : File storing system parameters TITLE : File storing the title data

SYMBOL : File storing symbols

COMMENT1 : File storing comments

COMMENT2 : File storing comments (reserve)

MESSAGE : File storing messages

IOMODULE : File storing the I/O module data

LEVEL1.#LA : File storing ladder of the first level

LEVEL2.#LA : File storing ladder of the second level

LEVEL3.#LA : File storing ladder of the third level

Pyyyyy.#LA : File storing ladder subprograms

Pyyyyy.#SS : File storing step sequence subprograms

(yyyyy is a subprogram number.)

(2) Elimination of ROM format files

FAPT LADDER supports ROM format object files. Ladder EditingPackage, FAPT LADDER–II, however, does not use ROM formatfiles because an object file called an MCARD file (memory–cardformat file) is added to the source program. The data flow is outlinedbelow.Some FAPT LADDER operating procedures require the input of ROM format files. FAPT LADDER–II, however, does not require theinput of ROM format files.

1)

→

←

2)

CNC

Memory–card format file

Handy–File format file

Source file ROM format

file→

←

FAPT LADDER

External devices3)

4)

1) Compile 2) Decompile

3) Output (in ROM format) 4) Input (in ROM format)

(a) FAPT LADDER




296

3)

4)

1) →

← 2)

CNC

Memory–card format file

Handy–File format file

MCARD file

FAPT LADDER–II

External devices

1) Compile 2) Decompile

3) Output (in object format) 4) Input (in object format)

Source file

Each data file

(b) FAPT LADDER–II/Ladder Editing Package




297

When converting data created with FAPT LADDER for use with theLadder Editing Package, use a method that is appropriate for the dataformat, as described below.

[Data types]

– Source file of FORMAT–C

– Source file of FORMAT–A and –B

– Mnemonic format file– Memory–card format file

– ROM format file

(1) Source file conversion (with the backup function)

(a) FORMAT–CA file can be converted with the “Restore” of the backup function.For details of this function, see Section 3.5.6.5.All FAPT LADDER–II source files are of FORMAT–C type,allowing this method to be used for conversion.

(b) FORMAT–A/BFirst, using FAPT LADDER, convert a file of to FORMAT–Ctype. Then, perform program conversion as explained in (a),

above.(2) Conversion using a mnemonic format file

Convert a program to a mnemonic format file, using the mnemonicediting function of FAPT LADDER, before using the program.For details of this function, see Section 3.5.8.Note, however, that this method cannot be used to convert a stepsequence program. (See Section 3.5.8.6.)

(3) Conversion using a memory–card format fileConvert a program to a memory–card format file, using the FAPTLADDER I/O function of “Memory card,” before using the program.For details of the function, see Section 3.5.6.3.

(4) Conversion using a ROM format fileFirst, convert a ROM format file, created with a FAPT LADDERfunction such as the compile function, to a memory–card format fileby using the I/O function of “ROM format file.” Then, apply method(3), above.For details of the function, see Section 3.5.6.6.

D.2CONVERSION FROMFAPT LADDER




298

By changing the mnemonic file, it is possible to convert some PMC typesequence program to another type of it.

On the following PMC type, it is possible to edit the different PMC type

data by changing system parameter of the mnemonic data.

However, format of the system parameter, usable functional instructionsand range of address are different.

Conversion source(PMC)

Conversiondestination (PMC)

Remarks

PMC-RA1/RA2/RA3RB/RB2/RB3RB4/RB5/RB6RC/RC3/RC4

PMC-PA1/PA3/NB/NB2

→ PMC-RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6RC3/RC4

Step sequence datacannot be converted.

[Example: PMC–RB3 → PMC–RC3]

(1) Set the PMC type to PMC–RB3 and convert the original sourceprogram to mnemonic file.

(2) Change the system parameter of the mnemonic file to PMC–RC3with a standard text editor.

(3) Convert the mnemonic file(→(2)) to source program by the openCNC of PMC–RC3 model.

%@A

%@02 BCD

3 NO

4 PMC–RB3

7 100

%

%@1

01 ABC–KIKAI

02 S–DRILL

%

%@5

X000 1 0 1 ID16CY008 1 0 4 OD32A

%

%@E

Change system parameter

%@A

%@02 BCD

3 NO

4 PMC–RC3

5 000000

6 50

7 100

%

%@1

01 ABC–KIKAI

02 S–DRILL

%%@5

X000 1 0 1 ID16C

Y008 1 0 4 OD32A

%

%@E

Original file (PMC–RB3) Converted file (PMC–RC3)

D.3CONVERT THE PMCTYPE OF SEQUENCEPROGRAM

D.3.1Converting by SystemParameter Editing




299

Conversion source(PMC)

Conversiondestination (PMC)

Converterfile name

PMC-L/M/M (MMC)(FS0-T)


FS0T_CNV.SYM

PMC-L/M/M (MMC)(FS0-M)


FS0M_CNV.SYM

NoteA converter file is included under the APPENDIXsubdirectory on the system floppy disk (Vol. 5).

[Example operation: PMC–M → PMC–RB4]

(1) Set FAPT LADDER for PMC–M, then convert the program subjectto conversion to a mnemonic file. (→ A.)

(2) On the OPEN CNC of the PMC–RB4 model, convert the sourceprogram to a mnemonic file with the off–line function for“MNEMONIC EDIT”. (→ B.)

(3) Start your text editor (any commercially available text editor can beused.) (Specify the name of the mnemonic file created in (2) as theedit file name.)

(4) Replace the symbol data of the conversion destination mnemonic file(PMC–RB4) with the converter file (FS0T_CNV.SYM). (→ C.)

(5) Replace the ladder data of the conversion destination mnemonic file(PMC–RB4) with the ladder data of the conversion source mnemonicfile (PMC–M). (→ D.)

(6) Terminate the text editor, then start the Ladder Editing Package.(7) Convert the mnemonic format file created in (5), above, to a source

program.

(8) On the symbol editing screen, delete all symbol and comment data.

D.3.2Conversion Using aSignal AddressConverter




300

%@A

%@0

1 400

2 0

7 100

8 0

9 0

%@1

%

%@2

%

%@3

RD X21.4

WRT G121.4

RD. NOT X22.3

WRT. NOT G122.3SUB 1

SUB 2

%

%@4

%

%@E

A. Conversion sourcemnemonic format file(PMC–M)

%@2

G0000.0 G100.0

G0000.1 G100.1

G0000.2 G100.2

F0135.4 F275.4

F0135.5 F275.5

F0135.6 F275.6

F0135.7 F275.7

%

Converter file(FS0T_CNV.SYM)

%@A

%@0

2 BINARY

3 NO

4 PMC–RB4

%@1

%

%@2

%

%@3

%

%@4

%

%@5

%

%@E

B. Conversion destina-tion mnemonic formatfile (PMC–RB4)

C.Insertion

D.Insertion




301

Data (such as title, symbol & comment, ladder, message, and I/O moduledata) in a sequence program can be used for another sequence program,by the following method.

The range of addresses used varies from one model to another. They mayhave to be modified. Refer to the programming manual of the respectivemodels.

%@A

%@0

2 BCD

3 NO

4 PMC–RB

7 100

9 YES

%

%@1

%@2

X000 .0 ZPX. M

X0001.1 ZPY. M

%

%

%@E

Insert

%@A

%@0

2 BCD

3 NO

4 PMC–RC3

5 000000

6 50

7 100

%

%@1

%@2

X0000.0 ZPX. M

X0001.1 ZPY. M

%

%

%@E

[Example : Using the symbols & comment data of the PMC–RB for the PMC–RC3]

D.3.3Using Data in aSequence Program forAnother Program




302

This function is used to transfer data in ASCII (mnemonic) formatbetween a P–G (including the Mate and Mark II) and a PC via an

RS–232–C cable. [FLOADAT] is for IBM PC/AT.

(1) Uploading

Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the PC from the P–Gvia the RS–232–C port.

FLOADAT [name of file for storing uploaded data] –u (for IBM PC/AT)

When a file with the same name as the file specified for receiving dataalready exists in the current directory, the following message isdisplayed.

File is exist. Over write? <Y/N>

(2) Downloading

Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the P–G from the PCvia the RS–232–C port.

FLOADAT [name of file for storing downloaded data] –d (for IBM PC/AT)

As shown above, the load commands have the following twoparameters:

–u: Uploads data from the P–G to the PC.

–d: Downloads data from the PC to the P–G.

NoteThe above parameters can be specified with eitherlowercase or uppercase characters.

D.4TRANSFER FROMP–G

D.4.1

Function forTransferring Databetween the P–G andPC

D.4.1.1Command Input DuringStartup




303

PC side

IBM PC/AT series MODE COM1: 4800,E,7,2

(PC DOS MODE MODE COM1: 9600,E,7,2command) (for 9600 baud)

P–G side

IO NC,CN1,F1,F6

IO NC,CN1,F1,F6,BR10 (for 9600 baud)

Notes1 The baud rate can be set to either 4800 or 9600. However,

note that when the PC baud rate is set to 9600, theparameter BR10 must be added to the baud rate setting for

the P–G.2 It is necessary to set these communications setting only for

doing this operation. After using this function, pleaserestore the communications settings as the section 2.1(Chapter 1).

The CN number is not fixed. For the P–G or P–G Mark II, the CNnumber can be any setting from CN1 to CN4. For the P–G Mate, theCN number can be any setting from CN1 to CN3. However, note thatthe CN number selected here must match the CN number of the IOcommand. Use the cables specified in Appendix H.

Operation example

During uploading

Operation procedure Example of input and screen contents

<PC> <PG> Turn on power.

<PG> Enter IO command settings. IO NC, CN1, F1, F6 (, BR10)<PC> IBM PC/AT Series : Enter MODE command settings. (See Section 2 of Communications Settings)

<PG> Store transmission data in P–G memory. Press the [F2] key to select menu item no.2.

<PC> Execute FLOADAT. Enters waiting state. FLOADAT FILENAME –u

<PC> “LOADER START” is displayed.

<PG> Set [F6] ON. Select no.4 on the menu.

<PC> Select any entry from 1 to 7 on the submenu.

Begins transmission. <PG> “EXECUTING” is displayed.

Completes transmission.

<PG> Returns to the menu. <PC> “Operation Complete” is displayed.

<PC> The message “Operation Complete” is displayed,followed by the prompt “HIT ANY KEY”. Hit any keyto end operation.

“HIT ANY KEY” is displayed.

D.4.1.2CommunicationsSettings




304

During downloading

Operation procedure Example of input and screen contents

<PC> <PG> Turn on power.

<PG> Enter IO command settings. IO NC, CN1, (BR10,) F1, F6

<PC> IBM PC/AT Series : Enter MODE command setting. (See Section 2 of Communications Settings)

<PG> Turn on [F1] key. Select no.2 on the menu.Enters waiting state. <PG> “EXECUTING” is displayed.

<PC> Execute FLOADAT. FLOADAT FILENAME –d

Begins transmission. <PC> “Output Start” is displayed.

Completes transmission.

<PG> Returns to the menu.

<PC> The message “Operation Complete” is displayed,followed by the prompt “HIT ANY KEY”. Hit any keyto end operation.

<PC> “Operation Complete” is displayed.“HIT ANY KEY” is displayed.

During uploading

When the FLOADAT command is executed on the PC side, acommunications request is issued for the P–G and reception begins.After all data has been received, DC 3 is sent and transmission iscompleted.

1) DC 1 code is sent to the P–G (data transmission request).

2) Data is received.

3) Completion code is received and reception is completed.

4) DC 3 code is sent.

Transmission and reception both use the 1–byte machine–dependentBIOS call for input and output.

During downloading

After the P–G issues a transmission request, the P–G enters thewaiting state. FLOADAT is activated in the PC, then transmissionbegins. After all data has been sent, DC 4 is sent and transmissionis completed.

1) The P–G issues DC 1.

2) DC 2 code is sent to the P–G.

3) Data is sent.

4) DC 4 code is sent.

Transmission and reception both use the 1–byte machine–dependentBIOS call for input and output.

D.4.1.3Protocol




305

When the transmission speed is faster than reception processing, BUSYcontrol is performed by issuing the DC 1 and DC 3 codes. In the IBMPC/AT series, there is no X parameter, which effectively has the sameresult.

The system will automatically determine which of the following sevenpairs of start and end codes is used. When none of these codes are used,an error message is displayed and operation terminates.

Start code End code

1 %@A %@E

2 %@0 %

3 %@1 %

4 %@2 %

5 %@3 %

6 %@4 %

7 %@5 %

Notes1 The end codes shown here must appear at the beginning of a line.

In other words, strictly speaking, a data reception end code is

actually denoted by the sequence CR + LF + an end code. End

codes (% etc.) appearing within comments are ignored.)

(1) When an LF code (0AH) is received, it is converted into twocharacters, the first of which is CR (0DH) followed by LF (0AH).

(2) When a CR code (0DH) is received, it is discarded.

(3) When an end code (DE) is received, CR (0DH) and LF (0AH) areappended to it in that order.

Until a data start code (DS) is received, data is discarded.

. . . CR LF DS CR LF CR LF DS CR LFŸ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Valid dataŸ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

Discarded

After the end code (DE) has been sent or received, DC 3 is sent foruploading or DC 4 is sent for downloading, then the file is closed.

D.4.1.4BUSY Control

D.4.1.5Data Start and EndCodes

D.4.1.6Data Conversion (ReturnCodes)

D.4.1.7Transmission andReceive Data




306

This software detects the following four types of errors.

(1) When there is an error in the command line

Error in the file name, –u, or –d.

Parameter Error

FLOADAT FILENAME –u/–d set parameter. (FILNAME, upload or download.)

(2) When the specified file cannot be found

Output file cannot be found or file for receiving cannot be opened.

Cannot open output file

(3) When data not in the FAPT LADDER format is sent or received

Wrong data received

(4) When there is a definite problem with the start code,

Start Code error detected

or there is a definite problem with the end code

End code error detected

This software only detects errors in the command line and in the FAPTLADDER format.

This software does not support detection of errors in the contents of FAPTLADDER data.

Messages

When the file name specified as the file for receiving data already existsin the current directory, the following message is displayed.

File is exist. Over write? <Y/N>

D.4.1.8Error Detection andMessages




307

1. Incorrect entry found in the command line.

2. Specified file cannot be opened.

3. Data not in the FAPT LADDER format was sent or received.

The following causes can be considered for the above errors:

The end code has been omitted (% or %@E was omitted).

The start code has been omitted (%@*, where * is A or 0 to 5, wasomitted).

Garbage data exists at the beginning of the file.

Garbage data exists between each unit of data.

The file format is completely different from the FAPT LADDERformat.

When any of the above errors is detected, the current operation iscanceled.

During downloading, if an error is detected on the PC, the system willreturn to the DOS screen. At the same time, a %, %@E or other endcode is sent to the P–G to return it to the menu screen.

4. Others

When, for some reason, data transfer is interrupted

(When the power to the PC or P–G is interrupted during operation,etc.)

When data transfer is interrupted during uploading, the system willenter a waiting state until data transfer is restarted. (To interrupt the

waiting state, press Ctrl + C ).

When data transfer is interrupted during downloading, the databecomes corrupt and data transfer must be started over from thebeginning.

D.4.1.9Error Detection andHandling



E. STANDARD SYMBOL DATA B–62884EN/01

308

ESTANDARD SYMBOL DATA

When a mnemonic file and the standard symbol data are combined, it is possibleto use the standard symbol name provided by FANUC.

CNC TYPE DATA FILE NAME

FS16/18–T F16&F18–T. SYM

FS16/18–M F16&F18–M.SYM

NoteThe standard symbol data is stored in the directory APPENDIX of

system floppy (Vol. 5).



B–62884EN/01

F. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA(CHGMES)

309

FTOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)

This function is a tool(CHGMES) for easy changing the message dataincorporating sequence program of FANUC PMCs .

This tool extracts only message data from Handy file format file.

The message data in CNC(PMC) can be replaced with this extracted data,if both message data size are the same.

This tool is usefull when it is necessary to use some message data files inone ladder program.(For example: Supporting multi–lingual message.)



F. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA(CHGMES) B–62884EN/01

310

<Method of Message size Check>

1) Memory map information is output when the source program iscompiled.

Please check each symbol top address of the original changingladder and the ladder for changing to be the same value.

2) This tool for changing the message data execute with the“compare file”, then this tool execute the same check of the

message data size.1. PROCEDURE OF THE MESSAGE DATA CHANGING

1) Load the basic message ladder file of handy file format to the NCby using the memory card or floppy disk on the PMCinput/output operation ([I/O] screen).

2) Input the “CHGMES” command with the message data forchanging and dummy ladder file(handy file format).

3) The message data on the NC is changed by loading the output fileof this tool on the PMC input/output operation ([I/O] screen).

2. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

It is necessary to use following operating environment for this tool.

1) Memory

235Kbytes or more main memory is required when activatingthis function.

2) Temporary files

This function generates following temporary files for work areaon the drive/directory which is set by environmental variable“TMP” of DOS.

This function generate temporary files on the route directory of current drive when environmental variable “TMP” is not set.It is necessary to free max.65KBytes disk space for thesetemporary files.

$TMPD.T**, $TMPW.T** (**=00 to 99)

(These temporary files are deleted by this function

automatically.)3) Hard disk

It is necessary to use following disk space.

For installation 68KBytes

To generate temporary files 65KBytes

(In case of environmental variable “TMP”

of DOS set on hard disk)

TOTAL 133KBytes

3. INSTALLATION

Please copy EXE–FILE (_CHGMES.EXE) to any directory fromsystem floppy disk(Vol.5).

Key in “_CHGMES” on the installed directory, then following filesare generated.

CHGMES.EXE ⋅ ASC2IMG.EXE ⋅ IMG2ASC.EXE :Execute files (.EXE)

RB3DUMMY.SFM ⋅ RB3BASIC.SFM ⋅ RB3MES.SFM :example files(.SFM)



B–62884EN/01


311

Example files(.SFM) are used to confirm the installation of this functionby activating example command.

4. ACTIVATION

Key in following command at the DOS prompt activated in theutility.(No.9 of FAPT LADDER main menu).

Or,Please change the directory in which this tool is installed.

(It is not necessary to change the directory when the “PATH” is set.)Then key in following command.

CHGMES [INPUT FILE] [OUTPUT FILE] [PMC TYPE]

( [COMPARE FILE] ) Return

INPUT FILE : : A handy file format file that consists of adummy ladder and message data to replace themessage data in the basic message ladder file.Create this file by compiling the source file andconverting to a handy file format file usingFAPT LADDER.

OUTPUT FILE : : A handy file format message file created by thistool.This file contains only message data.By loading this file to the CNC, message data inthe CNC memory can be substituted.

PMC TYPE : : PMC TYPE (RB3 or RB4)Error will occur at key in other than appliedPMCs.

COMPARE FILE : :(Optional)

Basic message ladder file (Handy file format)Please refer to the Fig.“Operation outline”.This tool compares message size of the “INPUT

FILE” and the “COMPARE FILE” to determineif there is a match. Then, you can guarantee thatonly the message will be correctry replacedwithout crashing other data when you load the‘OUTPUT FILE’ to CNC.




312

<Outline of Operation>

Basic message ladder

Source format

program

COMPILATION

Object file

INPUT/OUTPUT (F4: Handy File)

Handy file format

file

FLOPPY MEMORY CARD

*3

Ÿ Ÿ

Ÿ Ÿ

(Note).

.

CNC

Message for changing+Dummy ladder

Source format

program

Handy file format

file

*1

FLOPPY MEMORY CARD

Ÿ Ÿ

OR

Only message data for changing of ROM fileLoading at [I/O]screen operation of PMC.

Handy file

format file

*2

Changing to message ROM data(Using this function)

↓ ↓ CHGMES [In. file] [Out. file] [pmc type] ([Comp. file])

*1 *2 *3

Object file

Generation, Editing

Check the SYMBOL top

address by memory map

display.

(Note)

NoteIt is possible to load by memory card only for FS16–B, FS18–B, FS–20, FS21–B, and FS15–B(PMC–NB).Please refer to the following manual about detailed operation of loading by the memory cardor handy file. It is not possible to load on boot screen.FANUC PMC MODEL PA1/PA3/RA1/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB4/RC/RC3/RC4/NBPROGRAMMING MANUAL (LADDER LANGUAGE) (B–61863E/06)



B–62884EN/01


313

5. USING EXAMPLE

Check the installation of this function by using the following example.

There are some sample files in system floppy disk for checking thisfunction.

RB3DUMMY.SFM : : Message data and dummy ladder file (Handyfile format)

(Message data (50KB)+Ladder(END1+END2))

RB3BASIC.SFM : : Basic message ladder file (Handy file format)(Message data (50KB)+Ladderdata+Symbol&Comment data)

RB3MES.SFM : : Data for checking the result (Messagedata(50KB))(This file is a normal output file, when this toolexecute for above sample data. It is possible tocheck result by comparing “OUTPUT FILE”and this file.)

Execute as the following (In this case the systemis installed in main body.)

1) Please key in the following command.

A:¥>CHGMES RB3DUMMY.SFM USERTEST.SFM RB3

RB3BASIC.SFM Return

You can specify any name for “OUTPUT FILE”. In thisexample,“USERTEST.SFM” is used.

2) Following file is generated on current drive.

USERTEST.SFM (Message data (50KB))

3) Check the result by using “FC/A”(DOS COMMAND).

C:¥>FC/A USERTEST.SFM RB3MES.SFMIf “NO DIFFERENCES ENCOUNTERED” is displayed, theresult is correct.

6. ERROR MESSAGES


chgmes : PMC type unmatch (pmc type) PMC type does not match between applied PMCs.

chgmes : PMC type unmatch (input file) PMC type of input file and key in PMC type do not match.

chgmes : PMC type unmatch (compare file) PMC type of compare file and key in PMC type do not match.

chgmes : Message sizes of (input file) and (compare file) aremismatched

Message size of input file and compare file do not agree.Please adjust the message size by adding some dummymessage to the input file. Please comfirm the MAP display on

the compile function of FAPT LADDER.chgmes : Cannot start ASC2IMG ASC2IMG.EXE does not exist not in the same directory of

CHGMES.EXE.

chgmes : Cannot start IMG2ASC IMG2ASC.EXE does not exist in the same directory ofCHGMES.EXE.

chgmes : Cannot make temporary file $tmpd.t**

chgmes : Cannot make temporary file $tmwd.t**

It is impossible to make temporary file.⋅ Disk is insufficient.⋅ It is impossible to set the file name, because $tmp*.t00 to

$tmp*.t99 exist.




314


chgmes : Cannot close file $tmpd (w).t** Temporary file cannot be closed.Please check the disk space.

asc2img :Cannot allocate memory (**bytes) Memory is insufficient. Please free up 235KB of morememory, and re-activate.

asc2img :Conversion area in input is conflicted Ladder header of the input file is crushed.Please re-make the input file, and re-activate.

asc2img : Unknown file type Illegal format of the input file. Please change the fomat, andre-active.

asc2img : (input file) : Record No.**has**********************

There is an invalid data of input file.Please correct as error message, and reactivate.

asc2img : Cannot open file There is no input file.

asc2img : Cannot close file It is impossible to close the file.Please check the disk space.

asc2img : Cannot write It is impossible to write the temporary file.Please check the disk space.

img2asc :Cannot allocate memory (**bytes) Memory is insufficient. Please free up 235KB or morememory, and re-activate.

img2asc : Cannot write It is impossible to write the output file.Please check the disk space.



B–62884EN/01 G. CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S

315

GCAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S

(1) Windows 3.11) SMARTDRV.EXE

When SMARTDRV.EXE is used with write caching enabled, payattention to the following:

Enable write caching SMARTDRV.EXE

Be careful especially when the AUTOEXEC.BAT contains acommand line of SMARTDRV.EXE.

[Symptom]

When SMARTDRV.EXE is used with write caching enabled, thefollowing symptom occurs.

The following alarm occurs during a read from the PMC orFA/PMC writer, disabling entry.

Alarm message : “Received data invalid”“OVERRUN”

[Measure]

When SMARTDRV.EXE is used, disable write caching for thefollowing disk drives:

a. Drive where the FAPT LADDER system exists

b. Drive where ROM format files are created

Example) When the FAPT LADDER system is on drive A, anda ROM format file is to be created on drive B

SMARTDRV a b → disable write caching fordrives A and B

Refer to the Microsoft Windows 3.1 Function Guide, supplied

from Microsoft, for detailed descriptions about how to useSMARTDRV.EXE.



H. DATA TRANSFER CABLES B–62884EN/01

316

HDATA TRANSFER CABLES

Use the cables below to transfer data from a PC to a CNC, ROM writer(FA writer or PMC writer), or P–G (P–G Mark II or P–G Mate).

1. For IBM PC/AT

9–pin female

connector

25–pin male

connector

25–pin female

connectorIBM PC/AT cable

25–pin male

connector

On–line cable

CNC, ROM writer, or P–G

IBM PC/AT

2. For IBM PS/2

9–pin female

connector

25–pin male

connector

25–pin female

connectorIBM PS/2 cable

25–pin male

connector

On–line cable

CNC, ROM writer, or P–G

IBM PS/2



B–62884EN/01 H. DATA TRANSFER CABLES

317

On–line cable (A08B–0031–K801/K802)

SD

RD

RS

CS

ER

DR

CD

SG

FG

SD

RD

RS

CS

ER

DR

CD

SG

FG

25–pin male

connector

25–pin male

connector

2

3

4

5

20

6

8

7

1

2

3

4

5

20

6

8

7

1

IBM PC/AT cable

CD

RD

SD

ER

SG

DR

RS

CS

CI

CD

RD

SD

ER

SG

DR

RS

CS

CI

9–pin female

connector

25–pin fe-

male con-

nector

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

8

3

2

20

7

6

4

5

22

IBM PS/2 cable

SD

RD

RS

CS

ER

DR

CD

SG

FG

SD

RD

RS

CS

ER

DR

CD

SG

FG

25–pin female

connector

25–pin female

connector

2

3

4

5

20

6

8

7

1

2

3

4

5

20

6

8

7

1



I. INQUIRY FORM B–62884EN/01

318

IINQUIRY FORM



B–62884EN/01 I. INQUIRY FORM

319

Company name

Person in charge

Address

Section

Phone No. ( )

Fax No. ( )

FANUC

sales person

No. Product name Ordering codeVersion

No.

Date of

purchase

1

2

3

4

5

[Usage environment]

Machine type used (PC) (Manufacturer: )

OS Version (Manufacturer: )

EMS board: Yes / No (Manufacturer: )

Other equipment (printer, etc.) (Manufacturer: )

Please print out the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files on a sheet and attach it to this form.

[Details of inquiry]

Please use this form when you have any questions about this product.



IndexB–62884EN/01

[A]A : Initial Menu, 238

About PMC Program, 10

About Symbol & Comment Data, 12

Automatic Compilation and Decompilation, 288

[B]B : Title Editing, 240

Backup of User Program, 218

BUSY Control, 305

[C]C : I/O Module Editing, 241

Cautions for Using the O/S, 315Change of Each Setting File, 290

Changing the Printer Specification, 194

Command Input During Startup, 302

Common System Operations, 35

Communication, 105

Communications Settings, 303

Compilation, 195

Compile, 221

Compile Options, 199

CONFIG.SYS, 26

Configuration and Installation of Package, 14

Conversion from FAPT LADDER, 297

Conversion of a Mnemonic File to a Source Program,226

Conversion of a Source Program to a Mnemonic File,224

Conversion of Sequence Program, 293

Conversion Using a Signal Address Converter, 299

Convert the PMC Type of Sequence Program, 298

Converting by System Parameter Editing, 298Converting ROM Format File, 220

[D]D : System Parameter Editing, 242

Data Conversion (Return Codes), 305

Data Start and End Codes, 305

Data Transfer Cables, 316

Decompilation, 202

Decompile, 222

Decompile Option, 204

Diagnose, 47

Differences from Fapt Ladder, 294

Directory Configuration after Installation, 25

Display System Information, 100

[E]E : Ladder/Step Sequence Editing, 243

Editing, 115, 282

Error, 239, 240, 241, 242, 247, 248, 249, 251, 256,259, 264, 271

Error (at Editing Ladder Diagram), 243

Error (at Editing Step Sequence), 244

Error Detection and Handling, 307

Error Detection and Messages, 306Error Message List, 237

Examples of Mnemonic Files (Single–Format), 283

Examples of Operation, 106

Executing or Stopping a Program, 91

Exit, 46

[F]F : Symbol & Comment Editing, 247

Fatal Error, 238, 243, 249, 251, 256, 258

File, 43

File Configuration, 28

File System, 28

Function for Transferring Data between the P–G andPC, 302

Function Overview, 5

Functions Specific to Individual PMC Models, 281

[G]G : Message Editing, 248

[H]H : Printout, 249

Handy File+3.5” Floppy Disk (MS–DOS Format), 216

[I]I : Compile, 251



Index B–62884EN/01

I/O Module Editing, 170

I/O Port Setting, 209

Input/Output, 101, 209

Inquiry Form, 318

Installation, 18

Installing the Software to Invoke from the DOS Com-mand Prompt, 22

[J]J : Decompilation, 256

[K]K : Mnemonic Conversion, 258

[L]L : Input/Output, 264

Ladder Debugging Function, 64

Ladder Diagram/Step Sequence Editing, 118

Ladder Monitor, 47

Ladder monitor, 47

Link, 284

Loading of Program, 101

[M]Memory Card Interface in the Personal Computer and

Memory Card, 212

Menu Structure, 33

Message Editing, 169

Mnemonic Editing, 224

Mnemonic File Format, 227

Modifying Program Option Initial Values (OP-TION.CNF), 223

Monitoring a Ladder, 106

MS–DOS, 45

[N]N : On–Line Monitor, 271

[O]Off–Line Function, 115

On–line editing, 53

On–Line Functions, 37

OPEN CNC System Configurations, 5

Operating Environment, 15

Operation, 30, 203

Output Item Setting, 176

Outputting to Split Files, 208

Overview of Operation, 33

Overview of the On–Line Functions, 37

[P]Package Configuration, 17

Password, 207Password Set Function, 200

PMC Alarm Status, 89

PMC Parameter, 76

PMC Programming Method, 10

PMC Status Window, 90

Print Format–1: SETUP Menu, 184

Print Format–2 (AMOFTRP, DAT/* .INF/MessageFile), 185

Printout, 174

Program Backup, 103Protocol, 304

[R]Registering the Software in the Windows [Programs]

Menu, 18

Restoring PMC Parameter, 44

[S]Sample Mnemonic Files (All–format), 233

Sample Mnemonic Files (Single–format), 229

Saving PMC Parameter, 43

Selecting Off–Line Function from On–Line Function,45

Selecting On–Line Function from Off–Line Function,236

Sequence Program Creation, 8

Setting Program Options, 220



B–62884EN/01 Index

Signal Analysis Function, 95

Signal Status Window, 73

Signal Trace Function, 92

Signal Trigger Function, 61

Standard Symbol Data, 308

Start and Terminate, 197

Starting and Ending Printing, 175

Starting the Ladder Editing Package, 31

Starting the On–Line Functions, 38

Storing to the Program, 102

Supported PMC Functions, 7

Symbol & Comment Editing, 165

System Configuration File “%%% FLSET. CNF”, 291

System Parameter Editing , 172

System Parameters, 282

[T]The Constitution of Source Program, 29

The Major Functions, 4

The Note if the Step Sequence Function is SelectedWhen Setting a Model, 234

The Overview of Ladder Editing Package, 4

Title Data Editing, 117

Tool for Changing Message Data (CHGMES), 309

Transfer from P–G, 302

Transfer to and from PMC, 211

Transmission and Receive Data, 305

[U]User Batch File Execution, 234

Using Data in a Sequence Program for Another Pro-gram, 301

Utility, 235

[W]Warning, 241, 250, 255, 257, 262, 270

Warning (at Editing Ladder Diagram), 246



R

e v i s i o n R e c o r d

F

A N U C

O P E N

C N C

L a d d e r E d i t i n

g P a c k a g e O P E R A T O R ’ S M A N U A

L ( B – 6 2 8 8 4 E N )

0 1

S e p . ,

’ 9 6

v i s i o n

D a t e

C o n t e n t s

R e v i s i o n

D a t e

C o n t e n t s

Open CNC Ladder Eiting Package-Operator Manual

Documents

Transcript of Open CNC Ladder Eiting Package-Operator Manual